DIAGNOSTIC ULTRASOUND

SYSTEM

Instruction Manual
How to Use (1/2)

(volume 1/2)
Instruction manuals consist of Safety
Instruction, Power Data Book, this
manual and Measurement.
Before using this system, please read
Safety Instruction.

MN1-5855 rev.1
Copyright©Hitachi Aloka Medical, Ltd. All rights reserved.

Microsoft, Windows and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries. McAfee logo and product names of McAfee are registered trademarks or
trademarks of McAfee, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. All brand name, product name,
and system name are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective owners. In this manual, ™ and ® are
omitted.
VS-FlexGrid Pro copyright©1999-2000 Videosoft Corporation. Portions of this software are based in part on the work
of the Independent JPEG Group.

MN1-5855 rev.1
 Introduction

Introduction

This is an instruction manual for F31, a diagnostic ultrasound system.

Read the manual carefully before using the system. Take special note of the items in Chapter 1,
"Safety Precautions" of Safety Instruction manual.
Keep this manual securely for future reference.

Symbols Used in this Document

The following items are important in preventing harm or injury to the operator of the equipment
and the patient. There are 4 levels of harm/damage that can be caused by ignoring
instructions/displays and using the equipment incorrectly: "Danger", "Warning", "Caution",
and "Note".
These types are indicated by the following symbols.

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result

in the death of or serious injury to the operator of the equipment.

Indicates a hazardous situation witch, if not avoided, may result in death or

serious injury.

Indicates a hazardous situation witch, if not avoided, may result in slight or

moderate injury, or property damage.

Indicates a request concerning an item that must be observed in order to

prevent damage or deterioration to the equipment and also to ensure effective
use.

Cautions of cautions shows the following graphics.

This mark means the corresponding item is "alerted".

This mark means the corresponding item is "prohibited".

This mark means the corresponding item is "required".

MN1-5855 rev.1 3
Introduction

About the F31

The F31 is intended to be used by doctors and other qualified personnel in fracture diagnostics
and hemodynamic diagnostics.
However, this equipment is not designed to be used in ophthalmic ultrasound diagnosis, as its
sound intensity is not compliant with ophthalmic restrictions established by the FDA.
Only physicians and other qualified personnel should operate this equipment for diagnostic
purposes. Read section 1-1 of the Safety Instruction manual.

1) PRECAUTIONS Concerning the Use/Management of the F31

• Do not disassemble, repair or remodel this equipment or optional features without our
consent.
NOTE: Disassemble is removing the parts or options from the equipment using
tools.

NOTE: Remodel is installing or connecting the unspecified parts or equipment,

including replacement of power cord.

• Assemble of the equipment or optional accessories shall be performed by our third party
certified. Please contact one of our offices listed on back cover.
NOTE: Assemble is installing and connecting the parts or optional accessories in
the main equipment using tools.

• Transporting this equipment (via automobile/ship) shall be performed by a third party

certified by the manufacturer. Please contact one of our offices listed on back cover.
• Please conduct routine cleaning and inspection of the equipment. Refer to Chapter 5 of the
Safety Instruction for details.
• Ensure that the output level of the scan conforms to the required duration of diagnosis.
• If any malfunction or abnormality is discovered during operation of the equipment, remove
the probe from the patient immediately and discontinue use. If any abnormality is observed
in the patient, provide proper care as quickly as possible. Refer to Chapter 4 of the Safety
Instructions for more information on dealing with the equipment appropriately. If the
malfunction is not listed in Chapter 4 of the Safety Instructions, contact one of our offices
listed on back cover.
2) PRECAURIONS for the F31 Installation
This equipment is a medical electrical equipment that intended for use in hospitals,
research facilities. The equipment should be installed in accordance with the following
guidelines.

• Install in accordance with Chapter 3 of the Safety Instructions.

• Install in an environment that conforms to the operating environments indicated in section
2-2-1 of the Safety Instructions.
• Install in an environment that ensures electromagnetic compatibility, in accordance with
section 1-2-6 of the Safety Instructions, "Precautions Concerning the Maintenance of
Electromagnetic Compatibility," and Item 1-3, "Guidelines for Electromagnetic
compatibility."

4 MN1-5855 rev.1
 Introduction

NOTE: The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is ability of device to function

satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable
electromagnetic disturbance to anything in that environment.

Classification of F31

• Protection against electric shock (ME equipment): class I • ME equipment

• Protection against electric shock (Applied parts): type BF Applied Parts

– Probe/scanner applied parts and parts treated as applied parts:

Refer to the following diagram (Probe/Scanner Pattern Diagram) and table.
B C A

connector

connector
C A
Fig. 1: Probe/Scanner Pattern Diagram
Above illustrates a surface/intraoperative probe. Below shows a coelomic probe.

Applicable part Parts treated as applied

of body Applied part parts B - C length

Surface of body Ultrasonic irradiation area (D) A to B 100 cm

Intraoperative Ultrasonic irradiation area (D) A to B 20 cm

Endocavity A to C A to C -

– ECG
The 2-meter length of the ECG cable extending from the ECG electrodes is treated as
applied part (see diagram below).

2 meters
ECG electrodes
connector

ECG patient lead

• Protection against electric shock (Defibrillation-proof applied parts): Not suitable
• Protection against harmful ingress of water or particulate matter

– equipment: IPX0 (Ordinary equipment)

– Probe applied part: IPX7 (Watertight equipment)
• Suitability for use in an oxygen rich environment: Not suitable
• Method (s) of sterilization: Not suitable for sterilization/disinfection with medicinal
solution, gas or radiation.
• Mode of operation: Continuous operation

MN1-5855 rev.1 5
Introduction

Terms used in the book

Example Method Intended

Press ENTER. Press the specified switch on the operation panel Switches on the
(ENTER in the example). operation panel
(including the Rotary
Encoder)

Turn Rotary Encoder. Rotate a switch such as Rotary Encoder to the • Rotary Encoder
left and right. • Multi Gain
To the left: counterclockwise direction • B Gain
To the right: clockwise direction • DEPTH/ZOOM

Select Preset key. Press the specified key (Preset in the example) Keyboard
on the keyboard.

Select Set-Up. 1 Using trackball, move the pointer on the • Buttons or items on
button (Set-Up in the example). the screen
2 Press ENTER. • Thumbnails
• Toggle buttons
On:
Off:
• Radio buttons
On:
Off:
Check an item. 1 Using the trackball, move the pointer to the Check boxes
Remove the check for an check box.
• Checked:
item. 2 Press ENTER.
• Unchecked:

Select from a list. 1 Using the trackball, move the pointer to the Such as menu list
item of a list.
2 Press ENTER.
Select from a pull-down list. 1 Using the trackball, move the pointer to the . Pull-down list
2 Press ENTER.
3 Using the trackball, move the pointer to the
item.
4 Press ENTER.

Preset Set-Up Menu > 1 Press the Preset key on the keyboard. Preset screen
Menu-Function 2 Move the pointer to the Set-Up and press
ENTER.
3 Move the pointer to the Preset Name and press
ENTER.
4 Move the pointer to an item (Menu-Function
in the example) indicated by Tree View and
press ENTER.

6 MN1-5855 rev.1
 Introduction

Example Method Intended

Common Preset > 1 Press the Preset key on the keyboard. Preset screen
Common2 2 Move the pointer to the Set-Up and press
ENTER.
3 Move the pointer to the Common Preset and
press ENTER.
4 Move the pointer to an item (Common2)
indicated by View and press ENTER.

NOTE: shows common notes.

PREREQUISITE: shows preparations or preset setup.

PRESET SETTINGS: shows preset items to setup.

Output from equipment or messages on screen are described as message.

Related links:
Custom SW → p.7-70

Custom SW2 → p.7-72

MN1-5855 rev.1 7
 Contents
1 Basic Operations
1-1 Screen display ...................................................................................................................... 1-1
1-2 Operation panel .................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-2-1 Panel switches ........................................................................................................................1-4
1-3 Probe switching .................................................................................................................... 1-8
1-4 Preset switching ................................................................................................................... 1-9
1-5 Adjusts the Acoustic Power ................................................................................................ 1-10
1-5-1 Canceling acoustic output restrictions ...................................................................................1-10
1-6 Menu ................................................................................................................................... 1-11
1-6-1 Select Function Menu ............................................................................................................1-12
1-7 Comment input ................................................................................................................... 1-13
1-7-1 Entering text ..........................................................................................................................1-14
1-7-2 Changing the text size ...........................................................................................................1-16
1-7-3 Moving text strings ................................................................................................................1-16
1-7-4 Deleting text ..........................................................................................................................1-17
1-7-5 Deleting text strings ...............................................................................................................1-17
1-7-6 Registering keywords of Annotation Menu ............................................................................1-18
1-7-7 Deleting a registered keyword ...............................................................................................1-19
1-8 Body Mark .......................................................................................................................... 1-20
1-8-1 Changing the body mark display ...........................................................................................1-20
1-8-2 Setting the position of the probe mark ...................................................................................1-22
1-8-3 Moving the displayed body mark position .............................................................................1-22
1-9 Volume adjustment ............................................................................................................. 1-23
1-10 User authentication ............................................................................................................. 1-24
1-10-1 Login ......................................................................................................................................1-25
1-10-2 Registering password for new user .......................................................................................1-26
1-10-3 Changing password ...............................................................................................................1-27
1-10-4 Log off ...................................................................................................................................1-28
1-11 Safety ................................................................................................................................. 1-29

2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination .............................................................................................. 2-1
2-1-1 Entering patient information ....................................................................................................2-2
2-1-2 Searching for patient information stored on the instrument: Search .....................................2-15
2-1-3 Loading patient information from HIS: Find ...........................................................................2-16

8 MN1-5855 rev.1
 2-2 Patient information management: Data Management ........................................................ 2-19
2-2-1 Loading patient information from external medium ...............................................................2-20
2-2-2 Saving patient information on external memory ....................................................................2-21
2-2-3 Deleting patient information ...................................................................................................2-22
2-3 Before finishing examination .............................................................................................. 2-23
2-3-1 Finishing and starting next examination: MPPS server is not connected ..............................2-24
2-3-2 Finishing/starting examination: Connected to MPPS server .................................................2-25
2-3-3 Interrupting an examination: Connected to MPPS server .....................................................2-26
2-3-4 Sending a DICOM SR file ......................................................................................................2-28

3 Image Display Mode

3-1 B mode ................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3-1-1 Single screen display: 1B ........................................................................................................3-1
3-1-2 Dual-screen display: 2B ..........................................................................................................3-3
3-1-3 Four-screen display: 4B ..........................................................................................................3-5
3-1-4 Switching the display depth .....................................................................................................3-8
3-1-5 Image zoom .............................................................................................................................3-9
3-1-6 Moving the focus position ......................................................................................................3-11
3-1-7 Gain adjustment: Gain ...........................................................................................................3-12
3-1-8 Adjusting the scan area: Scan Area ......................................................................................3-14
3-1-9 Adaptive Image Processing (AIP) .........................................................................................3-15
3-1-10 Tissue Harmonic Echo (T.H.E.) .............................................................................................3-16
3-1-11 Spatial Compound Imaging (SCI) ..........................................................................................3-18
3-1-12 Trapezoidal Scan ..................................................................................................................3-19
3-2 M mode ............................................................................................................................... 3-20
3-2-1 B/M and M modes .................................................................................................................3-20
3-2-2 Free Angular M mode: FAM ..................................................................................................3-24
3-3 D mode: PW, CW ............................................................................................................... 3-29
3-3-1 Displaying the PW mode .......................................................................................................3-30
3-3-2 Displaying in the CW mode ...................................................................................................3-32
3-3-3 Adjusting the Gain .................................................................................................................3-33
3-3-4 Reducing aliasing phenomena ..............................................................................................3-34
3-4 Tissue Doppler Imaging (TDI) ............................................................................................. 3-35
3-5 Flow mode: Flow, Power Flow, eFlow ................................................................................ 3-36
3-5-1 Displaying in the Flow/Power Flow/eFlow mode ...................................................................3-37
3-5-2 Dual Dynamic Display: DDD .................................................................................................3-38
3-5-3 Directional (Flow) ..................................................................................................................3-38
3-5-4 Setting the flow area ..............................................................................................................3-39
3-5-5 Adjusting the Gain .................................................................................................................3-40
3-6 Dynamic Slow Motion Display (D.S.D.) .............................................................................. 3-41
3-6-1 D.S.D. (ECG) mode ...............................................................................................................3-42
3-6-2 D.S.D. (Memory) mode .........................................................................................................3-43

MN1-5855 rev.1 9
 3-7 EFV (Extended Field of View) ............................................................................................ 3-44
3-7-1 Adjusting, Outputting and/or Measuring EFV images ...........................................................3-45
3-8 Puncture guideline .............................................................................................................. 3-46

4 Physiological Signal
4-1 Attaching the electrodes ....................................................................................................... 4-1
4-2 Displaying the physiological signals ..................................................................................... 4-2
4-3 ECG sync display: SYNC ..................................................................................................... 4-3
4-4 Heart rate stability display .................................................................................................... 4-4

5 Recording and Storing Images

5-1 Search .................................................................................................................................. 5-1
5-1-1 Search and scroll .....................................................................................................................5-2
5-1-2 Searching and scrolling B, M, PW and CW mode images ......................................................5-3
5-1-3 Searching and scrolling B/M, B/PW and B/CW mode images .................................................5-4
5-1-4 Loop playback .........................................................................................................................5-4
5-2 Image storage and output: STORE ...................................................................................... 5-7
5-2-1 Notes regarding image records and storage media ................................................................5-8
5-2-2 Image file format ......................................................................................................................5-9
5-2-3 Storing still images ................................................................................................................5-10
5-2-4 Storing a moving image .........................................................................................................5-12
5-3 Printing: Print (Archive Group) ............................................................................................ 5-18
5-3-1 Printing from real-time display ...............................................................................................5-18
5-3-2 Printing from freeze ...............................................................................................................5-19
5-4 Image review: Review ........................................................................................................ 5-20
5-4-1 Review display ......................................................................................................................5-20
5-4-2 Searching images ..................................................................................................................5-24
5-4-3 Selecting images ...................................................................................................................5-26
5-4-4 Changing the screen display of the image ............................................................................5-27
5-4-5 Deleting images .....................................................................................................................5-31
5-4-6 Copying images .....................................................................................................................5-33
5-4-7 Formatting a DVD ..................................................................................................................5-35
5-4-8 Outputting images .................................................................................................................5-36
5-5 Recording and playback with the DVD ............................................................................... 5-45
5-5-1 DVD recorders approved for connection ...............................................................................5-46
5-5-2 DVD recording .......................................................................................................................5-47
5-5-3 Displaying DVD remaining capacity ......................................................................................5-48
5-5-4 DVD playback ........................................................................................................................5-48

10 MN1-5855 rev.1
 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-1 Setting custom switches and menu ...................................................................................... 6-1
6-2 Custom Switch/Custom Keyboard ........................................................................................ 6-2
6-3 Function menu area .............................................................................................................. 6-4
6-3-1 B Mode Menu ..........................................................................................................................6-5
6-3-2 M Mode Menu .......................................................................................................................6-17
6-3-3 D Mode Menu ........................................................................................................................6-22
6-3-4 Flow Mode Menu ...................................................................................................................6-29
6-3-5 Other Menu ...........................................................................................................................6-38
6-3-6 D.S.D (Dynamic Slow Motion Display) Mode Menu ..............................................................6-52
6-3-7 Short Cut Menu .....................................................................................................................6-54

7 Preset
7-1 Changing the settings ........................................................................................................... 7-2
7-2 Common Preset .................................................................................................................... 7-4
7-2-1 Common1 ................................................................................................................................7-5
7-2-2 Common2 ................................................................................................................................7-8
7-2-3 Common3 ..............................................................................................................................7-10
7-2-4 Print (Freeze) ........................................................................................................................7-12
7-2-5 Print (RealTime) ....................................................................................................................7-13
7-2-6 Print Select ............................................................................................................................7-14
7-2-7 DICOM-Store, Send ..............................................................................................................7-16
7-2-8 DICOM-Server .......................................................................................................................7-20
7-2-9 DICOM-Address ....................................................................................................................7-24
7-2-10 DICOM-Printer .......................................................................................................................7-25
7-2-11 DICOM-SR ............................................................................................................................7-29
7-2-12 IHE/Auto Delete .....................................................................................................................7-31
7-3 Preset Control ..................................................................................................................... 7-35
7-3-1 Changing the sequence of preset items ................................................................................7-35
7-3-2 Copying a selected preset .....................................................................................................7-36
7-3-3 Copying all preset data ..........................................................................................................7-37
7-4 User Admin ......................................................................................................................... 7-38
7-4-1 Setting users authentication ..................................................................................................7-39
7-4-2 Registering new user .............................................................................................................7-40
7-4-3 Deleting registered user ........................................................................................................7-41
7-4-4 Changing user’s access level ................................................................................................7-42
7-4-5 Outputting user list ................................................................................................................7-43
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu ........................................................................................................... 7-44
7-5-1 Preset Set-Up Menu ..............................................................................................................7-45
7-5-2 Display1 .................................................................................................................................7-48
7-5-3 Display2 .................................................................................................................................7-51
7-5-4 DISP-B, M .............................................................................................................................7-54

MN1-5855 rev.1 11
 7-5-5 DISP-D, Flow .........................................................................................................................7-57
7-5-6 ID, Comment .........................................................................................................................7-59
7-5-7 Graphics ................................................................................................................................7-61
7-5-8 Store, Cine ............................................................................................................................7-64
7-5-9 Body Mark .............................................................................................................................7-67
7-5-10 Menu-Function ......................................................................................................................7-69
7-5-11 Custom SW ...........................................................................................................................7-70
7-5-12 Custom SW2 .........................................................................................................................7-72
7-5-13 Custom-Foot ..........................................................................................................................7-74
7-5-14 Custom-Keyboard .................................................................................................................7-75
7-5-15 Physio ....................................................................................................................................7-76
7-5-16 Image-B, M1 ..........................................................................................................................7-78
7-5-17 Image-B, M2 ..........................................................................................................................7-80
7-5-18 Focus .....................................................................................................................................7-86
7-5-19 Post Processing ....................................................................................................................7-88
7-5-20 Doppler1 ................................................................................................................................7-90
7-5-21 Doppler2 ................................................................................................................................7-95
7-5-22 Image Optimizer ....................................................................................................................7-97
7-5-23 Flow .......................................................................................................................................7-99
7-5-24 Power Flow ..........................................................................................................................7-103
7-5-25 eFlow ...................................................................................................................................7-107
7-5-26 Tissue Doppler ....................................................................................................................7-111
7-5-27 Tissue Flow .........................................................................................................................7-116
7-5-28 Tissue Power Flow ..............................................................................................................7-121
7-5-29 FAM .....................................................................................................................................7-126

8 Freehand 3D
8-1 3D screen ............................................................................................................................. 8-2
8-1-1 3D mode screen ......................................................................................................................8-2
8-1-2 Operation panel switches and custom switches ......................................................................8-4
8-2 Freehand 3D ......................................................................................................................... 8-5
8-3 Adjusting and editing 3D images .......................................................................................... 8-7
8-3-1 Switching the ROI display format ............................................................................................8-7
8-3-2 Changing the viewpoint ...........................................................................................................8-8
8-3-3 Moving and rotating volume data ............................................................................................8-8
8-3-4 Switching rendering modes ...................................................................................................8-12
8-3-5 Zooming ................................................................................................................................8-13
8-3-6 Adjusting brightness or gamma .............................................................................................8-13
8-3-7 Continuously rotating a 3D image: 3D Loop ..........................................................................8-14
8-3-8 Adjusting opacity ...................................................................................................................8-15
8-3-9 Deleting unnecessary regions ...............................................................................................8-16
8-3-10 Cutting a given section ..........................................................................................................8-17
8-3-11 Switching the color display ....................................................................................................8-18
8-3-12 Displaying slice images: Multi Slice Imaging .........................................................................8-19

12 MN1-5855 rev.1
 8-3-13 Outputting 3D screen ............................................................................................................8-21
8-4 Function Menu .................................................................................................................... 8-22
8-4-1 RT3D menu ...........................................................................................................................8-22
8-4-2 Freehand 3D menu ...............................................................................................................8-32
8-4-3 3D Loop menu .......................................................................................................................8-35
8-4-4 Multi Slice Imaging menu ......................................................................................................8-37
8-5 Preset ................................................................................................................................. 8-39
8-5-1 RT3D1 ...................................................................................................................................8-39
8-5-2 RT3D2 ...................................................................................................................................8-43
8-5-3 RT3D3 ...................................................................................................................................8-46
8-5-4 3D Scan .................................................................................................................................8-48
8-5-5 Flow 3D .................................................................................................................................8-50
8-6 Terminology ........................................................................................................................ 8-53

MN1-5855 rev.1 13
14 MN1-5855 rev.1
 1 Basic Operations
1-1 Screen display

1 Basic Operations

1-1 Screen display

B mode image is displayed as follows.

(1)
(2)

(4) (3)

(5)
(6) (7)
(8)

(1) Hospital name

(2) Patient identification information such as ID and NAME
(3) Current data and time
(4) Automatic display area 1
MI=#.## Mechanical index (Displayed during real time).

TIS<#.# Thermal index (TIS, TIB or TIC). Displayed during real time.
Set the display type with Thermal Index in the Function menu (Preset
Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function) or Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu >
Graphics, Information).
100% Acoustic output value.

20 Hz No. of frames displayed per 1 sec.

1 Screen number.

##° Correction value for Doppler angle (Displayed during Angle Correct).

148/152 Display frame number/number of images stored in the cine memory

(Displayed during freeze).

MN1-5855 rev.1 1-1

1 Basic Operations
1-1 Screen display

(5) Automatic display area 2

2.11MR Frequency of the selected probe.

R17.0 Display depth (cm).

G67 Gain.
D66 Dynamic Range.
A1 AGC (Not displayed at Off).
(6) Automatic display area 3 (2 Lines)
Sonographer Sonographer’s name entered on the ID screen (displayed only when it is
entered).
2:Abdomen Name and number of active preset.

Probe:9123 Selected probe.

AIP Indicates that AIP is in operation.

BbH Indicates that Broadband Harmonics is in operation.

SCI Indicates that Spatial Compound Imaging is in operation.

(7) Automatic display area 4 (2 Lines)
Punc:##° Puncture angle at Puncture Guideline (Displayed during Puncture
Guideline).
S.V.:##.#mm Sample volume (when the sample volume mark is displayed).

Depth:##.#cm Sample depth (when the sample volume mark is displayed).

(8) Status bar Indicates used memory space on the HDD.

Status bar color and used disk memory space

HDD Blue indicates that used memory space ranges from 1% to 70%.

HDD
HDD Yellow indicates that used memory space ranges from 71% to
90%.
HDD
HDD Red indicates that used memory space ranges from 91% to 100%.
NOTE: You will be unable to store images if the used memory
space reached 100%. Delete unnecessary data from the
HDD.

The image below shows graphics of the following contents.

1-2 MN1-5855 rev.1

 1 Basic Operations
1-1 Screen display

(2)
(1)
(3)

(4)

(5)

(1) Grayscale bar (gradation of B mode image)

(2) Active mark: This mark coincides with the front direction mark on the probe.

Active state: An active image is the image on which operations can be performed when
two or more images are displayed.
Inactive state

(3) Thumbnail area (displayed on the right of the screen)

Displays the stored image in thumbnail view.
(4) Focus mark: Indicates the set focal points.
(5) Scale mark: The scale interval differs depending on the display range.

Display range Scale (small) Scale (large)

R0.5 to R2.0 0.1 cm 0.5 cm
R2.5 to R6.0 0.5 cm 1.0 cm
R7.0 to R29.0 1.0 cm 5.0 cm
R30 5.0 cm 10.0 cm

MN1-5855 rev.1 1-3

1 Basic Operations
1-2 Operation panel

1-2 Operation panel

The operation panel consists of the panel switches and the keyboard.
This section describes each button on the operation panel by the factory default settings.

1-2-1 Panel switches

The switches on the operation panel consist of the following switches.

(1) (8)

R
(9)
(2)

(3) (10)

(4)

(5)

(11)
(6)

(12)

(7)
(13)

Name of switch
(Display) Contents

(1) POWER The white light indicates that the power is ON and the orange-light
indicated STAND BY mode.

(2) Key board Keyboard → p.1-7.

(3) MENU Displays the Function menu on the screen.

Switching the menu.

1-4 MN1-5855 rev.1

 1 Basic Operations
1-2 Operation panel

Name of switch
(Display) Contents
(4) NEW PATIENT Returns to the initial settings. Displays the ID input screen.

(5) Trackball function Switches between the Focus and Scan Area (Flow Area).
(TBF) Starts the Search function in the freeze mode.

(6) BODY MARK Displays the Body Mark menu on the Function menu.
Switches the Body Mark menu display between show and hide.

(7) Trackball Moves the pointer.

(8) Illuminance sensor Photo chromatic sensor of the operation panel switch, keyboard and
trackball.

(9) STC Adjusts sensitivity at the display depth corresponding to the value.

(10) Rotary Encoder 1 to 5 Select the menu or change the set value.

(11) PRINT Records images to a recording instrument connected to this

instrument.You can record images by pressing and holding down this
switch.

(12) FREEZE Press: Switches between the real time display and the still image
display.
Turn: Works as the B GAIN knob to adjust B Gain.

(13) Rotary Encoder Can be used to change the set values to assist the trackball.

Name of switch (Display) Contents

B Displays in the B mode.

B/B Displays in the 2B mode.

SELECT Selects the active screen when two or more images (2B, B/M, etc.)
are displayed.
If one of the displays was shown in real time such as 2B mode, the
real time display can be switched. If both images are displayed in
real time, such as in the B/M or the B/D mode, only the M or D mode
image can be switched and displayed in real time.

USER1 to USER4 Activates the function assigned by navigating the preset to Preset
Set-Up Menu > Custom SW.

STORE Saves a still or a moving image on the screen.

ENTER Sets measurement, preset, comment input, review, Flow Area setup,
etc.
This button can be assigned as the SEND key by navigating the
preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom SW2).

+ (Caliper) Starts the measurement menu assigned to this switch.

CURSOR Moves or sets the cursor, sample volume and the baseline of the
Doppler pattern.

MN1-5855 rev.1 1-5

1 Basic Operations
1-2 Operation panel

Name of switch (Display) Contents

CANCEL Cancels the selected operation. Or, goes back to the previous step if
measurement was in progress.

M Displays in the B/M mode.

D Displays in the B/PW mode.

When it is pressed and held down, it displays in the B/CW mode.

F Displays Flow in a B or M mode image.

When it is pressed and held down, it displays in the eFlow mode.

DEPTH/ZOOM Changes the display depth of the image when the white light is on.
Zooms up the B mode image when the orange light is on.

MULTI GAIN Adjusts sensitivity in the M, D or FLOW modes according to the

switching between these modes.

1-6 MN1-5855 rev.1

 1 Basic Operations
1-2 Operation panel

1-2-1-1 Keyboard

W E R

Key contents

Displays the measurement menu.

(Measurement)
Review Displays the Review.

Full Displays the M mode image only during the B/M mode display and
the D mode image only during the B/D mode display.

F4 to F7 Function keys.

F8 Function keys. The factory default setting is EXT.

F9 to F11 Function keys.

Preset Displays the Preset screen.

Probe Displays the Probe menu.

Acoust Power Adjusts the Acoustic Power.

F14 to F15 Function keys.

ID Displays the ID input screen without returning to the initial settings.

Comment Enters comments on the screen or ends comment input.

F16 Function key. It can be assigned as SEND or ENTER.

Related links:
Custom SW → p.7-70
Custom SW2 → p.7-72

MN1-5855 rev.1 1-7

1 Basic Operations
1-3 Probe switching

1-3 Probe switching

Select a probe that displays an ultrasonic tomographic image on the screen.

1. Select Probe key.

→ The Probe Select menu is displayed. The currently-selected probe name is indicated in
orange.
2. Press or turn the Rotary Encoder of the probe to the right or left.

→ The display changes according to the probe selected.

1-8 MN1-5855 rev.1

 1 Basic Operations
1-4 Preset switching

1-4 Preset switching

1. Select Preset key.

→ 15 preset names are displayed per screen.

Name List

2. Select the Preset from the Name list.

When the preset you want to select is not displayed
Press Next or Prev to switch the Name list page.
→ The display changes according to the preset selected.

MN1-5855 rev.1 1-9

1 Basic Operations
1-5 Adjusts the Acoustic Power

1-5 Adjusts the Acoustic Power

Scan only for the minimum length of time necessary for the diagnosis at the lowest suitable
output.
There is the possibility that the patient's internal tissues could be affected.
There may be influences on the fetal growth.

For cautions regarding acoustic output, see Safety Instruction.

1. Select Acoust Power key.

2. Turn Rotary Encoder and adjusts.

1-5-1 Canceling acoustic output restrictions

This instrument limits transmission power in accordance with IEC 60601-2-37 Ed. 2 (2007)
when it is used for fetal observation or at the initial startup after being shipped from a factory.
Power Limit Override temporarily overrides the acoustic output restrictions set for fetal
observation.

Temporarily overrides the restrictions when the type of examination (Application) is one of the
followings:

• General • OBST • OBST-TV

• Fetal Heart • Fetal Brain • Placenta

NOTE: Navigate the preset to Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function and assign Power Limit
Override.

1. Select Power Limit Override from the Function menu.

→ The following message is displayed.
”Please keep acoustic output level as low as possible.
Exposure to high levels of ultrasound waves can be
unsafe. Refer to ALARA recommendatations”
2. Select OK.
→ The transmission power restrictions temporarily overridden.
When Cancel is selected, the message is deleted without overriding the restrictions.

1-10 MN1-5855 rev.1

 1 Basic Operations
1-6 Menu

1-6 Menu

The menu is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select the menu or set values using Rotary
Encoder 1 to Rotary Encoder 5 on the control panel.

(1) (2) (3)

(1) Mode Menu Current mode menu and page

(2) Function Menu a) Blue: Adjustable (selectable)
Orange: In operation
a) Gray: Adjustable (selectable)

b) b) Present setting
c) Function that can be switched by pressing the Rotary Encoder
c)

(3) Trackball Menu Current trackball functions

RE 1 RE 2 RE 3 RE 4 RE 5

MENU switch Displays the Function menu

Menu switching
RE 1: Rotary Encoder 1 Change the set value
RE 2: Rotary Encoder 2 Change the set value
RE 3: Rotary Encoder 3 Change the set value
RE 4: Rotary Encoder 4 Change the set value
RE 5: Rotary Encoder 5 Change the set value

MN1-5855 rev.1 1-11

1 Basic Operations
1-6 Menu

1-6-1 Select Function Menu

Display the function menu of the selected mode menu.

You can assign the function menu in the preset.

1. Switch the Mode menu.

• Switch the page in the mode using the right or left button on the control panel.

• Switch to another mode using the up or down button on the control panel.

2. Select Function menu.

To activate the upper-row function
Switch the functions in the upper and lower rows by pressing the Rotary Encoder 1 to Rotary
Encoder 5.

3. Make adjustments using the Rotary Encoder.

To change the value To switch On/Off When there is no set value

Down Up Off On

Turn Rotary Encoder to the Turn Rotary Encoder to the Turn Rotary Encoder.
left and right. left and right.

Right: Increases the value. Right: On The effect is the same if this is
Left: Decreases the value. Left: Off turned right or left.

Probe switching → p.1-8

Changing the body mark display → p.1-20

1-12 MN1-5855 rev.1

 1 Basic Operations
1-7 Comment input

1-7 Comment input

Enter text in the text area of the screen.

Fig. 1-1: Comment Area

Directly entering letters as well as using the System Dictionary and Learning Function can save
your time when entering data.

• For the System Dictionary, keywords whose first letter is the same as the letter entered
appear in the Annotation menu.
• The Learning Function prioritizes previously selected keywords in the menu display.

MN1-5855 rev.1 1-13

1 Basic Operations
1-7 Comment input

1-7-1 Entering text

Enter text at comment area of the screen.

1. Select Comment key.

→ The pointer is displayed on the screen.
2. Use the trackball to move the pointer to the area you want to enter a comment.
3. Enter text using the keyboard.
To use the Annotation menu
Set the System Dictionary (Common Preset > Common2 > System Dictionary) to Use. The
keywords will be displayed on the screen when you input a character. Use the Rotary Encoder to
highlight the keyword you wish to enter.
Fig. 1-2: Example of Annotation menu display

b c

4. Press ENTER or ENTER key.

→ The input is confirmed.

1-14 MN1-5855 rev.1

 1 Basic Operations
1-7 Comment input

1-7-1-1 Entering special characters

You can enter special characters using the input keys below.

Special Key Special Key

characters combination characters combination

! Shift and 1 Ctrl and E

@ Shift and 2 Ctrl and R

# Shift and 3 Ctrl and T

$ Shift and 4 Ctrl and Y

% Shift and 5 Ctrl and U

^ Shift and 6 Ctrl and I

& Shift and 7 Ctrl and O

* Shift and 8 Ctrl and P

( Shift and 9

) Shift and 0

_ Shift and -

+ Shift and =

{ Shift and [

} Shift and ]

| Shift and \

: Shift and ;

“ Shift and ’

? Shift and /

• Example: Shift and 1

Hold down the Shift and press 1.
• Example: Ctrl and E
Hold down the Ctrl and press E.

MN1-5855 rev.1 1-15

1 Basic Operations
1-7 Comment input

1-7-2 Changing the text size

Navigate the preset to Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function and assign Character Size.

1. Select Character Size from the Function menu.

2. Select the character size using the Rotary Encoder.
• Normal is a normal size
• Large is a double size of Normal (Width 2 × Height 2)

→ You can enter the letters in the selected character size.

Related links:
ID, Comment setting items → p.7-60

1-7-3 Moving text strings

Reposition the text string entered on the screen.

1. Place the pointer on the text string.

→ A pointer cursor is displayed alongside the text string.

2. Select F16 (SEND) key.

→ The text string is highlighted.

3. Use the trackball to move the text string.

4. Select F16 (SEND) key.
→ The position of the text string is confirmed.

1-16 MN1-5855 rev.1

 1 Basic Operations
1-7 Comment input

1-7-4 Deleting text

1. Place the pointer cursor to the right of the text to delete.

2. Select Back Space key.
→ The character to the left of the text cursor is erased.

1-7-5 Deleting text strings

1-7-5-1 Deleting specific text strings

1. Place the pointer on the text string to delete.

2. Select Delete key.
→ The text string next to the pointer cursor is erased.

1-7-5-2 Deleting all texts on the screen

There are two ways to delete text.

● Place the pointer on anywhere other than a text string, and select Delete key.
● Cancel the freeze (if Auto Comment Off was set to Erase in the preset (Preset
Set-Up Menu > ID, Comment)).

MN1-5855 rev.1 1-17

1 Basic Operations
1-7 Comment input

1-7-6 Registering keywords of Annotation Menu

Register any desired keywords in Dictionary 1 to 6.

1. Select Comment key.

2. Select Ctrl+D key.
→ The following dialog box is displayed.

a: Dictionary field
a
b: Key field
b c
c: Word field

3. Select Dictionary to register a keyword.

a Move to the Dictionary field, select the Dictionary number to register and press
ENTER.
→ The next available Dictionary number is displayed.
4. Enter a keyword.
a Select Key field.
b Enter up to 8 digits using the keyboard.
→ The keyword that is entered in Key field is displayed. The same word is also displayed
in the Word field.

c Press ENTER.
→ The Key filed is confirmed.
5. If the keyword differs from the text string on the screen (e.g. complete spelling), enter
the text string in the Word field.
a Select Word field.
b Enter up to 54 digits using the keyboard.
c Press ENTER.

To set Word for entering characters

Navigate the preset to Preset Set-Up Menu > ID, Comment and set Annotation Dic. Type to
Full Spelling.
The factory default setting is to enter the text string entered in the Key field.
6. Select OK.
→ The keyword and the text are registered in the dictionary.

1-18 MN1-5855 rev.1

 1 Basic Operations
1-7 Comment input

1-7-7 Deleting a registered keyword

1. Select Comment key.

2. Select Ctrl+D key.
→ The registered Annotation menu and a dialog box are displayed.

3. Select the keyword to be deleted from the Annotation menu by turning the Rotary
Encoder, and select the F16 (SEND) key.
→ The keyword is displayed in the dialog box.
4. Select Delete from the dialog box.
→ The keyword is deleted from the dictionary. The keyword is erased from the Annotation
menu.
5. Select OK.
→ This closes the dialog box.

MN1-5855 rev.1 1-19

1 Basic Operations
1-8 Body Mark

1-8 Body Mark

You can display the examined body part or the posture at the time of the examination with illus-
trations (body marks).
Probe positions can be displayed on the body mark.
The body mark display can be turned on or off with the BODY MARK switch.
The body mark is displayed when the BODY MARK switch is lit in orange.
The body mark is removed from the screen when the switch is lit in white.

1-8-1 Changing the body mark display

1. Press BODY MARK.

→ The Body Mark menu is displayed and the currently-selected body mark display lights in
orange.
2. Press or turn the Rotary Encoder of the body mark to be changed to the right or left.

RE 1 RE 2 RE 3 RE 4 RE 5

→ The body mark changes.

1-20 MN1-5855 rev.1

 1 Basic Operations
1-8 Body Mark

1-8-1-1 Rotating the fetus mark

The fetus mark can be rotated to display a fetus in breech or other position.

1. Display the fetus body marks.

a Select Preset key.
b From the Name list, select the preset that has the OBST application.
c Press BODY MARK.
d Select the fetus mark to display from the function menu.

2. Press ENTER.
3. Turn Rotary Encoder.
→ The fetus mark rotates.

4. Press ENTER.
→ The fetus mark rotation is confirmed for display. Subsequently, Rotary Encoder rotates
the probe mark.
To rotate the fetus mark again, repeat the above steps from Step 2.
The twin fetus mark rotates differently from other marks.
Fig. 1-3: When the Rotary Encoder is turned to the right

MN1-5855 rev.1 1-21

1 Basic Operations
1-8 Body Mark

1-8-2 Setting the position of the probe mark

● Use the trackball to move the probe mark.

● Turn the probe mark using Rotary Encoder.

1-8-3 Moving the displayed body mark position

Assign Body Mark Location and Body Mark Reset to Function menu on Preset (Preset
Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function).

1. Turn the Rotary Encoder corresponding to the Body Mark Location in the function
menu.
→ A square frame is displayed over the body mark.

2. Using the trackball, move the square frame, and press ENTER.
→ The body mark moves.
3. Turn the Rotary Encoder corresponding to the Body Mark Location to cancel the
selection and confirm the position.
Restoring the default position
a) Turn the Rotary Encoder corresponding to the Body Mark Location in the function
menu.
A square frame is displayed over the body mark.
b) Turn the Rotary Encoder corresponding to the Body Mark Reset in the function menu.
c) Turn the Rotary Encoder corresponding to the Body Mark Location to cancel the
selection.

1-22 MN1-5855 rev.1

 1 Basic Operations
1-9 Volume adjustment

1-9 Volume adjustment

This function adjusts the volume of the Doppler sound, R-wave beep, and external input audio.

1. Switch the function menu to the Image Func Other page.

2. Use Audio Volume to adjust the volume.
Sound is muted when volume is set to 0.

Down Up

MN1-5855 rev.1 1-23

1 Basic Operations
1-10 User authentication

1-10 User authentication

You can restrict the access of the diagnostic ultrasound system to the registered users so that the
patient data is protected from unauthorized access. Only registered users can operate the
instrument, and therefore unauthorized user cannot even access to the instrument to operate it.
The level of access to the instrument also differs depending on the user's access right, and
therefore any unregistered user cannot change or alter the settings unless he/she has a proper
access rights. Only the registered users with proper access can securely manage settings such as
Preset.
NOTE: At the factory default setting, the user authentication function is disabled. No users are
registered. To enable the user authentication function, please contact one of our offices listed on
back cover.

There are three different access levels, and each user can operate the instrument according to
their user levels.

Operation items (Access rights) 1 2 3

Operation on user management screen Yes No No
• ON/OFF settings for user authentication function
• User management (new user registration, deletion, and
level settings)
Patient data management Yes Yes No
Preset setup Yes Yes No
Changing login passwords Yes Yes Yes
All other general operations Yes Yes Yes

1-24 MN1-5855 rev.1

 1 Basic Operations
1-10 User authentication

1-10-1 Login

At the instrument starting up or during the log off period, the login screen appears to verify the
users authentication.

If the User authentication function is turned On at the setup, the login screen appears at the
instrument starting up or during the log off period. To start using the instrument, any user needs
to be verified as a authorized user.

If the User authentication function is turned Off at the setup, the login screen will not appear.

1. On the login screen, enter your user name on User name and your password on
Password.
2. Select OK.
→ Once the user name and the password are verified, the user can start using the instrument.
If the user name and/or password is wrong, a message such as ”Invalid name or
password.” appears. Press OK and enter the correct user name and password.

MN1-5855 rev.1 1-25

1 Basic Operations
1-10 User authentication

1-10-2 Registering password for new user

A new user is required to register a password for the first-time login.

Only Level 1 user can register a new user. For details of user registration, contact the Level 1
user or system administrator.

1. Enter new user name in User name on the login screen.

2. Select Password.
→ Change/Register password dialog box is displayed.
3. On New Password of the Change/Register password dialog box, enter the alphanumeric
passwords with 4 to 16 characters.
4. Enter the same password into Reconfirmation.
5. Select OK.
→ The login screen is displayed when the access is granted. If you selected Cancel, the display
returns to the login screen without setting any password.
• A message such as ”Invalid password. please choose another.” is
displayed when the password contains the character that can not be used or too many or less
characters than specified. Select OK and set a password again.
• A message such as ”The passwords did not match, please
re-enter your new password” is displayed when the passwords entered on
New Password and Reconfirmation are not the same. Select OK and set a password again.

1-26 MN1-5855 rev.1

 1 Basic Operations
1-10 User authentication

1-10-3 Changing password

Changing the password for the existing user.

1. Enter user name into User name on the login screen.

2. Select Password.
→ Change/Register password dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter old password into Current Password.
4. Enter new alphanumeric passwords with 4 to 16 characters into New Password.
5. Enter new password into Reconfirmation again.
6. Select OK.
→ The login screen is displayed when the access is granted. If you selected Cancel, the
display returns to the login screen without setting any password.
• A message such as ”Invalid password. please choose another.” is
displayed when the password contains the character that can not be used or too many or less
characters than specified. Select OK and set a password again.
• A message such as ”The passwords did not match, please
re-enter your new password.” is displayed when the passwords entered on
New Password and Reconfirmation are not the same. Select OK and set a password
again.
• A message such as ”Invalid name or password” is displayed when the User
Name and the Current Password did not match. Select OK and re-enter User Name and
Current Password.

MN1-5855 rev.1 1-27

1 Basic Operations
1-10 User authentication

1-10-4 Log off

To log off, assign Log Off to the preset function menu, custom switch or function key.

• Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function

• Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom SW
• Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom-Keyboard
You will not be able to log off from the Review, Preset, Store, Loop playback, ID and EXT
screens.

● Select Log Off that was assigned to the function menu, custom switch or function
key.
→ The login screen is displayed. After this, no operation other than login can not be perfumed.
The instrument shutdown will be regarded as logoff. On the next start-up, the login screen
is displayed.

1-28 MN1-5855 rev.1

 1 Basic Operations
1-11 Safety

1-11 Safety

When using this instrument, read the Instruction Manual – Safety Instructions and follow the
procedures to inspect the instrument prior to use and after the operation. This instrument
requires periodical maintenance inspections and the safety checks. If an inspection finds an
abnormal condition in the probe, stop using the instrument immediately and contact one of our
offices listed on back cover.

1) Safety of patients
While in use, monitor the instrument and the patient for any signs of abnormal behavior.
If any abnormality occurred while the use of the instrument, remove the probe from the
patient immediately, and stop using it.
Provide appropriate medical treatments if the patient’s condition is abnormal.
2) Instrument malfunction
Follow the procedures on "4 Troubleshooting" of Instruction Manual – Safety
Instructions and take appropriate measures. When any abnormality that is not described
in the Instruction Manual – Safety Instructions occurred, stop using the instrument
immediately and place a safety tag to avoid further use as necessary. Then, contact one
of our offices listed on back cover.

MN1-5855 rev.1 1-29

1 Basic Operations
1-11 Safety

1-30 MN1-5855 rev.1

 2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

2 Patient Information

2-1 Before you begin examination

The patient information (ID number, name, etc.) is entered to display it on the screen. The
entered data can be used for displaying a report. The patient information can be entered from
the keyboard.
There are three ways to enter the patient information:

• Entering directly on the ID screen

• Searching for patient information stored on the instrument
• Searching for patient information (Worklist) obtained from HIS
NOTE:To connect the Worklist, MPPS server and DICOM SR server, the optional software:
DICOM Network Communication Software (SOP-F31-10) is required.

MN1-5855 rev.1 2-1

2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

2-1-1 Entering patient information

Enter patient information directly on the ID input screen of the instrument.

1. Press NEW PATIENT.

→ The ID input screen is displayed.
2.

3.
4.

2. Select the input format from the pull-down list in the ID Input field.
• ID Name: Enter ID, name, age and sex only
• ID Obstetrics: Enter obstetrical data in addition to ID Name
• ID Gynecology: Enter gynecological data in addition to ID Name
• ID BSA: Enter body surface area in addition to ID Name
• ID Urology: Enter urological data in addition to ID Name
• ID BMI: Displays BMI in addition to ID Name

→ Items relevant to the application are also displayed in the Study Information fields.
3. Enter a patient ID in the Patient ID field.
a Select the Patient ID field.
b Enter the patient ID using the keyboard.
c Select the Tab key or Enter key.

→ If the ID has been registered previously, the patient information from the previous visit is
displayed.
NOTE: On the start-up, Patient ID is displayed as ”No ID”. No image can be stored as a
No ID item. Enter patient information on the ID input screen.

2-2 MN1-5855 rev.1

 2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

4. Enter the patient name in the Patient Name field using the keyboard.
a Select the Patient ID field.
b Use the keyboard to enter the patient name in alphabetic characters, in the sequence of
family name (last name), one space, and given name (first name), using up to a total of 64
characters.
If there are three entry fields
Enter in the order of family, given and middle names; total of 64 characters.
c Select the Tab key or Enter key.

5. Select sex in the Sex field.

6. Select or enter the date in the Date of birth field.
To enter directly
Enter the year in 4 digits (input example: 2010/04/01).
To use the Japanese era format, enter the letter H, S, T or M (either in upper or lower case) and then
enter the year. (e.g. "M40", "t7", "S35" Input example: H22/04/01)
To select the date
Select ▼ on the right of the Data of birth field to display the calendar.

Display the calendar for the birth year and month and then select the birth date. Once the Data of
birth fields are filled, the Age is displayed in the form D (day), W (week), M (month) or Y (year).
Select year display to change to the year.

Select month display to select the month.

7. Enter the information to the other fields in the same manner.

8. After the data are all entered, select OK.
→ Return to the ultrasound tomography image screen. Out of the data entered, Patient Name,
Patient ID, Sex, Age are displayed on the screen. The data such as BSA, GA and BMI are
also displayed depending on how the ID Input field is select.
If any ID info is missing, such as x date - time it will be assigned automatically. For
example, if no ID was entered but it was at 9:25:47 on March 15th, 2010, then the ID will
be "x100315-092547".

MN1-5855 rev.1 2-3

2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

2-1-1-1 ID entry screen

This screen consists of the following buttons/switches.

Buttons/Switches Function
Search Switches to the Search screen for searching patient information from the
patient database in the instrument.
Find Switches to the Find screen for loading patient information from HIS (Hospital
Information System) into the instrument.
Worklist Displays the Worklist loaded from the HIS.

Data Management Displays the Data Management screen to manage patient information.

ID Input Switches the format of the ID input screen according to the operation.
There are 6 different ID input formats.
Series/Image Switches to the screen for entering the attributes related to images.
Information
Option... Switches to the ID Screen Option screen.
Sets the options for Worklist or the ID input screen.
OK Saves the content and returns to the ultrasound tomography image screen.

Cancel (Only when it was displayed by ID switch)

Discards the content and returns to the ultrasound tomography image screen.

2-4 MN1-5855 rev.1

 2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

2-1-1-2 Patient Information items

On the Patient Information, the following items can be entered. The same items are displayed
on any input format of ID Input.
In the Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > ID, Comment), the default items can be set.

Item Function
Patient ID Enter patient ID.
If the ID has not been entered, the ID x date-time will be assigned
automatically. For example, if no ID was entered but it was at 9:25:47 on
March 15, 2010, then the ID x100315-092547 would be assigned.
Patient Name Enter patient Name.
If there are three entry fields, enter in the order of family, given and middle
names, within 64 characters in total.
Sex Select one of the field values: M (Male), F (Female), Other or blank.

Date of birth Date of birth is displayed in 19xx or 20xx format.

Age is calculated after entry.
Age Calculated from the difference between the current date and the date of birth,
and displayed. D stands for within 6 days after birth or younger, W for 7 to 29
days after birth, M for 30 to 364 days after birth, and Y for 365 or older.
If the Age is input directly, the entered Date of birth is erased.
Height Available units are meters, centimeters, feet and inches. The unit is set at the
Preset (Common Preset > Common1).
Weight Available units are kilograms, pounds and ounces. The unit is set at the Preset
(Common Preset > Common1).
Occupation Enter the occupation of patient.

MN1-5855 rev.1 2-5

2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

2-1-1-3 Study Information

Study Information consists of the following items, which are separated from the ID input
format.

Item Setting Function

Procedure ID Display the examination ID obtained from the Worklist.

Study ID Display the number of examinations that a patient received with

the identical ID number.
Accession (16 digits) Displaying the accession number.

Study Display the examination item (s) obtained from the Worklist.
Description
Referring Phys (Up to 64 digits) Name of the physician performing the examination.
Select from the pull-down list or use the keyboard to enter the
name.
If there are three entry fields, enter in the order of family, given
and middle names; up to 64 characters in total.
Reporting Phys (Up to 64 digits) Name of the physician responsible for diagnosis.
Select from the pull-down list or use the keyboard to enter the
name.
Sonographer (Up to 64 digits) Ultrasound examiner.
Select from the pull-down list or use the keyboard to enter the
name.

2-6 MN1-5855 rev.1

 2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

Additional items can be added by selecting the ID Input field.

Selecting ID Obstetrics from ID Input field

If Female is selected for sex, the following items are added.

Item Setting Function

GA LMP Based on the last date of menstrual period, the gestational week
EDC and the expected confinement date are calculated.
GA = (Current date - LMP)/7
EDC = 280 days + LMP
BBT Based on the estimated date of ovulation, the gestational week
and the expected confinement date are calculated.
GA = (Current date - BBT + 14 days)/7
EDC = (280 days - 14 days) + BBT
EGA Based on the past examination date and the gestational week at
that time, the gestational week and the expected confinement
data are calculated.
GA = (Current date - Past examination)/7 + EGA
EDC = Pst examination date + (280 days - EGA)
EDC Based on the expected confinement date, the gestational week is
calculated.
GA = (280 days - (EDC - Current date))/7
GA Based on the gestational week, the expected confinement date is
calculated.
EDC = Current date + (280 days - GA×7)
GRAV 0 to 99 (integer) Enter the number of pregnancies from the keyboard.

PARA 0 to 99 (integer) Enter the number of births from the keyboard.

AB 0 to 99 (integer) Enter the number of abortions or miscarriages from the

keyboard.
ECTO 0 to 99 (integer) Enter the number of ectopic pregnancies from the keyboard.

BMI (Auto calculation) NOTE: The value will not show up on the screen during
examination.

MN1-5855 rev.1 2-7

2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

Selecting ID Gynecology from ID Input field

If Female is selected for sex, the following items are added.

Item Setting Function

Cycle Day LMP Based on the last date of menstrual period, the menstrual cycle is
calculated.
BBT Based on the estimated date of ovulation, the menstrual cycle is
calculated.
GRAV 0 to 99 (integer) Enter the number of pregnancies from the keyboard.

PARA 0 to 99 (integer) Enter the number of births from the keyboard.

AB 0 to 99 (integer) Enter the number of abortions or miscarriages from the

keyboard.
ECTO 0 to 99 (integer) Enter the number of ectopic pregnancies from the keyboard.

BMI (Auto calculation) NOTE: The value will not show up on the screen during
examination.

Selecting ID Urology from ID Input field

If Male is selected for sex, the following items are added.

Item Setting Function

Serum PSA (Direct entry) Enter the value of serum PSA (ng/ml) from the keyboard.

BMI (Auto calculation) NOTE: The value will not show up on the screen during
examination.

2-8 MN1-5855 rev.1

 2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

Selecting ID BSA from ID Input field

Select the calculation formula from the list. Or, use the keyboard to enter the values.

Item Setting Function

BSA DuBois Calculates the body surface area by DuBois formula.
BSA = 0.007184 × H0.725 × W0.425
BSA: m2, H: cm, W: kg
Boyd Calculates the body surface area by the Boyd formula.
BSA = 0.0003207 × H0.3 × W (0.7285-0.0188 × logW)
BSA: m2, H: cm, W: g
Shintani Calculates the body surface area by the Shintani formula.
BSA = 0.007358 × H0.725 × W0.425
BSA: m2, H: cm, W: kg
Key in Enters the body surface area (m2) manually using the keyboard.
BMI (Auto calculation) NOTE: The value will not show up on the screen during
examination.

Selecting ID BMI from ID Input field

The following items are added:

Item Setting Function

BMI (Auto calculation) Displays automatically after the height and the weight are
entered.
BMI = W÷H2 　 W: kg, H: m

MN1-5855 rev.1 2-9

2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

2-1-1-4 Series/Image Information

These items appears when you select Series/Image Information on the ID screen. When the
following items are selected, the attributes related to images appears and you can enter new
attributes.

Item Setting Function

Performed Protocol Use this function when reporting the examination contents
Code Sequence to the MPPS server or to the DICOM image data.

Body Part Examined Select the region to be examined from the list.

Laterality Enter the laterality (left and right) of a body part to be

examined.
Description Enter the description of a image.

Image Type Select the image type from the list.

Patient Orientation Left Enter an anatomical orientation of a patient. Indicates two

Right orientations of a patient, one viewed from the side and the
other viewed from above, by Anterior, Posterior, Head,
Feet
Feet, Left, Right, inserting a backslash in between.
Head
Anterior
Posterior
Region Calibration ON Select this to include measurement information for each
image in the image information.
OFF Select this to not include measurement information for
each image in the image information.
Combined Calibration ON Select this to include brightness information in Region
Calibration.
OFF Select this to not include brightness information in Region
Calibration.

2-10 MN1-5855 rev.1

 2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

Item Setting Function

Full Attributes ON Select this to include all the information when recording
and/or transferring the image.
OFF Select this to partially restrict information when recording
and/or transferring the image.
Agent Enter the name of contrast media.

Route Enter the route of contrast media.

Volume Enter the applied dose of the contrast media.

Total Dose Enter the total dose of the effective components of the
contrast media.

Performed Protocol Code Sequence

Use this function when reporting the examination contents to the MPPS server or to the DICOM
image data.

1. Select Series/Image Information on the ID screen.

2. Select Edit in Performed Protocol Code Sequence.
→ The following screen is displayed.

• Scheduled Protocol Code Sequence

Displays the list of the required examination items that are registered on the Worklist. The
same items are also updated on the Performed Protocol Code Sequence.
• Built in System
The list of the examination items that are registered in the instrument by default.
• Performed Protocol Code Sequence
Displays the examination information that is going to be sent to the MPPS server or to be
attached to the DICOM image data. If the required examination items are registered on the
Worklist, the information will also appears on this list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 2-11

2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

3. Edit the examination item.

Adding an examination item to Scheduled Protocol Code Sequence.
a) Select an examination item from the pull-down list of Scheduled Protocol Code Sequence.
b) Select ADD.
Adding an examination method from Built in System.
a Select an examination method from the pull-down list of Built in System.
b Select ADD.
→ The selected method is now added to Performed Protocol Code Sequence.
Deleting an examination item from Performed Protocol Code Sequence.
a Select the examination item to be deleted from Performed Protocol Code Sequence.
b Select Delete.

4. Select OK.
→ The deletion is now completed and the screen returns to Series/Image Information.

2-12 MN1-5855 rev.1

 2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

2-1-1-5 Setting advanced function: Option

Set the advanced functions that is necessary for ID entry.

On ID input screen, select Option... to bring up the ID Screen Option screen. There are two tabs
on the screen: Worklist and Other.

• The Worklist tab allows to set each Query Key item individually and send it to the
Worklist server.
• The Other tab allows change the name field into three sections, to enable or disable the
function which receives Study Description and Series Description from the Worklist, and
to change the compliance setting to the VistA electronic health record system. Also, each
default setting can be restored from this tab.

Worklist tab:

• Query Keys
Put a check mark on the Query Key in order to send it to the Worklist server. The
Worklist is searched on the check marked items.
– Patient ID
– Patient Name
– Accession Number
– Requested Procedure ID
– Modality
– Scheduled Station AE Title
– Scheduled Procedure Step Start Date

• Scheduled Procedure Step Start Date

Search by selecting the examination date from the field.

– Today
– Today +/- 1 day: Today, previous and next days
– This week: This week (from Sunday to Saturday, including today)
– Specified date: The date in the "from" field to the date in the "to" field

MN1-5855 rev.1 2-13

2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

Other tab

This tab allows to set more options for the ID input screen.

1) Use split boxes for "Patient name" and "Referring Physician name".

• : Setting one field each for Patient Name and Referring Phys.
• : The fields for Patient Name and Referring Phys are divided into three fields each for
Family, Given and Middle name.
2) Use Requested Procedure/Scheduled Procedure Step Description for Study/Series
Description.

• : Setting to leave the fields for Study Description and Series Description in blank all the
time.
• : Entering the Worklist information on Requested Procedure Description and Scheduled
Procedure Step Description into Study Description and Series Description.
The Worklist information will be presented as follows:

Study Description on Series Description on

Information from Worklist ID screen ID screen
Requested Procedure Description Requested Procedure Scheduled Procedure Step
Scheduled Procedure Step Description Description Description

Scheduled Procedure Step Description only Scheduled Procedure Step Scheduled Procedure Step
Description Description
Requested Procedure Description only Requested Procedure Requested Procedure
Description Description

3) Comply to VistA

• : Noncompliant to the VistA (Veterans Health Information Systems and Technology

Architecture).
• : Compliant to the VistA (Veterans Health Information Systems and Technology
Architecture). All examination order results from the Worklist server are displayed on the
Worklist display.
4) Set Defaults
All items set under ID Screen Option are restored to their default values.

2-14 MN1-5855 rev.1

 2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

2-1-2 Searching for patient information stored on the instrument: Search

Searches for patient information using the patient database stored on the instrument.

1. Select Search on the ID screen.

→ The entire list of patient information on the instrument appears on the Search screen.

2. Enter a search keyword on Patient ID or Patient Name field.

Fuzzy search
Enter "*" in front of or after a keyword for wildcard search.
Search all
The entire list of patient information appears if no keyword was entered on Patient ID or Patient
Name field.
3. Select Search.
→ A list of patient information that matches with the search keyword appears on the screen.
4. Select specific patient information.
→ The selected patient information is highlighted in blue.
5. Select OK.
→ The screen returns to the ID input screen. The selected patient information is now displayed
on the ID Input screen.

MN1-5855 rev.1 2-15

2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

2-1-3 Loading patient information from HIS: Find

You can load a list of patient information from HIS (Hospital Information System) to the
instrument to display it.

To load patient information from HIS, the instrument needs to be configured for the network
connection with the HIS server at the Preset (Common Preset > DICOM Store, Send). For
details, contact your system administrator (IT personnel) for the hospital network.

1. On the ID screen, select Find.

→ Load a list of the latest patient information from HIS to display it on Worklist.

The loaded patient information is available throughout that day.

However, reload the latest information by selecting find again if the date changed to next
day or new information became available.

2-16 MN1-5855 rev.1

 2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

2-1-3-1 Searching from Worklist

Searches for patient information from the list loaded from the HIS (Hospital Information
System) to the instrument.

To search for a Worklist, load a list of patient information first from HIS and then search for a
Worklist, otherwise, no information is available.

1. Select Worklist on the upper-left corner of the ID screen.

→ Worklist is displayed. The patient information on the instrument is displayed.
2. Search for patient information.
Searching by examination date
Select the examination date in the Scheduled on pull-down list to display a list of patient infor-
mation for that examination date.

Sorting by Patient ID or Patient Name

Select the header of Patient ID or Patient Name.
3. Select Patient Name.
4. Select OK.
→ Retrieve information from Worklist.
At that stage, the information retrieved from Worklist is compared with the latest patient
information on the instrument for the same ID. If the Patient ID is the same but the Patient
Name, Sex, or Date of birth differ, the following dialog message is displayed.

MN1-5855 rev.1 2-17

2 Patient Information
2-1 Before you begin examination

To use patient information stored in the instrument, select Built in HD. To use the Worklist
data, select Worklist.
If other data differs, values are updated according to the following rules.

Data retrieved from the

Worklist Data used as patient information
Occupation, The instrument automatically up dates its data to the Worklist data.
LMP, If the values retrieved from the Worklist include none of these, the values
Height, Weight, BSA, from the last patient data for the same ID are used without up dating.
EDC, BBT, GA, EGA
GRAV, PARA, AB, ECTO, Use the latest data on the instrument with the same ID.
PSA
Study Description, Series Select the data on the Worklist if the patient information was retrieved
Description, Referring Phys from the Worklist.

The selected patient information is now displayed on the ID Input screen.

Once the examination is started, you will not be able to change any of the following items:
Patient ID, Patient Name, Sex, Date of birth, Age, Procedure ID, Accession, Study ID, Study
Description, Referring Phys, Reporting Phys, Sonographer, Body Part Examined, Laterality,
Description

• Changing the patient information after the examination was started:

Press NEW PATIENT, and select the patient data from the Worklist once again.
• If the latest patient data is updated or the date changed (became next day):
Select Find once again, and reload the latest patient data.

Related links:
Loading patient information from HIS: Find → p.2-16

2-18 MN1-5855 rev.1

 2 Patient Information
2-2 Patient information management: Data Management

2-2 Patient information management: Data Management

The patient information

• can be read from the hard disc or USB Flash memory.

• can be written in the USB Flash memory.
• can be deleted if it exists in the USB Flash memory.
The patient information is managed from following screen:

Buttons on the Patient Diagnosis Information Management screen

Buttons/Switches Function
Search Searches within a media specified by Target Medium.

Delete Deletes the patient information selected in the list.

Read from Media Reads the patient information from the USB Flash memory to the
instrument.
Write to Media Saves the selected patient information to the USB Flash memory. This
function is available only when the Built in HD is designated as the Target
Medium.
Optimize Database Optimizes the search speed by optimizing the access speed to the database
that is overcrowded with patient data.
Close Finishes the Data Management functions, and returns to the ID screen.

All Selects all of the data in the list. Select All switch again to deselect all.

MN1-5855 rev.1 2-19

2 Patient Information
2-2 Patient information management: Data Management

2-2-1 Loading patient information from external medium

1. On the ID screen, select Data Management.

2. Select USB from Target Medium.
3. After selecting a file to load from File List, select OK.
4. Set the search conditions.
Search conditions
Search by Patient ID, Patient Name, From (Date) and/or Until (Date). Select one or more
conditions to narrow the search.
5. Select Search.
→ The screen displays a list of matching results from the files selected.
6. Select desired patient information
Loading all patient information
Select All.
All the patient information is selected from the list.
To deselect, select All once again.
7. Select Read from Media.
→ The selected patient information is loaded into the internal HD.

2-20 MN1-5855 rev.1

 2 Patient Information
2-2 Patient information management: Data Management

2-2-2 Saving patient information on external memory

1. On the ID screen, select Data Management.

2. On Target Medium, select Built in HD.
3. Select Search.
→ The screen displays a list of matching results from the files selected.
4. Select desired patient information.
Loading all of patient information
Select All.
All the patient information is selected from the list.
To deselect, select All once again.
5. Select Write to Media.
6. Enter the file name.
7. Select OK.
When selected All:
A message such as ”You are going to write all study data. Does it
write, although processing cannot be interrupted?” appears on the
screen.
Select OK to save the patient information. Select Cancel to not save, and then the screen returns
to Data Management without saving any information.
→ The selected data is all stored in one file.
A message will appear if the selected data are larger than the available memory on the USB
Flash memory. In that case, adjust and re-select the data to save.

MN1-5855 rev.1 2-21

2 Patient Information
2-2 Patient information management: Data Management

2-2-3 Deleting patient information

1. On the ID screen, Select Data Management.

2. Set the search conditions.
Search conditions
Search by Patient ID, Patient Name, From (Date) and/or Until (Date). Select one or more
conditions to narrow the search.
3. Select the target medium from Target Medium.
4. Select Search.
→ The screen displays a list of matching results from the files selected.
5. Select desired patient information.
Loading all of patient information
Select All.
All the patient information is selected from the list.
To deselect, select All once again.
6. Select Delete.
→ A message such as ”You are going to write all study data. Does
it write, although processing cannot be interrupted”
appears on the screen.
7. Select OK.
→ The selected data is deleted.
Select Close to return to the Data Management screen.

2-22 MN1-5855 rev.1

 2 Patient Information
2-3 Before finishing examination

2-3 Before finishing examination

Pressing the custom switch or End Study in the function key allows you to complete one
examination at a time when performing multiple examinations on the same patient. Pressing the
NEW PATIENT allows you to complete all the examinations per patient.
If a MPPS server is connected to the network, a dialog box is displayed at the end of the
examination and updates the MPPS server by sending a message that the examination is
completed.
NOTE: To establish connection between the Worklist server and the MPPS server that are within
the hospital network, you need to set up the network for these servers by navigating the preset
to Common Preset > IHE/Auto Delete. For more details, contact your system administrator (IT
personnel) for the hospital network.

An examination can be performed without patient information (without ID), however, an ID

entry is required to save any image taken during the examination. It is advisable to press No ID
NEW PATIENT or custom switch and End Study in the function key after performing an
examination on a patient without any ID.
NOTE: End Study is not assigned to the control panel and keyboard at the factory default setting.
The following cases prevent you from completing one examination at a time and you will need to
assign End Study instead of the ID key. You can assign End Study by navigating the preset to
Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom SW or Custom-Keyboard.

• When the data loaded from the Worklist server indicates that multiple examinations are
requested for one patient
• When sending a notice to the MPPS server upon the examination completion
NOTE: If both a local printer and a network printer are connected, you can print out the split screen
image at a time. At the end of the examination, if the number of printed-out images is less with
respect to the split screen images, follow the messages on the screen to forcibly print them out.

MN1-5855 rev.1 2-23

2 Patient Information
2-3 Before finishing examination

2-3-1 Finishing and starting next examination: MPPS server is not connected

After connecting to the Worklist server, patient information can be acquired from the Worklist
under the following conditions.

• When multiple examinations are conducted on a single patient.

• When an examination is resumed after an interruption.

1. Exiting an examination.
• To completely end an examination.
Press the POWER switch to enter stand-by mode.
• When another patient is waiting.
Press NEW PATIENT. This will exit an ongoing examination and display the ID input
screen.

→ Complete the ongoing examination and bring up the ID input screen.

2. Enter the information of the next patient or select it from the Worklist.

2-24 MN1-5855 rev.1

 2 Patient Information
2-3 Before finishing examination

2-3-2 Finishing/starting examination: Connected to MPPS server

When the instrument is connected to MPPS server and any image was stored on the instrument,
make sure to notify the completion to the MPPS server before starting next examination. If you
wish not to store any image, proceed to new examination without sending a notice to the server.

To establish connection between the Worklist server and the MPPS server, you need to set up
the network by navigating the preset (Common Preset > IHE/Auto Delete) For further
details, contact your network administrator.
To complete one examination at a time, you can navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu >
Custom SW or Custom-Keyboard) and assign End Study to a custom switch or function key.

1. Finishing examination.
• If there are multiple examinations on the same patient.
Select the custom Switch or End Study in the function key.
• To complete all examinations for the same patient.
Press NEW PATIENT.
• To complete the operation without performing any examination after retrieving the patient
information and prepared for an examination.
• Press NEW PATIENT.

→ New ID input screen appears if no image is stored (go to step 4).

The MPPS dialog box appears if any image was stored.

2. Select COMPLETED from the Performed Procedure Step Status.

3. Select OK.
→ After the completion data was sent to the MPPS server, the ID input screen appears for new
ID entry.
4. Select the patient information for the next examination or select the examination
information from the Worklist.
To perform an examination on the same patient:
Re-select the patient from the Worklist.

MN1-5855 rev.1 2-25

2 Patient Information
2-3 Before finishing examination

2-3-3 Interrupting an examination: Connected to MPPS server

When the instrument is connected to MPPS server and any image was stored on the instrument,
make sure to send the Interruption notice to the MPPS server before starting next examination.
If you wish not store any image, proceed to new examination without sending a notice to the
server. The interrupted examination can be resumed later by retrieving that data.

To establish connection between the Worklist server and the MPPS server, you need to set up
the network by navigating the preset (Common Preset > IHE/Auto Delete). For further
details, contact your network administrator.
To interrupt one examination at a time, you can navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu >
Custom SW or Custom-Keyboard) and assign End Study.

1. Finishing examination.
• If there are multiple examinations on the same patient.
Select the custom Switch or End Study in the function key.
• To complete all examinations for the same patient.
Press NEW PATIENT.
• To complete the operation without performing any examination after retrieving the patient
information and prepared for an examination.
• Press NEW PATIENT.

→ New ID input screen appears if no image is stored (go to step 5).

The MPPS dialog box appears if any image was stored.

2. Select DISCONTINUED from the Performed Procedure Step Status in the MPPS dialog
box.

2-26 MN1-5855 rev.1

 2 Patient Information
2-3 Before finishing examination

3. Select the reason for the interruption from Performed Procedure Step Discontinuation
Reason Code Sequence.
Reasons for Interruption
• Doctor cancelled procedure
• Equipment failure
• Incorrect procedure ordered
• Patient allergic to media/contrast
• Patient died
• Patient refused to continue procedure
• Patient taken for treatment or surgery
• Patient did not arrive
• Patient pregnant
• Change of procedure for correct charging
• Duplicate order
• Nursing unit cancel
• Incorrect side ordered
• Discontinued for unspecified reason
• Incorrect worklist entry selected
• Patient condition prevented continuing

4. Select OK.
→ After the completion data was sent to the MPPS server, the ID input screen appears for new
ID entry.
5. Select the patient information for the next examination or select the examination
information from the Worklist.
Resuming an examination
Re-select the same patient information from the Worklist.

MN1-5855 rev.1 2-27

2 Patient Information
2-3 Before finishing examination

2-3-4 Sending a DICOM SR file

Ultrasound measurement results need to be converted to DICOM SR format (hereinafter

referred to as DICOM SR files) before sending it to the DICOM SR server.

REQUISITE

You will need DICOM Structured Report Software (SOP-F31-21) (optional) to create a
DICOM SR file.

DICOM SR file can be created and sent from abdominal measurement (Abdom), obstetrical
measurement (OB), gynecological measurement (GYM) cardiological measurement (Cardio),
vascular measurement (Vascular).
To establish connection to the DICOM SR server, go to preset (Common Preset >
DICOM-SR) and make network settings.

● Sending a DICOM SR file for the measurement results from the ongoing
examination
Preset setting for automatic transfer
On Preset (Common Preset > DICOM-SR), set SR Auto Creation to On.
a Press NEW PATIENT after completing the ultrasound examination.
→ Examination results are converted to DICOM SR files and sent to the DICOM SR
server.
● Creating a past DICOM SR file and sending it together with the current file
a After the ultrasound examination is completed, verify the measurement results on the
measurement report screen.
b Select ▼ next to the examination date in the upper right of the report screen.
c Select the examination date to display from the pull-down list.
→ The report screen for the specified examination date is displayed.
d Select Output on the upper-right corner of the Report screen.
e On the Select Device dialog box, select Create SR.
f Select OK.
→ The DICOM SR file is created with respect to the ultrasound measurement results on
the specified date.
g After the ultrasound examination is completed, press NEW PATIENT.
→ Both the past and the current DICOM SR files are transferred to the DICOM SR
server.
On the thumbnails, the icon for the type of images changes to blue or orange.

Related links:
Thumbnail → p.5-22

2-28 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3 Image Display Mode

3-1 B mode

The B mode is used to display any desired cross-section of the body as a tomographic image.

3-1-1 Single screen display: 1B

1. Press B.
→ The 1B mode image is displayed.
2. Apply the probe to the area being examined.
3. Perform adjustment so as to obtain a satisfactory image.
Example of image adjustment function
• Brightness: Adjusts the brightness with the B GAIN knob and STC.
• Contrast and other image processing: Adjusts the image processing on the touch panel.
• Display depth: Adjusts the display depth to the optimum value by pressing
DEPTH/ZOOM.
• Frequency: Can be adjusted by switching Image Freq (B/M) in the function menu.
Simultaneous setting of the multiple image adjustment
Select from IP Select (B), (THE) and (BbH) in the function menu.
When no adjustment function is available in the function menu
You can assign the adjustment function by navigating the preset to Preset Set-Up Menu >
Menu-Function.
4. Press FREEZE when you have captured a good image to produce a still image.

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-1

3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-1-1 Direct to B

Directly switches from a hybrid mode (B Flow, B Flow/PW, etc.) to the B mode.

Navigate the preset (Common Preset > Common1) and set Direct to B to one of the
following options.

• Immediate
Switches the display to the B mode when the B button is pressed.
• 0.3 or 0.5sec
Switches the display to the B mode when the B button is pressed and held down.
Switches to the B Flow mode when the B button is pressed.
• Off
Switches the display to the B Flow mode.

FLOW+B Mode

FLOW+B Mode M, PW or CW Direct to B

(Off)
B

Direct to B
(Immediate)

B Mode

1. Display B Flow/M in the B Flow mode or dual-screen of the B Flow/D mode.

2. Press or press and hold down the B button.
→ The B mode image is displayed.

3-2 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-2 Dual-screen display: 2B

A B mode image is displayed on the left and right sides of the screen. You can specify the image
using the SELECT or B/B.

Timing of the split screen can be set with Cine Division in the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu >
DISP-B, M).

• When Cine Division is set as 1: In addition to the real time display of 2B mode image,
the 1B mode image captured in the cine memory can be displayed in the 2B mode while
freeze is in effect (2B Mapping).
• When Cine Division is set as 2 or 4: A real time image can be displayed in the 2B mode.

1. Press B/B to display the 2B mode screen.

→ A B mode image is displayed on the left of the screen.

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-3

3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-2-1 Switching the screen

On the 2B mode screen, you can switch between the real time image and the frozen image, or
display (request) the active screen in the 1B mode.

● Switching the active screen.

a Press SELECT or B/B.
→ The left image freezes, and the right image is displayed in real time.
b Press SELECT or B/B.
→ The right image freezes, and the left image is displayed in real time. By pressing either
SELECT or B/B, you can switch between the still image and the real time image on
the right and left of the screen.

1 2 1 2

● Making a request.
a Press FREEZE to freeze the image.
b Press SELECT or B/B.
→ The active mark changes.
c Press B.
→ The active screen is displayed in 1B mode.
d Press B or SELECT.
→ Switches to the other image.

1 2 1

1 2 2

3-4 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-3 Four-screen display: 4B

B mode image is displayed on the four-screen display.

The following settings should be made using Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu).

• Assign 4B to a Custom SW or Custom-Keyboard.

• Set Cine Division for DISP-B, M to 4.
If necessary, asign Active (B1) ～ Active (B4) to the function menu in Preset (Preset Set-Up
Menu > Menu-Function).

1. Select 4B on the custom switch or a function key.

→ The screen display is split into four. The B mode image is displayed in real time left side.
2. Press either the 4B switch or SELECT.
→ The image at the upper left (1) is frozen, and the real-time image is displayed at the upper
right (2).
After that, every time either SELECT or the 4B switch is pressed, the real time image
display switches in sequence to the lower left (3), the lower right (4), and the upper left (1)
screens.

4B
1 2

SELECT

4B
SELECT

4B
1 2 1 2

SELECT
3 3 4

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-5

3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-3-1 Switching the active screen

On the 4B mode screen, you can switch between the real-time image and the frozen image.

● Switch the active screen sequentially.

→ Press SELECT or the 4B switch to freeze the previously active screen and switch the active
screen to the next numbered one. Each time the switch is pressed, it switches the active
image and active mark in the order of upper left (1), upper right (2), lower left (3),
lower right (4) and upper left (1).
SELECT SELECT

1 2

4B 4B
● Switch the screen by selection.
→ The active screen can be switched by selecting Active (B1) to Active (B4) from the func-
tion menu. The selected screen is displayed in real time, and the active mark moves to
the screen.
Active (B3) Active (B2)

1 2

Active (B1) Active (B3)

● Switch the active screen after a request.

→ On the request screen, press SELECT or the B switch to switch the active screen in
sequence. The active screen can also be switched by selecting Active (B1) to Active (B4)
from the function menu on the request screen.
B
SELECT
Active (B2) Active (B4)

1 2 4

Active (B1) Active (B2)

3-6 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-3-2 Making a request

Display the active screen in 4B display in the one screen mode.

1. Switch the requested screen to active mode.

• Press either SELECT or the 4B switch to select the screen.
• Select from Active (B1) to Active (B4) from the function menu.

2. Press the B switch.

→ The active screen is displayed in the one-screen mode.
Press the B switch or SELECT to switch the active screen. After that, each time the switch
is pressed, it switches in the order of upper left (1), upper right (2), lower left (3), lower
right (4), upper left (1). The active screen can also be switched by selecting Active (B1) to
Active (B4) from the function menu.

B
1 1

4B

4B SELECT B SELECT

B
2 2

4B

4B SELECT B SELECT

B
3

3 4B

4B SELECT B SELECT

B
4

4 4B

4B SELECT B SELECT

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-7

3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-4 Switching the display depth

The display depth is switched over based on the transmission point of the displayed image.

The depth is common to both the B and M mode images. The display depth that was last set
remains, even if the mode changes. The display depth cannot be changed for a frozen image.

1. Make sure that the DEPTH/ZOOM button is lit white.

When it is lit orange
Press DEPTH/ZOOM to switch it to the white light.
2. Adjusts the display depth.
• Reducing the display depth (enlarging the image)
Turn DEPTH/ZOOM to the right.
• Increasing the display depth (reducing the image)
Turn DEPTH/ZOOM to the left.

→ Once the displayable range is exceeded, the display will not change even if you turn the
DEPTH/ZOOM switch further.

3-8 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-5 Image zoom

The ZOOM function enlarges or reduces part of the B mode image. The enlarged image can be
moved.

The focal points of the enlarged image are set near the center of the display range.
The image can also be moved without being enlarged.
The number of step and magnification for zooming are different with probes which are used.
The available zoom methods are Center and Box.

• Center
Enlarges an image around the center.
• Box
Displays an ROI showing a magnified area, in which the image is enlarged.

3-1-5-1 Enlarging or moving an image around the center

The image is zoomed in one step at a time from the center.

Navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Disp-B, M) and set Zoom Method to Center.

1. Press DEPTH/ZOOM.
→ The DEPTH/ZOOM button lights in orange.
2. Zoom in or move the image.
• Turn DEPTH/ZOOM to the right.
The image is enlarged one step at a time from the center.
• Turn DEPTH/ZOOM to the left.
The image is reduced one step at a time from the center.
• Roll the trackball.
Move the image display position. You can zoom in further after moving the image.

• Set Zoom Box Redisplay to On.

Set Zoom Box Redisplay in the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > DISP-B, M) to On. If
you roll the trackball while zoomed, the pre-zoom image is displayed, and the ROI is
moved. When you release your hand from the trackball, the image zooms in again to the
ROI section.
3. To return the image to the original size or display position, press DEPTH/ZOOM and
light it in white.

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-9

3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-5-2 Zooming in the specified range

This function zooms in the image in the ROI.

Navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Disp-B, M) and set Zoom Method to Box.

1. Press DEPTH/ZOOM.
2. Set the size of the displayed ROI.
• Turn DEPTH/ZOOM to the right.
The size of ROI decreases.
• Turn DEPTH/ZOOM to the left.
The size of ROI increases.

When no ROI is displayed

Press ENTER.
3. Use the trackball to move the ROI to the location you want to zoom in.
4. Press the ENTER switch to display a zoomed view of the ROI.
To display the ROI at the original size and display position
Press ENTER.
To set Zoom Box Redisplay to On
Set Zoom Box Redisplay in the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > DISP-B, M) to On. If you roll
the trackball while zoomed, the pre-zoom image is displayed, and the ROI is moved. When you
release your hand from the trackball, the image zooms in again to the ROI section.
To exit zoom mode
Press DEPTH/ZOOM.

3-1-5-3 Enlarging a still image (Read Zoom)

When this button is pressed, it displays a frozen B mode image at a magnification of 2.

1. Press FREEZE.
→ This freezes all the images.
2. Press DEPTH/ZOOM.
→ Lights the DEPTH/ZOOM button in orange and the image is displayed at double size.
3. Adjust the display.
• To change the zoom magnification, turn DEPTH/ZOOM.
• Roll the trackball to move the display position.

To return the zoom setting to the original size and display position
Press DEPTH/ZOOM.

3-10 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-6 Moving the focus position

This function enables you to change the focal points used when they ultrasound beam is emitted.

Assign Focus (B) to Function menu on Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function).

This function focuses the ultrasound beam, resulting in a clearer image. You cannot set all focal
points to Off. One points is always set as a focal point.
B mode image has transmitting points F1 to F8 that divide the maximum diagnostic distance in
the distance direction into 8 parts. You can set the focus at up to any 3 of these points.
In the case of an M mode image, one optimum focal point is set near the center of the display
range. The focal point varies depending on the display depth. This is the same when only the M
mode image is displayed.
In the case of a B/D mode display, one focal point is set according to the sample volume (for
auto focus mode only).
Also, when an M mode image or D mode image in a B/* mode display is frozen, you can
perform multi-stage focus setting on the B mode image.

• Auto focus
The focus position cannot be moved to a deeper point than the display depth.

NOTE: If you set multiple focal points, it results in obtaining an image with high resolution, but
decreasing the frame rate.

1. Select the setup method of focal points with Focus (B) in the function menu.
2. Set the transmission focus position.
a When the trackball menu is not in Focus, press TBF to set it to Focus.
b Use the trackball to move the transmission focus position.

Changing the distance between faecal points.

Turn the Rotary Encoder to make adjustments.

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-11

3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-7 Gain adjustment: Gain

In the B mode, the FREEZE (B GAIN knob) is used to adjust the gain.
In the M mode, D mode and Flow mode, the MULTI GAIN button is used to adjust the gain.
The color of the light indicating the mode on the left of the button shows which mode is
adjustable.

Mode display

M (Z) Adjusts the gain in the M mode with the correction value for
B mode.
F X

D (Y) Adjust the gain in the D mode (PW, CW).

MULTI GAIN
CW is adjusted with the correction value PW gain.

F (X) Adjusts the gain in the Flow mode.

Meaning of LED colors

Orange You can adjust the gain in this mode.

White This mode is adjustable.

Unlit You cannot adjust the gain in this mode.

● In the B mode, turn the FREEZE (B GAIN knob), and in the M, D or Flow mode,
turn the MULTI GAIN button, to adjust the gain to a suitable state while observing
the image.
• Turning right: Increases the image sensitivity.
• Turning left: Decreases the image sensitivity.

Changing the mode for gain adjustment

Press MULTI GAIN. This button will change which mode is adjustable.

3-12 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-7-1 Gain adjustment: STC

The sensitivity of both B mode and M mode images can be adjusted. It is an 8-step slide variable
resistor which corrects the sensitivity at each display depth.

Slide the STC knob at the depth for adjustment, to the right or left, so as to
make the sensitivity uniform. Sliding the knob to the left from the center
decreases the sensitivity. Sliding the knob to the right increases the sensitivity.
The number (cm) displayed on the right of each STC knob indicates the
display depth for which the gain can be adjusted.
Using Adaptive STC in the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Image-B, M1),
you can set the gain adjustment at the depth in which STC steps are equally
assigned according to the display depth.
You can register the position of a STC knob that you adjusted and use the
(cm)
registered position (STC Curve → p.6-15).

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-13

3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-8 Adjusting the scan area: Scan Area

Adjust the scan area in the B mode image. You can raise the frame rate by narrowing the scan
area. When the scan area is less than the maximum scan area, you can move it left or right with
the trackball.

1. When the trackball menu is not in Scan Area, press TBF.

→ Scan Area is displayed in the trackball menu.
2. Adjust the scan area.
To change the scan area
Turn the Rotary Encoder to adjust the width of the scan area. Turning it right increases and
turning it left reduces the width.
To move the scan area
Roll the trackball to the right or left. You can change the scan area even after moving the scan area.
→ The scan area is finalized.

3-14 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-9 Adaptive Image Processing (AIP)

Adaptive Image Processing (AIP) is a function that displays the tissue structure and changes in
characteristic more clearly by combining a process to judge and emphasize the existence of
border areas between different characteristics and a process to remove speckle noise.

PREREQUISITE

Assign AIP to Function menu or Custom Switch on Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom
SW or Menu-Function).

REQUISITE: The optional SOP-F31-24 is required.

1. Display the B mode image.

2. Select AIP from the Custom Switch or the Function menu.
→ The B mode image is displayed with AIP effect.

Display example: AIP is off on the left photo, and on in the right photo
To cancel AIP, select AIP again from the custom switch or in the touch panel menu.

3-1-9-1 Adjusting the AIP image

AIP Edge Sens and AIP Resolution are available for AIP image adjustment.

AIP Edge Sens 1 to 8 Sets the detection sensitivity for border areas between different
characters to 1 to 8. The higher the value, the higher the sensitivity.

AIP Resolution 1 to 8 Raise the value to improve spatial resolution.

Lower the level to remove speckle noise.

The AIP Level setting selects the pattern (1 to 6) combining AIP Edge Sens and AIP Reso-
lution.
These items can be adjusted using either of the following methods.

• Navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function) to assign and adjust the
item.
• Navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom SW) to assign the item and turn
the Rotary Encoder to adjust it.

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-15

3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-10 Tissue Harmonic Echo (T.H.E.)

There are 2 of Tissue Harmonic Echo: Tissue: Tissue Harmonic Echo (T.H.E.)and Broadband
Harmonics Imaging (BbH).
Tissue Harmonic Echo: T.H.E.
In the Tissue Harmonic Echo (T.H.E.) mode, it receives ultrasound waves at a frequency
equal to twice that used in the B mode or M mode, and performs image processing using
the second harmonics reflected from the tissues. This image processing enables a clear
image that is free from artifacts such as side lobes.
Particularly, this mode offers improved image diagnosis of patients who do not readily
transmit ultrasound wave signals. Since the receiving frequency is high, the sensitivity
slightly decreases. Pay careful attention to the sensitivity when examining a patient.
T.H.E. cannot be used for the second harmonic obtained as a result of using an ultrasound
contrast medium or medication.
Broadband Harmonics Imaging: BbH
Provides B mode and M mode images in higher resolution by removing the extra
components of the second harmonics. It cannot be used for the second harmonic obtained
as a result of using an ultrasound contrast media or medication.

NOTE: T.H.E. is not available with some probes. Menus related to T.H.E. cannot be selected
when using a probe that does not support T.H.E.

3-16 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-10-1 Displaying in the T.H.E/BbH mode

The T.H.E/BbH mode receives the twice the frequency of the transmission frequency to display
the image.
The T.H.E/BbH mode can be applied in the B (BFlow), M (MFlow), or B/* display mode.

If T.H.E or BbH is not assigned to the function menu, custom switch or function key, set one
of the followings in the preset.

• Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function

• Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom SW
• Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom-Keyboard

1. Display a satisfactory B mode image or M mode image.

2. Select T.H.E. or BbH in the function menu, custom switch or function key.
To display the transmission frequency
Navigate the preset (Common Preset > Common1) and set Frequency Information to
Transmit.
To display the receiving frequency
Navigate the preset (Common Preset > Common1) and set Frequency Information to
Receive.
→ The automatic display of receiving frequency is highlighted. When BbH is selected, BbH
is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
To cancel the T.H.E/BbH mode, set it to Off.

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-17

3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-11 Spatial Compound Imaging (SCI)

Spatial Compound Imaging (SCI) is a function that synthesizes ultrasound beams from multiple
different angles. This process reduces the artifacts which depend on the direction of ultrasound
irradiation, namely side lobes, multiple echoes, acoustic shadows and speckle noise.

If Spatial Compound is not assigned to the function menu, custom switch or function key, set
one of the followings in the preset.

• Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function

• Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom SW
• Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom-Keyboard
For compatible probes, see Safety Instruction. The scan angle varies depending on the probe.
Spatial Compound cannot be selected during the B/M mode, B/D simultaneous operation and
Trapezoidal Scan.
REQUISITE: The optional SOP-F31-22 is required.

1. Display the B mode image.

2. Select Spatial Compound from the Function menu, Custom switch or Function key.
→ SCI is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Display example Left: Spatial Compound is off, Right: Spatial Compound is on

To cancel the display, set Spatial Compound to Off.

3-1-11-1 SCI display adjustment

Set the SCI angle in Compound Angle.

1. Set Spatial Compound to On in the B mode.

2. Set the compound angle by turning the Rotary Encoder corresponding to Compound
Angle.
→ The angle is set in the range of 5 to 30 in increments of 5 degree. The angle that can be set
varies depending on the probe.

3-18 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-1 B mode

3-1-12 Trapezoidal Scan

Displays an ultrasonic image in a trapezoid shape to provide the wider field of view in the
orientation direction using the linear probe.

Trapezoidal Scan cannot be selected during the B/M mode, B/D simultaneous operation and
SCI mode.
If Trapezoidal Scan is not assigned to the function menu, custom switch or function key, set
one of the followings in the preset.

• Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function

• Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom SW
• Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom-Keyboard
For compatible probes, see Safety Instruction.

1. Display the B mode image.

2. Select Trapezoidal Scan from the Function menu, Custom switch or Function key.
→ The image is displayed in a trapezoid shape. The image is displayed in a trapezoid shape.
Display example

T T
rapezoidal Scan: Off rapezoidal Scan: On

To cancel the display, set Trapezoidal Scan to Off.

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-19

3 Image Display Mode
3-2 M mode

3-2 M mode

The M mode is a mode which fixes an ultrasound beam on one straight line on a B mode image,
to display and observe the movement over time of an ultrasound wave reflector that is on the
straight line.
In the M mode, a scale is displayed in a depth direction by 1 cm (0.5 cm if the display depth is
6 cm or less, 5 cm if it is 30 cm or more) and in a time course 0.5 sec. During the real time
display, the scale mark does not appear on the M mode image.
Fig. 3-1: B/M mode (frozen) display example

3-2-1 B/M and M modes

The B/M mode simultaneously displays a B mode image and an M mode image. The M mode
image can be observed while confirming a search position indicated by a dotted line (cursor)
using the B mode image.

To display the M mode image on a single screen, or to switch the single screen display to the
B/M mode display, use the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom SW) to assign Full/MD to
a custom switch.

1. Press M.
→ A B mode image and an M mode image are displayed simultaneously.
2. Set the search position on the B mode image.
a If the CURSOR button is not lit orange, press CURSOR.
b Roll the trackball to the right or left to adjust the cursor position.

Displaying an M mode image on a single screen

Select Full key or press Full M/D.
Assign the Full M/D button by navigating the preset to Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom SW.
Switching the single M mode screen display to the B/M mode display
Press M, Full or Full M/D.

3-20 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-2 M mode

3. Adjust the gain or contrast.

4. Press FREEZE.
→ Both the B mode and M mode images freeze.
By pressing FREEZE, you can simultaneously switch between the frozen image and the
real time image in the dual-screen mode.

3-2-1-1 Switching the screen in the B/M mode

To request the M mode image, use the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom SW) to assign
Full/MD to a custom switch.

● Switching the active image in the B/M mode

a Press SELECT.
→ The M mode image becomes active and the B mode image freezes.
b Press SELECT.
→ The B mode image becomes active and the M mode image freezes.
By pressing SELECT, you can switch the active image between the B mode and the
M mode.

● Requesting from the B/M mode (single screen display)

a Press FREEZE.
b Select the image to be requested.

• Requesting the B mode image: Press B.

• Requesting the M mode image: Press Full M/D or select Full key.

● Switching the single screen display (request) mode to the B/M simultaneous
display mode
a Press M.

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-21

3 Image Display Mode
3-2 M mode

3-2-1-2 Displaying the M mode image in enlarged from: M WINDOW

The M mode image is displayed in enlarged form in the B/M mode.

1. Activate the B/M mode.

2. Make sure that the CURSOR button is lit orange.
→ If it is not lit orange, press CURSOR.
3. Set the display range in the M mode.
• Setting the display range.
Turning the Rotary Encoder to the right decreases the display range (B mode) and
displays the M mode image in enlarged form.
Turning the encoder to the left increases the display range.
Turning it to the utmost left displays the original B/M image.
• Setting the position of the display range
Roll the trackball to move the display range up and down on the cursor.

M WINDOW display example: The area enclosed by a dotted line is the display range in the M mode.

3-22 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-2 M mode

3-2-1-3 Adjusting the Gain

In the M mode, the MULTI GAIN button is used to adjust the gain. The colored LED mode
indicators located on the left of the switch show which mode is adjustable.

Mode display

M (Z) Adjusts the gain in the M mode with the correction value for
B mode.
F X

D (Y) Adjust the gain in the D mode (PW, CW). CW is adjusted

MULTI GAIN
with the correction value for PW gain.

F (X) Adjusts the gain in the Flow mode.

Meaning of LED colors

Orange You can adjust the gain in this mode.

White This mode is adjustable.

Unlit You cannot adjust the gain in this mode.

1. Make sure that M (Z) on the MULTI GAIN button is lit orange.
When M (Z) is lit white
Press MULTI GAIN to switch it to the orange light.
2. Turn the MULTI GAIN button to adjust the gain to a suitable state while observing the
image.
→ Turning right: Increases the image sensitivity.
Turning left: Decreases the image sensitivity.

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-23

3 Image Display Mode
3-2 M mode

3-2-2 Free Angular M mode: FAM

This function creates an M mode image from the information obtained from the M mode cursor
(FAM cursor) that has been drawn optionally over a B mode image.
You can create an M mode image even on a B mode image saved by the cine memory. Both
images can be displayed only in black and white.
The optional SOP-F31-5 is required.
Assign FAM to a custom switch or function key using Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom
SW or Custom-Keyboard).

3-2-2-1 Switching the FAM mode

Display the FAM cursor in a 1B-mode image.

● Switch from real time 1B mode or B/M mode to FAM mode.

a Press the CURSOR switch if the cursor is not displayed.
b Press the CURSOR switch again.
→ Free angular M mode cursors are displayed.
● Switch from 1B mode (freeze) to FAM mode.
Navigate the preset to Preset Set-Up Menu > DISP-B, M and set Cine Division to 1.
a Press the CURSOR switch. Or select FAM using the custom switch or a function key.
→ Free angular M-mode cursors are displayed.
● Switch the image displayed using the Review function to FAM mode.
Navigate the preset to Preset Set-Up Menu > DISP-B, M and set Cine Division to 1.
NOTE: Only Line images that are saved on the internal HDD can be switched to FAM mode
using the Review function.
a Switch the 1B-mode image in Review to full-screen display.
b Select Loop. from the function menu and switch to stop.
c Press CURSOR. Alternatively, select FAM using a custom switch or function key.
→ Free angular M-mode cursors are displayed.

3-24 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-2 M mode

3-2-2-2 Setting the cursor to the desired position

Up to three FAM cursors can be set. In the M mode screen during B/M mode operation, images
corresponding to the set number of FAM cursors are displayed.

1. Switch to the FAM mode.

→ The FAM cursor A is displayed in the center of the B-mode image.
2. Sets the position of cursor A.

Trackball: Move the cursor up, down,

b left and right (see (a) in the figure on the
a
left).

Rotary Encoder: Rotate the cursor (see

(b) in the figure on the left).

3. Set the second, third, and FAM cursors.

a Press ENTER to display the second cursor B.
b Set the position of cursor B in the same way as cursor A.
c To display the third cursor C, press ENTER.
d Set the position of cursor C in the same way as cursor A.

The number of FAM cursors

Set the number of cursors as 2 or 3 with Multi FAM in the Function menu.
To modify a cursor position
By pressing ENTER, you can switch the active cursor in the order of A, B, C and A.
Deleting an active cursor
Select Active FAM Off from the Function menu.
To display the FAM cursor again, go back to Step 3 a.
4. If the B/M mode is not displayed, press the M switch.
→ The M mode image on the FAM cursor is displayed in the B/M mode. If two cursors are
used, the image is displayed in two parts. If three cursors are used, the image is displayed
in three parts.

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-25

3 Image Display Mode
3-2 M mode

Fig. 3-2: Display example (when two cursors are used)

The B/M mode also allows you to change the cursor.

To return to the 1B mode image, press the B button to switch the screen.

3-26 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-2 M mode

3-2-2-3 Cursor display for left ventricular short-axis and minor axis cross-section images

This function enables you to display a free angular M mode image by simultaneously displaying
three (or two) cursors, when you want to display the M mode of left ventricular short-axis image
or minor axis cross-section image simply and easily.

Set the following in the preset.

• Navigate the preset to Preset Set-Up Menu > DISP-B, M and set Cine Division to 1.
• Navigate the preset to Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function and assign PSAX and
Multi FAM.
• If necessary, navigate the preset to Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom SW or
Custom-Keyboard and assign FAM.

1. Switch to the FAM mode.

2. Set PSAX in the function menu to On.
→ Two or three free angular M mode cursors are displayed.

When two FAM cursors are used. When three FAM cursors are used.

3. Move the cursor on the left ventricular short-axis image.

• Moving: Roll the trackball.
The free angular M mode cursor moves while maintaining the shape.
• Rotating: Turn Rotary Encoder.
The free angular M mode cursor moves while maintaining the shape.

To change the number of cursors

In the Multi FAM in the function menu, set the number of cursors to 2 or 3.
4. Press M.
→ The M mode image on the free angular M mode cursor is displayed in the B/M mode. If
two cursors are used, the image is displayed in two parts. If three cursors are used, the image
is displayed in three parts.

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-27

3 Image Display Mode
3-2 M mode

3-2-2-4 Adjusting the free angular M mode image

The free angular M mode image displayed by FAM can be adjusted in the Function menu.

Changing the display magnification

You can change the display magnification on the free angular M mode image based on the size
of the B mode image.

● Selecting and changing the display magnification.

a Set Trace Fit in the Function menu to Off.
b Select display magnification from MAG (FAM) in the function menu.

● Fixing the display magnification (match the cursor length with the diagnostic
distance of the B mode image).
a Set Trace Fit in the Function menu to On.

Contrast adjustment

You can adjust the contrast of the free angular M mode image.

NOTE: Adjustment is not possible in FAM mode from a full-screen display in Review.

1. Adjust the contrast between C1 to C16 with the Contrast (FAM) in the Function menu.

3-2-2-5 Ending FAM mode

● Select FAM using a custom switch or function key.

→ FAM mode ends and is switched to the 1B or B/M mode.
● With the FAM cursor displayed, press CURSOR or select FAM from a custom
switch or function key.
→ FAM mode ends and is switched to the 1B or B/M mode.
● When the image is frozen, press FREEZE to cancel the freeze mode.
→ The display switches to the mode it was in before freezing.

3-28 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-3 D mode: PW, CW

3-3 D mode: PW, CW

The D mode displays the data on the blood flow in the heart and blood vessels using Doppler
effect. The D mode image is not an image of a part of the body, but is a graph of blood flow
information. For this reason, a D mode image is also called a Doppler pattern.
The B/D mode simultaneously displays a B mode image and a D mode image. It observes blood
flow information on a D mode image while checking the B mode image to see what part of the
body the detected blood flow information belongs to.
The following two kinds of ultrasound beams are used to display a D mode image.

• PW Doppler
Emits the ultrasound beam as discrete pulses to display a D mode image. You can obtain
blood flow information concerning any point on a B mode image.
• CW Doppler
Emits the ultrasound beam continuously to display a D mode image. You can change the
ultrasonic wave transmission direction by connecting a steerable CW compatible probe.
CW Doppler can detect the peak flow velocity as it receives signals at all depths.

In the D mode, navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu Function) and assign the
following:

• Sample Volume
• Vel Range (D)
• Contrast (D)
Navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom SW2) and set the D button in Default
of D SW.

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-29

3 Image Display Mode
3-3 D mode: PW, CW

3-3-1 Displaying the PW mode

1. Display a B mode image (1B).

2. Press CURSOR.
→ The cursor is displayed.
3. Press or press and hold down the D button.
To change the D button settings
Navigate the preset to Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom SW2 and select Default of D SW to set
the D button. If pressing the Default of D SW selects the CW mode, pressing and holding down
this button selects the PW mode.
→ The B/PW mode is displayed.
• When Triplex Mode in the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > DISP-D, Flow) is set to
Triplex.
Display both the B mode and D mode images in real time.

• When Triplex Mode in the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > DISP-D, Flow) is set to
B-Real.
Display the B mode image in real time and the D mode image as blank.

Set the sample volume and press SELECT to display the D mode image.
• When Triplex Mode in the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > DISP-D, Flow) is set to
D-Real.
Freezes the B mode image and displays the D mode image in real time.

4. Use the trackball to adjust the sample volume to the velocity detection position on B
mode image.
Using the trackball to adjust the sample volume
Adjust the size of the sample volume with the Sample Volume in the Function menu. The size
and position of the sample volume are displayed at the lower right of the screen.

3-30 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-3 D mode: PW, CW

Sample Volume

5. Perform adjustment so as to obtain a satisfactory image.

• Correct the angle difference (angle correction) between the incident angle of the ultrasound
and the blood vessel:
Make necessary adjustments with the Angle Correct in the Function menu.
• Adjusting the speed range: Make necessary adjustments with the Vel Range(D) on the
Function menu.
• Adjusting the Gain
• Contrast adjustment: Make necessary adjustments with the Contrast (D) in the Function
menu.
• Reducing aliasing phenomena

Displaying only the D mode image

To display a D mode image in the real-time, single screen mode, select Full key.
6. Press FREEZE when you have captured a good image to produce a still image.
→ Both the B mode and D mode images freeze.
To freeze only either of the images, press SELECT. By pressing SELECT, you can freeze
the image in the order of B mode, D mode and B mode.
To display a real time image in the dual-screen mode, press the D button.

Real Real
time time

Freeze Real
time

Real
Freeze
time

Related links:
Adjusting the Gain → p.3-23
Reducing aliasing phenomena → p.3-34

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-31

3 Image Display Mode
3-3 D mode: PW, CW

3-3-2 Displaying in the CW mode

For compatible probes, see Safety Instruction.

1. Display a B mode image (1B).

2. Press and hold down the D button.
To change the D button settings
Navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom SW2) and select Default of D SW to set
the D button. If pressing the Default of D SW selects the CW mode, pressing and holding down
this button selects the PW mode.
→ The B/CW mode is displayed and the CURSOR button is lit orange.
When Cine Division is set to 1 in the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > B, M), displaying
the cursor first in the B mode and pressing and holding down the D button shows the
following screen.
• When Triplex Mode in Preset Set-Up Menu > DISP-D, Flow is set as B-Real
Displays the B mode image in real time and the D mode image as blank.

• When Triplex Mode in Preset Set-Up Menu > DISP-D, Flow is set as D-Real
Freezes the B mode image and displays the D mode image in real time.

3. Use the trackball to move the cursor to the velocity detection position on the B mode
image, then press SELECT.
→ The D mode image becomes active.
4. Perform adjustment so as to obtain a satisfactory image.
• Adjusting the speed range: Make necessary adjustments with the Vel Range(D) on the
Function menu.
• Adjusting the Gain
• Contrast adjustment: Make necessary adjustments with the Contrast (D) in the Function
menu.
• Reducing aliasing phenomena

Displaying only the D mode image

To display a D mode image in the real-time, single screen mode, select Full key.
5. Press FREEZE when you have captured a good image to produce a still image.
→ Both the B mode and D mode images freeze.
To freeze only either of the images, press SELECT. By pressing SELECT, you can freeze
the image in the order of B mode, D mode and B mode.

3-32 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-3 D mode: PW, CW

Related links:
Adjusting the Gain → p.3-33
Reducing aliasing phenomena → p.3-34

3-3-3 Adjusting the Gain

In the D mode, the MULTI GAIN button is used to adjust the gain. The colored LED mode
indicators located on the left of the switch show which mode is adjustable.

Mode display

M (Z) Adjusts the gain in the M mode with the correction value for
B mode.
F X

D (Y) Adjust the gain in the D mode (PW, CW).

MULTI GAIN
CW is adjusted with the correction value for PW gain.

F (X) Adjusts the gain in the Flow mode.

Meaning of LED colors

Orange You can adjust the gain in this mode.

White This mode is adjustable.

Unlit You cannot adjust the gain in this mode.

1. Make sure that D (Y) on the MULTI GAIN button is lit orange.
When D (Y) is lit white
Press MULTI GAIN to switch it to the orange light.
2. Turn the MULTI GAIN button to adjust the gain to a suitable state while observing the
image.
→ Turning right: Increases the image sensitivity.
Turning left: Decreases the image sensitivity.

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-33

3 Image Display Mode
3-3 D mode: PW, CW

3-3-4 Reducing aliasing phenomena

Reducing aliasing phenomena in the Doppler pattern.

1. Make sure that the CURSOR button is lit orange.

2. Turn Rotary Encoder to adjust the baseline position.
Return the baseline to the original position (center).
Turn off the CURSOR button.

3-34 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-4 Tissue Doppler Imaging (TDI)

3-4 Tissue Doppler Imaging (TDI)

Tissue Doppler Imaging (TDI) mode is a Doppler display that is intended to make visible the
motion of the myocardium and others. It is different from the conventional display mode which
is intended to show blood flow.

PRESET SETTINGS

Assign TDI to Function menu on Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom SW or Custom
keyboard).
Assign Directional (Flow) and Vel Range (Flow) to Function menu on Preset (Preset Set-Up
Menu > Menu-Function).
To display the TDI Power mode, you need to navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu >
Custom SW or Custom-Keyboard) and assign Power.

For usable probes, see Safety Instruction.

1. Display a B mode image (1B).

2. Select TDI that was assigned to the custom switch or function key.
3. Display a B mode image (1B).
4. Select the Flow mode.
• To display in the TDI Flow mode, press the F button.
• To display in the TDI Power mode, select Power that was assigned to the custom switch
or function key.
• To display in the TDI PW mode, press the D button.
• To display in the TDI Directional Power Flow mode, select Directional (Flow) in the
function menu.

5. Perform adjustment so as to obtain a satisfactory image.

• Flow velocity range
Adjust the flow velocity range with Vel Range (Flow) in the touch panel menu.
Decrease the flow velocity range for slow tissue movement. Increase the flow velocity for
fast tissue movement. A change in the flow velocity range may change the size of a flow
area.
• Adjusting the Gain

6. Once you have obtained a satisfactory image, press FREEZE.

→ This freezes all the images.

Related links:
Adjusting the Gain → p.3-40

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-35

3 Image Display Mode
3-5 Flow mode: Flow, Power Flow, eFlow

3-5 Flow mode: Flow, Power Flow, eFlow

The Flow mode, Power Flow mode and eFlow mode display the data on the blood flow in the
blood vessels and the velocity of the myocardium on a B mode image in color.

1) Flow mode
Like other Doppler modes, Doppler information is obtained from the change in the
approaching and receding blood flow.
2) Power Flow mode
Colors the image according to the intensity (area) of the color Doppler signals. It has the
sensitivity about slow blood flows.
3) eFlow mode
Displays in the high-resolution Power Flow mode. It is suitable for detailed observation
of blood flow.

In these color display modes, you can switch between the DDD (real-time simultaneous display
of black-and-white and color images) display and the Directional (Flow) display.

• Dual Dynamic Display; DDD

Displays both color and black-and-white images simultaneously, one beside the other, in
real time.
• Directional (Flow)
This function adds a color consideration of directionality to the conventional power flow
display.

NOTE: The Directional (Flow) display is only available in the Power Flow mode and eFlow mode.

3-36 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-5 Flow mode: Flow, Power Flow, eFlow

3-5-1 Displaying in the Flow/Power Flow/eFlow mode

Navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function) and assign Vel Range (Flow).
To change the F button settings, navigate the preset to Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom SW2
and set Default of F SW to the following:

• Flow: Pressing and holding down this button selects the eFlow mode.
• eFlow: Pressing and holding down this button selects the Flow mode.
To switch to the Power Flow mode, you need to navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu >
Custom SW or Custom-Keyboard) and assign Power.

1. Display a B mode image (1B).

2. Press F.
• Switches to the Flow mode when the F button is pressed.
• Switches to the eFlow mode when the F button is pressed.

To switch to the Power Flow mode

Navigate the preset to Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom-Keyboard and assign Power.
→ The blood flow data is displayed in color on the B mode image. The flow component that
approaches the probe is displayed in red, and the component that moves away from the
probe is displayed in blue. The color display may vary depending on the Color Polarity and
other settings.
3. Setting the flow area
4. Perform adjustment so as to obtain a satisfactory image.
• Flow velocity range
Adjust the flow velocity range with Vel Range (Flow) in the touch panel menu.
Decrease the flow velocity range for slow blood flow. Increase the flow velocity range for
fast blood flow. A change in the flow velocity range may change the size of a flow area.
• Adjusting the Gain

5. Press FREEZE when you have captured a good image to produce a still image.

Related links:
Setting the flow area → p.3-39
Adjusting the Gain → p.3-40

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-37

3 Image Display Mode
3-5 Flow mode: Flow, Power Flow, eFlow

3-5-2 Dual Dynamic Display: DDD

The Dual Dynamic Display (DDD) mode displays both color and black-and-white images
simultaneously, one beside the other, in real time.

1. Display a B mode image (1B).

2. Press F. → p.3-37
→ In the FLOW mode, colors are displayed on the B mode image.
In the eFLOW mode, images are displayed in the eFlow mode.
In the Power mode, images are displayed in the Power Flow mode.
3. Select DDD on the Function menu.
→ The B mode image on the left screen is displayed in black and white, while the B mode
image on the right screen is displayed in color in real time.
The same image is displayed in black and white and color on the right and left.

To end the DDD display, set DDD to Off.

You can also end the DDD display by pressing another mode button.

3-5-3 Directional (Flow)

The Directional (Flow) display adds a color consideration of directionality to the power flow
display.

Assign Directional (Flow) to Function menu on Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Func-
tion).
The Directional (Flow) display is only available in the Power Flow mode and eFlow mode.

1. Display a B mode (1B).

2. Press F. → p.3-37

3-38 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-5 Flow mode: Flow, Power Flow, eFlow

3. Set Directional (Flow) in the function menu to On.

→ Adds a color consideration of directionality.

3-5-4 Setting the flow area

This function adjusts the flow area and black-and-white image display range. The flow area is
indicated by a broken line. The black-and-white image display range is indicated by a solid line.
The width of the flow area is always displayed smaller than the width of the black-and-white
image display range.

● Adjusting the flow area (indicated by a broken line) with the trackball.
a When the trackball menu is not in Scan Area, press TBF.
b Use the trackball to move the flow area to the target area.
c Press ENTER.
→ The floor area position is finalized and the floor area is indicated by a solid line.
d Use the trackball to adjust the size of the flow area (vertical height and horizontal width).
→ Rolling the trackball upward expands the flow area and rolling it downward shrinks
the area.
Rolling the trackball to the right expands the flow area horizontally and rolling it to
the left shrinks the area horizontally.
e Press ENTER.
→ The adjusted height and width are finalized and indicated by a broken line.
f Repeat from a to d to adjust the flow area.

→ When the flow area becomes larger than the display width of the black-and-white image,
the display width of the black-and-white image is displayed by adjusting to the size of the
flow area.
● Adjusting the black-and-white image display range.
a When the trackball menu is not in Scan Area, press TBF.
b Make necessary adjustments with Rotary Encoder.
Flow area display example (broken line)

→ When the display width of the black-and-white image becomes smaller than the flow area,
the display width of the flow area is displayed by adjusting to the size of black-and-white
image.

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-39

3 Image Display Mode
3-5 Flow mode: Flow, Power Flow, eFlow

3-5-5 Adjusting the Gain

In the Flow mode, the MULTI GAIN is used to adjust the gain. The colored LED mode
indicators located on the left of the switch show which mode is adjustable.

Mode display

M (Z) Adjusts the gain in the M mode with the correction value for
B mode.
F X

D (Y) Adjusts the gain in the D mode (PW, CW).

MULTI GAIN
CW is adjusted with the correction value for PW gain.

F (X) Adjusts the gain in the Flow mode.

Meaning of LED colors

Orange You can adjust the gain in this mode.

White This mode is adjustable.

Unlit You cannot adjust the gain in this mode.

1. Make sure that F (X) on the MULTI GAIN button is lit orange.
When F (X) is lit white
Press MULTI GAIN to switch it to the orange light.
2. Turn the MULTI GAIN button to adjust the gain to a suitable state while observing the
image.
→ Turning right: Increases the image sensitivity.
Turning left: Decreases the image sensitivity.

3-40 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-6 Dynamic Slow Motion Display (D.S.D.)

3-6 Dynamic Slow Motion Display (D.S.D.)

D.S.D. displays real-time images and slow motion images side by side.
It is suitable for observing fast-moving tissue.
D.S.D. is available when B mode or B Flow mode (including the Power Flow mode) images are
displayed in real time.
D.S.D. has the following two types.

• D.S.D. (ECG) mode

This mode provides slow-motion display, synchronized to the ECG R-wave.
Slow-motion display is reset to real-time display at a certain R-wave interval. For
example, if D.S.D. Speed is set to 1/2, the display is reset at two heartbeats.

Beat
ECG wave 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Real time
Slow motion
1/1

1/2

1/3

1/4

1/10

D.S.D. (ECG) mode (the arrow indicates the timing of the switch to D.S.D. (ECG) mode)
• D.S.D. (Memory) mode
This mode provides slow-motion display of image data stored in memory (frame rate).
Slow-motion display is reset to real-time display once all the data in memory has been
played back.

2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Real time
(Frames)

Slow motion
Frame 3 Frame 5 Frame 7
D.S.D. (Memory) mode (the arrow indicates the timing of the switch to D.S.D. (Memory) mode)

D.S.D. mode cannot be displayed if the following functions are running.

・ ECG Sync ・ DDD (Dual Dynamic Display)

・ EFV ・ Spatial Compound Imaging (SCI)
・ EXT

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-41

3 Image Display Mode
3-6 Dynamic Slow Motion Display (D.S.D.)

3-6-1 D.S.D. (ECG) mode

Assign the following menus to the function menu using Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu >
Menu-Function).

• ECG Display
• DSD (ECG)
• DSD Speed
• DSD Refresh

1. Display a real-time image in 1B mode.

2. Set the ECG Display to On and display the ECG waveform.
3. Select DSD (ECG) from the function menu.
→ The real-time image is displayed on the left screen, and the slow motion image on the right.

DSD speed

• To display a real-time image in 1B mode

Press FREEZE. While frozen, you can search or play back a loop. Pressing FREEZE again
returns the display to the D.S.D. (ECG) mode.
• To set the playback speed and the refresh interval
Select DSD Speed from the function menu and change the speed with the Rotary
Encoder. Slow motion playback begins at the R-wave immediately after the change. The
setting value is highlighted in the upper right of the D.S.D. (ECG) mode display.
• To refresh without changing the setting value
Select DSD Refresh from the function menu.
• Moving images are only saved in Video Clip format.

3-6-1-1 Closing the D.S.D. (ECG) mode

1. Set DSD (ECG) of the function menu to Off.

→ The display switches to the 1B mode.
2. Set ECG Display of the function menu to Off.

3-42 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-6 Dynamic Slow Motion Display (D.S.D.)

3-6-2 D.S.D. (Memory) mode

The following menus should be assigned to the function menu using Preset (Preset Set-Up
Menu > Menu-Function) beforehand.

• DSD (Memory)
• DSD Speed
• DSD Memory Size
• DSD Refresh

1. Display a real-time image in 1B mode.

2. Select DSD (Memory) from the function menu.
→ The real-time image is displayed on the left screen, and the slow motion image on the right.
• To display a real-time image in 1B mode
Press FREEZE. While frozen, you can search or play back a loop. Pressing FREEZE again
returns the display to the D.S.D. (Memory) mode.
• To change the playback speed
Select DSD Speed from the function menu and change the speed with the Rotary
Encoder. The setting value is highlighted in the upper right of the D.S.D. (Memory) mode
display.
• To change the refresh interval
Select DSD Memory Size from the function menu and change the memory size.
• To refresh without changing the setting value
Select DSD Refresh from the function menu.

3-6-2-1 Closing the D.S.D. (Memory) mode

● Select DSD (Memory) from the function menu.

→ The display switches to the 1B mode.

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-43

3 Image Display Mode
3-7 EFV (Extended Field of View)

3-7 EFV (Extended Field of View)

With EFV, the probe is moved across the body and the acquired tomographic images are
reconstructed and displayed as a one-frame image. This allows a wide range to be viewed. EFV
displays an image along the translational direction of the probe.

• The optional SOP-F31-1 is required. For usable probes, see Safety Instruction.
• Assign Extend F-View to the function menu using Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu >
Menu-Function) beforehand.
• If image adjustment is required, assign Image Rotation (B) to the function menu in
Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function).

1. Adjust a B mode image to make it satisfactory.

Set the following functions to Off.
Adaptive Image Processing (AIP), Trapezoidal Scan, Spatial Compound Imaging (SCI)
Adjusting the image so the center of the image is at an appropriate brightness
Make adjustments with the B GAIN knob, STC sliders and the MULTI GAIN knob. If the center
of the image is dark, it cannot be displayed properly.
Acquiring images in the Color mode (Flow, Power Flow)
Set a large Flow Area. If the Flow Area is too narrow, it is automatically widened when you enter
the EFV mode. Once in the EFV mode, you cannot switch the color on/off or adjust the Flow Area.
2. Select Extend F-View from the function menu.
→ The display switches to the EFV mode. Images are displayed smaller than normal B-mode
images and the picture quality and frame rate are changed as well. Body marks are erased.
In the EFV mode, you cannot make changes with the DEPTH/ZOOM switch, or switch to
the BbH mode.
3. Apply plenty of ultrasound gel to the location where you will acquire the image.
4. Press SELECT and start acquisition.
5. Move the probe and scan the observation area along the transducer’s array direction.

→ An EFV image is displayed.

NOTE: If there are drastic changes in brightness, the image may not be displayed
correctly. Pay attention to changes in brightness when scanning.

If the edge of the EFV image is off the screen, or if the number of image components
increases, the function reduces the size of images to try and fit them on the screen.
If the image acquisition time exceeds 30 seconds, acquisition stops.
6. Press FREEZE to finish acquisition.

3-44 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-7 EFV (Extended Field of View)

3-7-1 Adjusting, Outputting and/or Measuring EFV images

You can adjust, output and/or measure the EFV images acquired in the previous section.

● Adjusting images that are displayed at a slant

a Select Image Rotation (B) from the function menu.
b Rotate the image to the desired orientation.

● Searching an image
a If the trackball menu is not the search menu, press TBF.
→ The EFV image is displayed with a white frame. The content of the white frame is the
B mode image prior to image construction.
b Use the trackball or the Rotary Encoder to search or scroll within the desired image area.

● Measuring with an EFV image

→ Measurements can be made following the same procedures as in the B mode.
● Outputting
→ Images can be saved or printed as still images.
To save as a moving image, save to DVD media. Moving images cannot be saved with Line
or Video Clip.

Related links:
DVD recording → p.5-47

3-7-1-1 Closing EFV

1. Press the FREEZE switch to cancel the freeze mode.

→ The EFV image and the body mark disappear.
2. Select Extend F-View to close EFV.
→ EFV closes.

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-45

3 Image Display Mode
3-8 Puncture guideline

3-8 Puncture guideline

A puncturing guideline can be displayed on the B mode screen to determine the direction in
which the puncturing needle should be inserted. If a probe incorporates multiple puncture
guidelines, the appropriate guideline can be selected.

Assign the following menus to the function menu using Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu >
Menu-Function) beforehand.

• Puncture G. Line
• Biopsy Select
• Angle Sel (Punc)
• Puncture Measure

Cautions for using the puncture guideline:

• Check if the model names of the currently used puncture adapter and that on the screen
are the same.
When using the probe and puncture adapter that have multiple guidelines, check if the
insertion angle of the puncture adapter and the angle set on the screen are the same.
• Puncture guidelines should be used as a criterion for the directionality of puncture needle
insertions.
• Be sure to check the part of the puncture path that is not visible on the screen, and ensure
that it is safe to proceed.
There may be a blood vessel or other organ in the puncture path that is not visible on the
screen.
• Verify the direction and bending of the puncture needle with the needle echo displayed
on the monitor.
NOTE: For details of handling probes used for puncture and puncture adapters, refer to the
instruction manual for the probe.

NOTE: Read also the Section 7-1 of the Safety Instruction manual.

1. Set Puncture G. Line on the function menu to On.

→ The puncture guideline is displayed.
The puncture angle is displayed at the bottom of the screen. If more than one puncture
guideline can be used, the model names of the puncture adapters are also displayed.

3-46 MN1-5855 rev.1

 3 Image Display Mode
3-8 Puncture guideline

(1)

(2) (3)

(1): Puncture guideline, (2): Puncture adapter, (3): Puncture angle

2. Check the model name of the puncture adapter and the puncture angle.
Changing puncture adapters
Check if the currently used puncture adapter and the name on the screen are the same.
a Select Biopsy Select from the function menu.
b Select an appropriate puncture adapter and select OK.

Changing the puncture angle

Select an appropriate puncture angle with Angle Sel (Punc) of the function menu.
The selected angle and the puncture guideline of the angle will be displayed.
3. Measure the depth.
NOTE: The numerical value indicating the depth should be used as a guide. Check the
error with respect to the distance to the tip of the puncture needle using a water tank or
other means before carrying out puncturing.

a Set Puncture Measure on the function menu to On.

→ An arrow mark and the depth will be displayed on the puncture guideline.

b Move the arrow mark to the required position using the trackball.

MN1-5855 rev.1 3-47

3 Image Display Mode
3-8 Puncture guideline

3-48 MN1-5855 rev.1

 4 Physiological Signal
4-1 Attaching the electrodes

4 Physiological Signal

4-1 Attaching the electrodes

This instrument may not be used in combination with a defibrillator.

When using a defibrillator, detach probes and cables connected to this instrument from the
patient.

The minimum amplitude necessary for processing the ECG input signal is 50 µV. Signals
below this level may produce inaccurate results.

1. Connect the ECG electrodes to the probe connectors on the physiological signal panel.
2. Attach the ECG electrodes to the patient.
Connecting the ECG electrodes
The ECG lead is a second limb lead.

a)

b) c)

a) Connect the red ECG cable (R) to the right arm.

b) Connect the black ECG cable (RF) to the right leg.
c) Connect the green ECG cable (F) to the left leg.

MN1-5855 rev.1 4-1

4 Physiological Signal
4-2 Displaying the physiological signals

4-2 Displaying the physiological signals

The following preset settings are available for physiological signal display.

• Menu for Display, Posi, Sens: Physio setting items

• Echo Erase: DISP-B, M setting items
Navigate the preset to Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function and assign ECG Display.

1. Set ECG Display in the function menu to On.

→ The physiological signal waveform is displayed.
When the ECG waveform is displayed, the instrument detects the R-wave and calculates
the heart rate. The heart rate is displayed on the screen as HR120. If the heart rate exceeds
the display range (HR 30 to HR 500), HR*** is displayed.
If the ECG R-wave is not detected for 5 or more seconds, the message ”Detection
Error:R-wave of ECG is not detected.” is displayed. Check to see
that the ECG electrodes are connected correctly to the patient.
2. Adjust the display position and sensitivity.
Waveform adjustment menu

Display position menu Sensitivity menu

ECG waveform ECG Posi ECG Sens

When the display is difficult to read because the M mode image and the physiological
signal overlap
Use Echo Erase in the function menu to erase part of the M mode image.
Navigate the preset to Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function and assign Echo Erase.

Related links:
Physio setting items → p.7-77
DISP-B, M setting items → p.7-55

4-2 MN1-5855 rev.1

 4 Physiological Signal
4-3 ECG sync display: SYNC

4-3 ECG sync display: SYNC

ECG sync display (SYNC function) is a function that displays the ECG waveform image only
where the ECG sync mark is passing. You can obtain the image of any desired time phase while
observing the time phase of the ECG waveform.

Navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function) and assign the following:

• ECG Sync
• R-Delay Time
• B/Sync Mode

1. Displaying the ECG waveform.

2. Select ECG Sync on the Function menu.
→ A SYNC mark is displayed on the ECG waveform in B mode. Delay time from the R-wave
is displayed on the screen.
3. Adjust the ECG sync display.
Setting the SYNC time
Set in 10 ms intervals using R-Delay Time on the Function menu.
If the message ”Range Limit; Selection is not available” is displayed, the
setting range for SYNC time is exceeded. Make necessary adjustments on the Function menu.
Displaying the normal B mode and ECG Sync B mode side by side
On the Function menu, set B/Sync Mode to On.

MN1-5855 rev.1 4-3

4 Physiological Signal
4-4 Heart rate stability display

4-4 Heart rate stability display

The instrument automatically determines if the heart rate is stable enough to perform the
measurement.

Navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function) to assign HR Stability Display,
HR Stability Disp (Avg.) and HR Stability Disp (Conti) to the function menu.
Or navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Physio) to assign HR Stability Display, HR
Stability Disp(Avg.) and HR Stability Disp (Conti), then return to the image display.

1. Displaying the ECG waveform.

2. Set HR Stability Display to On.
3. In HR Stability Disp (Avg.), set the acceptable heart rate difference to a value between
0% to 50%.
→ Compare the heart rates between the most recent single heartbeat and the average of five
previous heartbeats. Compare the heart rates between the previous single heartbeat and the
average of five previous heartbeats.
4. Set HR Stability Disp (Conti) to a value between 0% to 50%.
→ Compare the most recent single heartbeat and the previous single heartbeat rates.

If all of the heart rates compared are within the acceptable range, the most recent single
heartbeat is judged as stable. The HR display at the top right of the screen will be highlighted.

For example, if HR Stability Disp (Avg.) is set to 10%, and HR Stability Disp (Conti) is set to
20%, with the heart rate of 100 for the average of five previous heartbeats, 110 for the previous
single heartbeat, and 105 for the most recent single heartbeat, determination of stability is made
in the following manner.
HR 100

110 105
Based on the HR Stability Disp (Avg.) setting of 10%, the condition for the most recent single
heartbeat and the previous single heartbeat is considered stable with the heart rate between 90
and 110, calculated from the heart rate of 100 for the average of five previous heartbeats. Since
they are both within the acceptable range, they meet the HR Stability Disp (Avg.) condition.
Next, based on the HR Stability Disp (Conti) setting of 20%, the stability condition for the most
recent single heartbeat is to be between 88 and 132, calculated from the heart rate of 110 for the
previous single heartbeat. Since the heart rate of the most recent single heartbeat is within the
acceptable range, it meets the HR Stability Disp (Conti) condition.
Since all conditions are fulfilled, the most recent single heartbeat is determined to be a stable
heart rate, and the HR display at the top of the screen is highlighted.

4-4 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-1 Search

5 Recording and Storing Images

5-1 Search

The search function temporarily records an image in the instrument's memory before it is
frozen, so it can be retrieved and observed after it is frozen. By using the search function, past
images can be retrieved if necessary when you miss the opportunity to freeze an image.
When the ECG waveform is displayed, a search mark is displayed on the ECG waveform. An
image can be searched by checking its time phase, then retrieved and played back. Search can
be performed, either by observing B mode images, or by observing M, D mode images in scroll.
When multiple images are displayed, such as in the 2B modes, each image can be recorded
separately for retrieval and display. However, neither search nor scroll can be used if any of the
images are displayed in real-time.
Please be aware of the following points when using the search function.

• The number of images that can be recorded in memory varies by image display
conditions such as the probe used, the display mode, and display depth. This means, the
recordable image count is not always the same.
• Only images recorded in the instrument's memory can be searched or scrolled.
If you freeze an image immediately after canceling the freeze state, search and scroll is
possible only for images recorded in memory during this interval, even if the memory is
not filled to capacity. When memory capacity is exceeded, images stored prior to the
freeze are erased in sequence starting from the oldest image. Neither search nor scroll is
possible with erased images.
• All images recorded in memory are erased when image display conditions such as mode
or display depth are changed, or when image freeze is canceled.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-1

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-1 Search

5-1-1 Search and scroll

1) Search
Forward search flips through the images stored in memory one-by-one until the last
(latest) image is reached. Backward search flips through the images until the first (oldest)
image is reached.

Screen display image

Rolling to the left Rolling to the right

Track
Frames are fed backward ball Frames are fed forward

Counterclockwise Clock wise

Frames are fed backward Frames are fed forward

Rotary Encoder
During freeze, the search number (e.g. 23/176) is displayed. The number on the left is the
frame number of the image being displayed, and the number on the right represents the
total number of image frames recorded in memory.
2) Scroll
The display range can be moved between the first and last image in memory.

Memory capacity

Screen
display
range

Rolling to the left Rolling to the right

Track
Frames are fed backward ball Frames are fed forward

Counterclockwise Clock wise

Frames are fed backward Frames are fed forward

Rotary Encoder

5-2 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-1 Search

5-1-1-1 Search mark

When the ECG waveform is displayed in B or 2B display, a search mark appears on the ECG
waveform.
The search mark moves as images are searched. The search mark provides information on the
displayed image such as its location in memory and its time phase on the ECG waveform.

Search Mark

one frame

5-1-2 Searching and scrolling B, M, PW and CW mode images

1. Press FREEZE.
→ This freezes all the images.
2. When the trackball menu is not in Search, press TBF.
Switching the trackball function display to Search when the images are frozen
Navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Display 2) and set T.B.Priority (Frz On) to Search.
3. Use the trackball or Rotary Encoder to search or scroll within the desired image range.
• Roll or rotate it to the right to search/scroll in the forward direction.
• Roll or rotate it to the left to search/scroll in the backward direction.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-3

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-1 Search

5-1-3 Searching and scrolling B/M, B/PW and B/CW mode images

1. Press FREEZE.
→ This freezes all the images.
2. When the trackball menu is not in Search, press TBF.
Switching the trackball menu to Search when the images are frozen
Navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Display 2) and set T.B.Priority (Frz On) to Search.
3. Search or scroll.
• Use the trackball to search or scroll through active images.
• Use Rotary Encoder to search or scroll through inactive images.

5-1-4 Loop playback

This function continuously plays back images recorded in memory (loop playback). Loop
playback is available in 1B, 2B and 4B modes.

1. Press FREEZE.
→ This freezes all the images.
2. When the trackball menu is not in Search, press TBF.
Switching the trackball menu to Search when the images are frozen
Navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Display 2) and set T.B.Priority (Frz On) to Search.
3. Rotate the trackball upward.
→ Loop playback starts.
During loop playback, the search mark does not appear on the cine scale. The image range
subject to the loop playback cycle uses the image immediately after the frozen image as the
reference point, and is determined by the heart rate and time settings in the ECG Cycle and
Time Cycle.
4. Adjust the loop playback speed.
• The loop playback speed decreases by rotating the trackball downward.
When the playback speed is slowed, it becomes a slow motion playback.
• The loop playback speed increases by rotating the trackball upward.

5. To stop loop playback, rotate the trackball right or left.

→ When the ECG waveform is being displayed, the search mark reappears in the time phase
position of the displayed image.

5-4 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-1 Search

5-1-4-1 Setting the loop playback range

Set a loop point in the desired position.

1. Press FREEZE.
→ This freezes all the images.
2. When the trackball menu is not in Search, press TBF.
Switching the trackball menu to Search when the images are frozen
Navigate the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Display 2) and set T.B.Priority (Frz On) to Search.
3. Set the loop starting frame.
a Display the loop starting frame using the trackball.
b Press ENTER.
→ When the search mark is displayed, the time phase setting mark (a white dotted line)
is displayed.
4. Set the loop ending frame.
a Display the loop ending frame using the trackball.
b Press ENTER.

→ The screen returns to the beginning frame.

Again, when the search mark is displayed, the time phase setting mark (a white dotted line)
is displayed.
5. Rotate the trackball upward.
→ The loop is played back such that the frame set with a time phase that has the lower frame
number becomes the starting frame, and the same with the higher frame number becomes
the ending frame.
By canceling freeze, or by rotating the trackball left or right, loop playback is stopped.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-5

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-1 Search

5-1-4-2 Simultaneous loop playback for 2B or 4B image

In 2B mode, loop playback is performed on two screens simultaneously. In 4B mode, loop

playback is performed on four screens simultaneously. Loop playback cannot be performed on
just one screen.

The number of playback images differs for each screen, so the playback mode may be switched.

1. Display a 2B mode image.

2. Press FREEZE.
→ This freezes all the images.
3. When the trackball menu is not in Search, press TBF.
Switching the trackball menu to Search when the images are frozen
Navigate the preset to Preset Set-Up Menu > Display 2 and set T.B.Priority (Frz On) to
Search.
4. Set the loop point for each screen.
a Switch the active screen with the SELECT button.
b Setting the loop playback range.

5. Select the playback mode using Loop Mode in the menu.

• Long: This mode is aligned with the B mode with the greatest number of playback images.
B modes with fewer images stop their loop playback until the longer B modes finish their
playback.
• Short: This mode is aligned with the B mode with the least number of playback images. B
modes with more images stop their loop playback at the same time the B modes with fewer
images finish their playback.
• Align: The B mode with the greatest number of images becomes the reference for playback
time, and the playback time of other B modes are adjusted so they all end their playback at
the same time.
• Free Run: The loop playback for each B mode is run without any mutual synchronization.

6. Rotate the trackball upward.

→ The loop is played back such that the frame set with a time phase that has the lower frame
number becomes the starting frame, and the same with the higher frame number becomes
the ending frame.
By canceling freeze, or by rotating the trackball left or right, loop playback is stopped.

Related links:
Setting the loop playback range → p.5-5

5-6 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-2 Image storage and output: STORE

5-2 Image storage and output: STORE

This machine stores images using a digital storage function that conforms to the DICOM
standard. Images can be sent to a PC (or server) via the network using its digital interface.
The instrument has the following functions.

• Records and reads DICOM images and information on media such as CD-R, DVD, and
USB Flash memories.
• Converts still image into JPEG, TIFF, and BMP format, and moving image into AVI
format before sending the data to various storage media.
• Connects the diagnostic ultrasound system directly to a network, and transmits image
data to PCs and network servers as DICOM images.
• Lines up the recorded images into multiple formats, prints them on a DICOM printer.
In addition to recording image data and basic patient information such as name, ID, sex, and
date of birth, when images are saved under the DICOM standard, other information such as
comments, color palette, diagnostic ultrasound system, and calibration information for repeat
measurement also are recorded. This is very useful when searching for an image, or when
repeating measurement.
To display a still or moving image file on a PC, if the file is in DICOM format, it is necessary
to purchase a separately sold DICOM Viewer software.
Images stored on the internal HDD can be converted to BMP, TIFF, JPEG, and AVI file format
for storage. When displaying this image on a PC, it is necessary to use the latest image viewing
software that comes with the PC operating system (such as: Microsoft Paint® or Windows
Media Player 9 or higher), or to purchase an image viewing/editing software that supports BMP,
TIFF, JPEG, and AVI file formats.
NOTE: On the start-up, Patient ID is displayed as ”No ID”. No image can be stored as a No ID
item. Enter patient information on the ID input screen.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-7

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-2 Image storage and output: STORE

5-2-1 Notes regarding image records and storage media

There are 6 different destinations to which images can be recorded, stored and/or output.

• Printer: Printer (B&W), Printer (Color), DICOM Printer, Local Printer

• Internal HDD
• USB Flash memory
• CD-R Buffer
• DVD (DVD-RAM)
• Network server
To ensure that the system as a whole conforms to electrical safety standard IEC60601-1-1, this
instrument does not support commercially available drives. Please use the instrument's internal
drives.
Please note the following when using the following storage or recording media.

• USB Flash memory

– Use a commercially available memory device of USB mass storage class, equipped with an
access lamp. Memory devices equipped with encryption or authentication functions cannot
be used.
– Some devices may not be usable depending on their physical dimensions. Confirm that the
device can be connected to the instrument's USB connector.
– Remove any straps. It may hamper instrument operation.
– Do not remove the USB memory while the access lamp of the USB memory device is
flashing (during data transfer). The data being recorded may be damaged.
• Printer, DVD (DVD-RAM)

– Applying excessive vibration to the drive while a disk is still inside may result in damage
to the disk. Remove the disk from the drive when moving the instrument.
– Recording and reading is possible with CD-R and DVD-RAM disks.
When recording to DVD-RAM, use media that conform to the DVD-RAM Ver. 2.1
standard. Media with capacity of 4.7 GB (single-sided) or 9.4 GB (double-sided) (without
cartridge) can be used for recording and reading.
This instrument is capable of formatting DVD-RAM media. It can format to either the UDF
or FAT32 format. For 9.4 GB double-sided media, formatting is performed one side at a
time.

• CD-R Buffer

– This is internal storage space used when writing to a CD-R. To write to a CD-R disk from
this CD-R buffer, select CD Burning from the Find, Tile View screen.
• Network server

– Images are sent DICOM format. No other formats are used for sending.
Related links:
Formatting a DVD → p.5-35

5-8 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-2 Image storage and output: STORE

5-2-2 Image file format

When the STORE button is pressed, images are stored in the following file format.

Storage
Destination File Format
(STORE (Format Thumbnail
Type Media) Type) Icon Remarks

Still HDD Image

image
USB DICOM Patient information and scale factor information
CD-R Buffer are added to image data.

DVD Color information is stored in Palette*1 or RGB.

JPG JPEG format

BMP bitmap format

TIF TIFF format

NET DICOM － When transmitting to a server on the network, files

(DICOM) are converted to DICOM format.
Color information is stored in Palette*1, RGB, or
monochrome.

Moving HDD Line Moving image data in B, B/Flow, B/Power,

image B/eFlow modes can be stored.
B/M, M, B/PW, B/M/PW, PW, B/CW, CW, M/PW,
DSD mode data cannot be stored.
Files in this format are stored on the internal HDD
regardless of the STORE Media setting.

HDD Video Clip

USB
CD-R Buffer
DVD

*1. If color information in the DICOM format is in Palette format, the brightness, flow rate, and dispersion information
are stored separately from the color information. Flow mode and color may be not displayed normally in some
Viewer.

Following methods are available to display and play back moving images stored on the
instrument.

• Playback Line images in Full Screen, and while playing back, restore in Video Clip.
• Store as DICOM or AVI in Video Clip.
• Save Line images as Multi Image or AVI format.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-9

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-2 Image storage and output: STORE

5-2-3 Storing still images

Set the storage destination in the function menu or the preset.

1) Store Media: Setting storage destinations

Select this in Store Media from the function menu or Store Media in the preset Preset
Set-Up Menu > Store, Cine.
2) Format Type (Single): Setting storage format
The menu or preset item used to set the storage format is different depending on the
storage destination.

Table 5-1: Storage destination and format

Available Storage
Store Media Storage Format Menu Formats

USB: USB Flash memory Format Type (Single) • DICOM

• JPEG Baseline
CD-R Buffer:
• BMP
Buffer used when writing to a CD-R (internal
• TIFF
memory)

DVD: Writes directly to a DVD

NET(DICOM): A network server Format Type (Single) • DICOM

1. Press FREEZE.
→ This freezes all the images.
2. Search for the image to record.
a When the trackball menu is not in Search, press TBF.
b Use the trackball to search.

Switching the trackball function display to Search when the images are frozen
Navigate the preset to Preset Set-Up Menu > Display 2 and set T.B.Priority (Frz On) to
Search.
3. Press STORE.
→ The still image is stored in the storage destination specified in Store Media.
When stored on the internal HDD, a thumbnail of the image is displayed on the right of the
screen.

5-10 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-2 Image storage and output: STORE

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-11

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-2 Image storage and output: STORE

5-2-4 Storing a moving image

The following items need to be set in order to store moving images.

Use the function menu or the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Store, Cine) to set these items.

Item name Function

Store Media If the storage format is Line, files are stored on the internal HDD regardless of the
setting.
If the storage format is Video Clip, files are stored in the set destination.

Acquire Method Line format or Video Clip format.

Acquire Mode Pre Time or Post Time:

The moving image is stored for the set duration*1 after STORE is pressed.

Pre ECG or Post ECG:

The moving image is stored for the set number of heartbeats*2 after STORE is
pressed.

Manual:
The moving image is stored from the point STORE is pressed until the next time it
is pressed.

Auto Loop*3 On: Plays the range to be stored in a loop, and stores it after the image has been
confirmed.
Off: Stores the range to be stored without playing back in a loop.

Video Clip Auto Saves moving images in Video Clip format, plays back the same range in a loop,
Stop and stores it as Line data.

*1. Set in Time Cycle in the function menu or the preset (Store, Cine).
*2. Set in ECG Cycle in the function menu or the preset (Store, Cine).
*3. This can only be set in the preset (Store, Cine). This is enabled if the storage format is Line.

The following storage methods are used, depending on the Acquire Mode setting.

Acquire Mode Storage

Pre ECG Stores the moving image for the set range retroactively from the point STORE
Pre Time was pressed.

Post ECG Stores the moving image for the set range after STORE is pressed.
Post Time

Manual Stores the moving image for the set range after STORE is pressed.
Stores the moving image from the point STORE is pressed until the next time
it is pressed.

5-12 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-2 Image storage and output: STORE

5-2-4-1 Storing the specified range as a Line format moving image: Pre ECG, Pre Time

You can store the moving image for the set range retroactively from the point STORE was
pressed.
The image modes that can be stored in Line format are limited. The active image is stored in the
1B, 2B, 4B and Flow modes. The 2B image is stored in the DDD mode.
Assign Acquire Mode to the function menu using Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu >
Menu-Function) and select Pre ECG or Pre Time.

When Auto Loop is Off

Stores the range to be stored without playing back in a loop.

● Display a real-time image and press STORE.

→ The moving image is stored retrospectively for the range set in Time Cycle or ECG Cycle,
from the point STORE was pressed.
If Pre ECG is selected and there is no ECG sync, the message ”It failed in the
store of this images!” displayed. The screen freezes.

When Auto Loop is On is On

Stores the specified range after playing back in a loop.

1. Display a real-time image, and press STORE.

→ The moving image is played in a loop retrospectively for the duration set in Time Cycle or
ECG Cycle, from the pint STORE was pressed.
The following message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
”Accept this images or cycle: Press STORE sw”
”Retry: Press Cancel sw”
If Pre ECG is selected and there is no ECG sync, the message ”It failed in the
store of this images!” is displayed. The screen freezes.
2. Use the Rotary Encoder to select playback range.
3. Check the image and press STORE.
→ The image is stored on the internal HDD. A thumbnail is displayed on the right of the
screen.
To cancel moving image acquisition, press CANCEL. Storage of data can also be canceled
by pressing FREEZE, but past image data in the cine memory is not cleared.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-13

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-2 Image storage and output: STORE

5-2-4-2 Storing the specified range as a Line format moving image: Post ECG, Post Time

You can store the moving image for the set range after STORE is pressed.
The image modes that can be stored in Line format are limited. The active image is stored in the
1B, 2B, 4B and Flow modes. The 2B image is stored in the DDD mode.
Assign Acquire Mode to the function menu using Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu >
Menu-Function) and select Post ECG or Post Time.

When Auto Loop is Off

Stores the range to be stored without playing back in a loop.

● Display a real-time image and press STORE.

→ The moving image is stored for the range set in Time Cycle or ECG Cycle, from the point
STORE was pressed.
It Post ECG is selected and there is no ECG sync, the message ”It failed in the
store of this images!” is displayed. The screen freezes.

When Auto Loop is On

Stores the range to be stored after playing back in a loop.

1. Display a real-time image, and press STORE.

→ The moving image is played in a loop for the range set in Time Cycle or ECG Cycle, from
the point STORE was pressed.
The following message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
”Accept this iamges or cycle: Press STORE sw”
”Retry: Press Cancel sw”
If Post ECG is selected and there is no ECG sync, the message ”It failed in the
store of this images!” is displayed. The screen freezes.
2. Use the Rotary Encoder to select the playback range.
3. Check the image and press STORE.
→ The image is stored on the internal HDD. A thumbnail is displayed on the right of the
screen.
To cancel moving image acquisition, press CANCEL. Storage of data can also be canceled
by pressing FREEZE, but past image data in the cine memory is not cleared.

5-14 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-2 Image storage and output: STORE

5-2-4-3 Storing the specified range as a Video Clip format moving image: Pre ECG, Pre Time

You can store the moving image for the set range retroactively from the point STORE was
pressed.

Assign Acquire Mode to the function menu using Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu >
Menu-Function) and select Pre ECG or Pre Time.

● Display a real-time image and press STORE.

→ The moving image is stored retrospectively for the range set in Time Cycle or ECG Cycle,
from the point STORE was pressed.
A circle is displayed in the top right of the screen during storage.

If Pre ECG is selected and there is no ECG sync, the message ”It failed in the
store of this images!” is displayed. The screen freezes.

5-2-4-4 Storing the specified range as a Video Clip format moving image: PostECG, PostTime

You can store the moving image for the set range after STORE is pressed.

Assign Acquire Mode to the function menu using Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu >
Menu-Function) and select Post ECG or Post Time.

● Display a real-time image and press STORE.

→ The moving image is stored for the range set in Time Cycle or ECG Cycle, from the point
STORE was pressed.
The REC mark is displayed in the top right of the screen during storage.

If Post ECG is selected and there is no ECG sync, the message ”It failed in the
store of this images!” is displayed. The screen freezes.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-15

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-2 Image storage and output: STORE

5-2-4-5 Storing moving images for the desired amount of time

You can store the moving image after STORE is pressed, until the next time it is pressed.
The image modes that can be stored in Line format are limited. The active image is stored in the
1B, 2B, 4B and Flow modes. The 2B image is stored in the DDD mode.

Assign Acquire Mode to the function menu using Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu >
Menu-Function) and select Manual.

1. Display a real-time image, and press STORE.

→ The capture process of a moving image begins.
To cancel moving image acquisition, press CANCEL.
Storage of data can also be canceled by pressing FREEZE, but past image data in the cine
memory is not cleared.
If the moving image acquisition time exceeds 180 seconds, acquisition stops.
2. Press STORE.
→ The capture process of a moving image ends. The screen returns to real time.
If the storage format is Line and Auto Loop is set to On, the image is not stored and the
relevant range is played back in a loop. When playback ends, the message ”Accept
this images or cycle: Press STORE sw. Retry: Cancel sw.”
is displayed. To store the image, press STORE.

5-2-4-6 Storing in Video Clip format and storing the same range as Line data

You can capture the moving image in Video Clip format (1B, 2B, 4B, Flow, or DDD), play back
the same range in a loop, and store as Line data.

Set Video Clip Auto Stop in the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Store, Cine) to On.
Assign Acquire Mode to the function menu using Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu >
Menu-Function) and select Manual.

1. Store a moving image for the desired amount of time.

→ When the image is stored, it is frozen.
If the message ”The Cine memory is cleared. Video Clip Auto
Stop is off.” is displayed, try again to store the moving image.
2. Perform loop playback.
a Check that the trackball function is on Search. If it is not Search, press TBF.
b Roll the trackball upward.

3. Press STORE.
→ Loop playback range (the range stored in Video Clip format) is stored in Line format.

5-16 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-2 Image storage and output: STORE

5-2-4-7 Storing a specified segment of B mode moving images after freeze

You can store the image currently in loop playback as a moving image. You can specify the loop
playback range and store that period as a moving image.
The active image is stored in the 1B, 2B, 4B and Flow modes. The 2B image is stored in the
DDD mode.

1. Press FREEZE to freeze the image.

2. Set the loop playback range.
3. Roll the trackball upward to perform loop playback.
4. Press STORE during loop playback.
→ The moving image for the loop playback range is stored in the specified format.
If Video Clip format is selected, the loop playback range is played back from the start at
30Hz, for storage.
When this playback ends, storage is complete and normal loop playback resumes.
If Line format is selected, normal loop playback resumes once storage is complete.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-17

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-3 Printing: Print (Archive Group)

5-3 Printing: Print (Archive Group)

Prints images on a printer connected to the instrument. It is possible to print real-time or

post-freeze images. When a printer is set, gamma correction optimal for the printer is performed
so a good image is printed.
Which printer to use under each condition is preset (Common Preset > Print Select). Select
Printer (B/W) for black and white, and Printer (Color) for a color printer.
If the actual printer connected is different from the printer specified in preset, printing will not
take place properly. Make sure the printer matches the setting.

5-3-1 Printing from real-time display

Navigate the preset (Common Preset > Print (RealTime)), and assign one printer name to
one Archive Group. One printer can be set.
The setting for PRINT can be changed with the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom
SW2).

1. Display an optimal image in real-time display.

2. Press PRINT.
→ The image displayed when you pressed the button will be printed as a still image.
If the message "”<FREEZE> the image, Then try again.”" is displayed,
the current printer is not assigned to that button in the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Print
(Real time)) settings. Press the button that is assigned to the current printer.

Related links:
Custom SW2 → p.7-72

5-18 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-3 Printing: Print (Archive Group)

5-3-2 Printing from freeze

Navigate the preset to Common Preset > Print (Freeze), and assign one printer name to one
Archive Group. Up to three prints can be set.
The setting for PRINT can be changed with the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom
SW2).

1. Search for the optimum image.

2. Press PRINT.
→ The displayed image is printed as a still image.

Related links:
Search → p.5-1
Custom SW2 → p.7-72

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-19

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

5-4 Image review: Review

Searches and displays the images recorded internally or externally, or stores or transfers
externally.

5-4-1 Review display

You can display images saved externally in the following screen.

Current View
Displays the image from the current
examination. When the image is
stored, a thumbnail of the stored image
is displayed in the thumbnail area.

Image Viewer
Displays a list of images selected in
Search Results View. If there are more
images to fit in one page, select tool
icon Prev. Page or Next Page to
switch between pages.
It displays a list of stored images of the
patient currently being examined
immediately the Review key is
pressed. The image number is
displayed at the upper right of the
image.

5-20 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

Find View
Searches and displays the desired
patient data.

Search Results View

Displays the search results in the
Patient list.
It displays a list of thumbnails of the
patients selected in the Patient list.

Details View
Displays the examination information
of the images selected in Search
Results View.
This view is displayed when Detail in
Search Results View is selected.
When Close in Details View is
selected, the view returns to Search
Results View.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-21

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

Full Screen View

Displays selected images in the size
when they were stored. The tool icon
is displayed above the mode menu.
In this screen, you can adjust and
measure the image.

5-4-1-1 Thumbnail

A thumbnail displays the icon indicating the image type and the image number. The image
number is also displayed in Image Viewer.

: Image type icon

Displays the type of image with an icon.

1-1: Image number. It is displayed on the top right corner of the thumbnail.
It indicates Series - Serial number within each study for the DICOM format images
or images stored in the internal HDD.

There are following icons that indicate image types.

Still image (Image)

Moving image (Line)

Moving image (Video Clip)

Green Image stored in the local HD.

Cyan Image stored on external media.
Blue Image sent to a DICOM Storage Commitment Service Class server, and for which a
response from the server has been received.
Orange Image that has been sent to any server other than the DICOM Storage Commitment
Service Class.

5-22 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

5-4-1-2 Root menu

This is the menu displayed at the bottom of the screen in Image Viewer, Search Results View
and Details View.
Fig. 5-1: Image Viewer

Fig. 5-2: Search Results View, Details View

Find Switches to the Find screen.

Delete The selected images are erased.

Viewer Switches to the Image Viewer.

CD-R Writes the data in the CD-R Buffer to a CD-R.

Exit Returns to the previous screen.

Export Converts the image (s) selected in the Image Viewer to PC format, and saves in the
specified storage destination.
DICOM Outputs the image (s) selected in the Image Viewer as DICOM format.
Image Zooms, rotates, inverts laterally and vertically the image (s) selected in the Image Viewer.
Loop Playbacks in loop the image (s) selected in the Image Viewer.
Window Sets the thumbnail display layout and page switching.

File Form Selects the image type to be displayed in the Image Viewer.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-23

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

5-4-2 Searching images

Searches for images stored internally or externally.

1. Select Review key.

→ The Image Viewer is displayed.
2. Select Find.
→ Switches to the Find screen.

The screen displayed will be different according to the setting in Auto Input (review) in the preset
(Common Preset > Common2).

Auto Input (review): Off Auto Input (review): On

3. Set the search conditions.

Search condition setting parameter
Device Name Local HD
ID Specifies Patient ID.
Enter * after the ID for wildcard search.
Name Specifies Patient Name.
Enter * after the ID for wildcard search.
Study ID Specifies Study ID.
Enter * after the ID for wildcard search.
Study Date Today, Yesterday, Last one week, Last one month, Date spec
When Auto Input (Review) is set to On, you can specify a date.
Application Specifies application.

Referring Phys Sets conditions for parameters selected from the list.

Reporting Phys
Sonographer
Study Description
Series Description

5-24 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

Setting conditions from search history

Select ▼ in each condition field.
The text strings from the last 6 entries will be listed.
Clearing the search history
Select F16 (SEND) key to display the pop-up menu and select History Clear.
4. Select Search.
→ The search result is displayed in the Patient list in the Search Results View.
5. Select the target patient from the Patient list.
→ The stored images of the selected patient are listed.

When you select images, green frames are displayed around the images.
If at least one image is selected, you can display Study/Series details of the image. When
you select Detail, Details View is displayed.

When you select Close, the view returns to Search Results View.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-25

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

5-4-3 Selecting images

Selects the images to be replayed, copied, deleted, or printed.

5-4-3-1 Selecting image one by one

Select images one by one in Image Viewer or Search Results View.

● Select target images.

→ The selected thumbnail will be displayed with a green frame. The information that has the
selected images in the Patient list in Search Results View is shown in green.
To deselect the selected images, re-select them. When selection is canceled, the green
frame on the thumbnail is eliminated.

5-4-3-2 Selecting images by Study ID or Series

You can select images by Study ID or Series in Search Results View. The information that has
the selected images in the Patient list is shown in green.

● Select images by Study

a Select the target Study name.
→ All stored images for the examination are selected. When you re-select the Study name
while all the images are selected, all the selections will be deselected.
● Select images by Series
a Select the target Series name.
→ All stored images for the examination series are selected. When you re-select the series
name while all the images are selected, all the selections will be deselected.
● Select all images for the patient
a Select Select All.
● Deselect all selected images
a Select Unselect All.
b To deselect selected images of all patients, select Unselect All Patient. To deselect all the
images of the patient currently displayed, select Unselect This Patient.

5-26 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

5-4-4 Changing the screen display of the image

You can change the screen display in the Image Viewer as follows.

• Change display layout

• Zoom the selected image
• Rotate the selected image
• Invert the selected image

5-4-4-1 Changing display layout

1. From the root menu, select Window > Image Layout.

2. Select display layout.
• 1×2, 2×2, 3×3, 4×4, 5×5, 6×6: Displays in specified numbers of rows × columns.
• Full Screen: If an image had been selected, it will be displayed in Full Screen View.

5-4-4-2 Zooming the image

1. Selecting images.
2. From the root menu, select Image > Zoom.
3. Select the zoom size.
Zoom size
The image is zoomed by ×1/4, ×1/3, ×1/2, ×1, ×2, ×3, ×4 relative to the image display size.
• Zoom In: Enlarges the selected image by one step.
• Zoom Out: Reduces the selected image by one step.
• Original: Displays the selected images in its original size.
Displaying an image to fit the layout display
Select F16 (SEND) key to display the pop-up menu and select Reset Image.
The image is displayed in the size for the original layout.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-27

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

5-4-4-3 Rotating images

1. Selecting images.
2. From the root menu, select Image > Image Rotate.
3. Select the rotation angle.
• Rotate 180: Rotates the selected image by 180°.
• Right 90: Rotates the selected image clockwise by 90°.
• Left 90: Rotates the selected image counterclockwise by 90°.
Displaying in the original direction
Select F16 (SEND) key to display the pop-up menu and select Reset Image. Or, from the root
menu, select Image > Reset Image.
The image is displayed in the original direction.

5-4-4-4 Inverting images

1. Selecting images.
2. From the root menu, select Image > Image Direction.
3. Select the rotation angle.
• Up down: Inverts the selected image vertically.
• Right Left: Inverts the selected image laterally.
Displaying in the original direction
Select F16 (SEND) key to display the pop-up menu and select Reset Image.
The image is displayed in the original direction.

5-28 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

5-4-4-5 Playing back an image

You can play back the image selected in the Image Viewer in full screen.

● Move the pointer to the thumbnail and quickly press ENTER twice.
● From the root menu, select Full Screen in Window > Image Layout.
● Select tool icon ( ).

The image is played back. When multiple images are selected, the first image is played back.

Playback and stop tool icons

Using the tool bar at the bottom of the screen, this function enables changing the playback speed
or stopping the playback of the moving image.

Tool icon Name of icon Function

Full Screen Returns to the previous Image View.

Prev Image Plays back the previous image when multiple images are selected.

Next Image Plays back the next image when multiple images are selected.

Loop Start/Stop Starts or stops loop playback.

Speed Up Increases the playback speed of loop playback.

Speed Down Reduces the playback speed of loop playback.

Prev Frame When used while a moving image is stopped, this displays the
frame prior the current frame.
Next Frame When used while a moving image is stopped, this displays the
frame after the current frame.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-29

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

Adjusting full screen display images

Adjust the full screen display image of the moving image data captured in Line format.

Adjust the image using the following menu on the panel switch or assigned in the preset (Preset
Set-Up Menu > Menu Function, Custom SW and Custom-Keyboard).

• Gain
• Flow Gain
• Show/Hide each color mode (Flow, Power Flow, eFlow)
• Contrast
• Post Processing
• Post Process High
• Post Process Low
• View Gamma
• B Image Erase
• Base Line Shift (Flow)
• Color Polarity
• Priority Level
• Rejection (Flow)
• Color Map (B/M)
• Color Map (Flow)
• Display Priority (Flow)

1. Display the image in Full Screen.

2. Select tool icon or set Loop in the menu to Stop.
3. Switch the display mode in the mode menu and select adjustment menu.
→ The image is adjusted and displayed. The image adjustment will be discarded if the image
is switched to another one or if you return to Image Viewer. The adjusted image will not be
saved.

5-30 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

5-4-5 Deleting images

5-4-5-1 Deleting images in Image Viewer

1. Press FREEZE.
→ The image freezes.
2. Select Review key.
3. Selecting images.
4. Select Delete from the root menu.
→ The following message is displayed.

5. Select Delete under the message.

→ The selected image is deleted.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-31

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

5-4-5-2 Deleting images in Search Results View

1. Press FREEZE.
→ The image freezes.
2. Select Review key.
3. Select Find.
4. Enter the patient information to select, and select Search.
→ The information is displayed.
5. Delete images.
• Deleting patient information for one patient
Select the images, then Delete from the root menu.

• Deleting patient information for multiple patients

Select multiple images to delete, then Delete from the root menu.

• Deleting all images including information for other patients

Move the pointer to the thumbnail, and select F16(SEND). Select Delete All Patients
from the pop-up menu.

• Deleting all images within the selected patient information

Move the pointer to the thumbnail, and select F16(SEND). Select Delete This Patient
from the pop-up menu.

6. Select Delete under the message.

→ The images are deleted.

5-32 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

5-4-6 Copying images

In Search Results View, store the selected images to the specified device in DICOM format.

If there are many images, use Disk Remain to check that there is sufficient capacity remaining
in the destination.

1. Select images in the Search Results View.

2. Move the pointer to a thumbnail, and then press F16 (SEND) key.
→ The pop-up menu is displayed.

3. Select menu from the pop-up menu.

Pop-up menu
Copy All Patients Copies all patient images in the Patient list.

Copy This Patient Copies all images of the selected patient.

Copy Selected Images Copies all selected images.

4. Then, select the storage destination.

Storage destination
USB Stores to a USB flash memory.

CD-R Buffer Stores to CD-R Buffer. The maximum capacity is 640 MB.
Check the disk capacity using Disk Remain before storing. If the
image file is larger than the capacity of the buffer, adjustment it
so it is divided into 640 MB or less.

DVD Stores to DVD.

Local HD2 Stores to Local HD2 region.

Server Outputs to a server.

Local Printer Outputs to a local printer.

DICOM Printer Outputs to a DICOM printer.

→ The images with the specified conditions are saved to the specified storage destination.

Related links:
Checking the free space → p.5-34

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-33

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

5-4-6-1 Checking the free space

1. Switches to the Search Results View.

2. Move the pointer to a thumbnail, and the press F16 (SEND) key.
→ The pop-up menu is displayed.
3. Select Disk Remain.
→ Disk Free Space dialog is displayed.

If the media is changed while the dialog box is displayed, the remaining capacity of each
media is updated and displayed when Reload is selected.
4. Select OK after checking the space.

5-34 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

5-4-7 Formatting a DVD

You need to format a DVD before copying and storing to a DVD-RAM.

Please use commercially available DVD-RAM media that conforms to the DVD-RAM Ver. 2.1
standard. Media with capacity of 4.7 GB (single-sided) or 9.4 GB (double-sided) (without
cartridge) can be used.
The DVD may be formatted to either the UDF or FAT32 format. A 9.4 GB double-sided media
is formatted one side at a time.

1. Select images in the Search Results View.

2. Move the pointer to a thumbnail, and then press F16 (SEND) key.
→ The pop-up menu is displayed.
3. Select Format DVD.
→ The Format dialog box is displayed.

4. Set the format and so on.

5. Select Start.
→ A message confirming the settings is displayed.

6. Select Yes.
→ Formatting is started.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-35

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

5-4-8 Outputting images

Output the images selected in the Image Viewer.

There are 4 methods to output the images.

• Convert to the PC format and store them.

• Store and transfer as DICOM format.
• Write the data from the CD-R Buffer to a CD-R.
• Print the images.
You can output the images to media or network servers in the following file formats.

Storage Storage destination

format in
STORE Storage format Media Server Remarks
Still image DICOM Palette Yes Yes Some viewers may not support the
Image image playback of the Palette.*1
The following three types of data compression
are possible.
• Implicit Little Endian (non-compression)
• Explicit Little Endian (non-compression)
• Run-Length Encoding (reversible
compression)
DICOM RGB Yes Yes The following three types of data compression
are possible.

DICOM ― Yes • Implicit Little Endian (non-compression)

Monochrome2 • Explicit Little Endian (non-compression)
• Run-Length Encoding (reversible
compression)
DICOM JPEG Yes Yes Navigate the preset (Common Preset >
Common1) and change the JPEG
compression ratio in JPEG Q Factor.
JPEG Yes ― Navigate the preset (Common Preset >
Common1) and change the JPEG
compression ratio in JPEG Q Factor.
BMP Yes ―
TIFF Yes ―

5-36 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

Storage Storage destination

format in
STORE Storage format Media Server Remarks
Moving Line Yes Yes This format is not cannot be displayed in
image commercially available DICOM Viewer
Line software. The file can be displayed only in
this instrument.
It differs depending upon the server. For
details, contact your system administrator (IT
personnel) for the hospital network.
DICOM Palette Yes Yes The following three types of data compression
are possible.
DICOM RGB Yes Yes • Implicit Little Endian (non-compression)
• Explicit Little Endian (non-compression)
• Run-Length Encoding (reversible
compression)
DICOM JPEG Yes Yes Navigate the preset (Common Preset >
Common1) and change the JPEG
compression ratio in JPEG Q Factor.
AVI Yes ―
Moving DICOM JPEG Yes Yes The optional SOP-F31-10 is required. You
image can change the compression rate in Common
VideoClip Preset > Common1 using JPEG Q
Factor.*2
DICOM ― Yes The following three types of data compression
Monochrome2 are possible.
• Implicit Little Endian (non-compression)
• Explicit Little Endian (non-compression)
• Run-Length Encoding (reversible
compression)
AVI Yes ―

*1. In DICOM Palette saving for a still image, brightness, flow rate, dispersion and color information are saved
separately. Flow mode and color may be not displayed in some Viewer.
*2.It is possible to save Video Clip moving images in DICOM as JPEG-compressed Multi Frame images.
Note, however, that if you measured using the stored image that set Acquire Image to Manual, it is
necessary to match the settings of the device to display with the settings of device which stored the
image. When settings are different, measurement results may be different.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-37

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

5-4-8-1 Converting to and storing the images in PC format

Convert the image (s) selected in the Image Viewer to PC format, and store in the specified
device.

1. Select images in the Search Results View.

2. Select Viewer and switch to Image Viewer.
3. Selecting images.
4. From the root menu, select Export>storage destination (USB, CD-R Buffer or DVD).
→ The Export dialog box is displayed.

5. Set the image file format to change to.

Still image file format
Choose BMP, JPEG or TIFF.
Moving image file format
The file is converted to AVI. AVI CODEC in the preset Common Preset > Common2 is applied.
6. When storing images internally (Local HD or Local HD2), set the patient information.
Converting with patient information unmasked
Remove the check mark in Teaching File.
Converting with patient information masked
a Add a check mark to Teaching File.
→ Patient ID and Patient Name are set to be masked.
b Add check marks to items to be masked in Additional Mask Item.
c When there are images to be checked or images that are not targets (such as reports), select
1 by 1 setting / Preview.
→ The image and Mask Position Manual Setting dialog box is displayed.

5-38 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

d Check masking positions. If masking setting is not necessary, add a check mark to No
Mask.
e Check the images one by one using Prev or Next.
f Select Exit.

7. Select Save in Export dialog box.

→ The images are saved.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-39

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

5-4-8-2 Converting to DICOM format and saving images

Convert the file format of the selected images to DICOM format in the Image Viewer, and save
them to the specified storage destination.

1. Select images in the Search Results View.

2. Select Viewer from the root menu and change to Image Viewer.
3. Selecting images.
4. If necessary, convert the file format of Line moving images.
a From the root menu, select DICOM > DICOM File Type.
b Select the file format.

5. From the root menu, select DICOM > storage destination (USB, CD-R Buffer, DVD).
→ Store Data on disk dialog box is shown fir USB, CD-R Buffer, DVD media.

6. Check the dialog box.

• Color: Set the color display method of still images.
• Series Description: Enter the comment for the examination series from the keyboard.

7. Press STORE.
→ The selected images are stored in DICOM format.

5-40 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

5-4-8-3 Transferring images to the server

Convert the file format of the selected images to DICOM format in the Image Viewer, and save
them to the specified storage destination.

1. Select images in the Search Results View.

2. Select Viewer from the root menu and change to Image Viewer.
3. Selecting images.
4. If necessary, convert the file format of Line moving images.
a Select DICOM > DICOM File Type.
b Select the file format.

5. From the root menu, select DICOM > Server.

→ Send Data to File Server dialog box is displayed.
6. Check the dialog box.
• Color: Set the color display method of still images.
• Series Description: Enter the comment for the examination series from the keyboard.

7. Press STORE.
→ The selected images are transferred in DICOM format.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-41

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

5-4-8-4 Writing data in the CD-R Buffer to a CD-R

Write the images stored in CD-R Buffer to a CD-R.

NOTE: Examinations cannot be performed during the CD writing process. Do not performing an
examination before the writing process is finished.

1. Insert a blank CD-R to the CD-R drive.

2. Select CD-R from the root menu.
→ CD-R Writing dialog box is displayed.

3. Enter the CD Name.

4. Set Buffer Erase.
• On: Data in the buffer is deleted after the images are written to the CD-R.
• Off: Data in the buffer is saved as is.
If making multiple copies of the CD, select Off.

5. Select Start.
→ Writing to the CD starts. The progress bar is displayed during the write process.
NOTE: Do not turn off power to the instrument during the CD writing process (while the
progress bar is displayed). It may cause damage to the instrument’s CD drive.

5-4-8-5 Printing images

Output the still image selected in the Image Viewer to a printer.

1. Select images in the Search Results View.

2. Select Viewer in the root menu.
→ The view is changed to the Image Viewer.
3. Selecting image.
4. From the root menu, select DICOM > Printer (DICOM Printer or Local Printer).

5-42 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

Configuring the printer property

Configure the printer property of DICOM Printer or Local Printer.

1. Switches to the Image Viewer.

2. From the root menu, select DICOM > Printer Property.
→ A Print Property is displayed.

3. Configure the parameters.

4. Select OK.
→ The settings are saved.

Table 5-2: Local Printer Property Setting

Item Setting Function

Printer Name Selects the Local printer.

Num of Copies 1 to 9 Sets the number of copies to print.

Paper Size A4, B5, Letter Sets the paper size to print on.

N-up Note, 1, 2, 4, 6, 9, 16 Sets the number of images to print on each page.

Orientation LANDSCAPE Sets the direction of the paper to the vertical orientation.

PORTRAIT Sets the direction of the paper to the horizontal orientation.

Trim No Sets no margin between images.

Yes Sets the margins between images when printing multiple

images on a single page.

Model Name Selects the DICOM printer to print images on.

Num of Copies 1 to 99 Sets the number of copies to print.

Medium type BLUE FILM, CLEAR Selects the print media.

FILM, PAPER

Film Size Sets the paper size.

Orientation LANDSCAPE Sets the print direction to the vertical orientation.

PORTRAIT Sets the print direction to the horizontal orientation.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-43

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-4 Image review: Review

Item Setting Function

Display format 1×1 to 9×9 Sets the display format when multiple images are printed
on a single page.

Magnification Sets the type of enlargement process to use.

Smoothing Sets the type of smoothing process to use. (Currently not

function.)

Trim No Sets no margin between images.

Yes Sets whether to place margins between images when

printing multiple images on a single page.

Configuration Space to enter comments (Up to 64 digits).

Appl. Entity Displays the name of the DICOM standard program.

Currently not function.

Print Priority HIGH, MED, LOW Sets the priority by which print jobs are processed.

Destination Sets the printer.

Min density Enter the minimum brightness value for printing.

Max density Enter the maximum brightness value for printing.

Border density Sets the brightness of borders between images.

Empty density Sets the brightness of areas with no image to print.

Image polarity Sets the polarity of the printed image.

5-44 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-5 Recording and playback with the DVD

5-5 Recording and playback with the DVD

The DVD operating instructions in this chapter assume that the DVD has been set up in
accordance with our specifications. Refer to the instruction manuals that came with the DVD
recorder for information on the setup and preparation of the DVD.
Before recording images during an examination, it is necessary to input patient information (ID,
Name) ().

Do not connect equipment to this instrument unless it is specified in this manual. It can result
in unexpected accidents such as exposure to electrical shock. It also may cause injury or burn
to the patient or operator.

Do not install optional equipment unless approved by our company. It may cause unexpected
accidents or damage to the instrument. Installation of optional equipment shall be performed
by our approved personnel at the time of delivery. Please contact one of our offices listed on
back cover.

Related links:
Entering patient information → p.2-2

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-45

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-5 Recording and playback with the DVD

5-5-1 DVD recorders approved for connection

The following DVD recorders may be connected to this instrument. The recording media and
recording method is different by DVD recorder. When using a DVD recorder, purchase the
equipment according to your intended application and preferred media.
Refer to the instruction manual that comes with the DVD recorder for information on
recordable/playable disks, cautions on disk handling, storage, and maintenance.
DVD recorders that may be connected to this instrument
Model Recording Method Image Format Remarks

DVO-1000MD DVD+RW*1 DVD Video format Playback is possible on regular DVD

(SONY) players.

*1. Uses 4x speed DVD.

• When connecting one of the above equipment, go to Preset (Common Preset >
Common 2) and set the model name in Recorder Select. It is not possible to connect
and operate two or more at the same time.
• Partial deletion of images recorded on a DVD is not possible.
To erase or add recorded images, use rewritable disks (DVD-RW and DVD+RW).
• When playing back DVDs recorded on this device on DVD players or other DVD
compatible devices, it may be necessary to "finalize" the disk. For details on "finalizing"
a disk, refer to the instruction manual that came with the DVD recorder.

5-46 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-5 Recording and playback with the DVD

5-5-2 DVD recording

The basic operation for recording, pausing and stopping this instrument is explained below.

Before recording, input of patient information (ID, Name) is necessary.

Assign Rec to Custom switch or Custom keyboard on preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom
SW or Custom-Keyboard).
NOTE:For information on how to operate from the DVD recorder, see the instruction manual that
came with the DVD recorder.

1. Place a DVD media in the DVD recorder by following instructions in the DVD recorder
instruction manual.
2. Select the custom switch or function key Rec.
→ Recording starts. During recording, a mark indicating that recording is in progress flashes
on the top left of the monitor screen.
NOTE: Do not turn off the power of this instrument while recording is in progress. Cutting
off the power may result in destruction of all files.

3. If you want to stop recording, select the custom switch or function key Rec.
→ Recording stops. Pressing REC again resumes recording.

When recorded with a DVD recorder, title menus and chapter menus are automatically created
and saved on the disk. These title menus and chapter menus are used as an index for selecting
images to playback.
A title is a recorded segment that starts when Rec is pressed (start recording) and ends when
either NEW PATIENT or EXT is pressed (stop).
It is possible to divide a title into multiple chapters by pressing Rec (pause), then pressing Rec
again (restart), and repeating this operation for each chapter.
New P atient Patient A Ne w Patient Patient B
starting Recording Title 1 Pause Starting Recording Title 2 Pause

Title Thumb Thumb

nail nail
Menu
Pause/Resume Pause/Resume Pause/Resume Pause/Resume
Recording Recording

Thumb Thumb Thumb Thumb Thumb

nail nail nail nail nail
Chapter
Menu Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 2

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-47

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-5 Recording and playback with the DVD

5-5-3 Displaying DVD remaining capacity

When recording on a DVD recorder, the remaining disk capacity can be displayed on the screen
by turning the DVD Remain function On.

Assign DVD Remain to Function menu on preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function).

1. Place a DVD media in the DVD recorder by following instructions in the DVD recorder
instruction manual.
2. On the Function Menu, turn DVD Remain On.
→ Remaining capacity is displayed at the top left of the monitor screen.

Screen display Description

No Disk No media

The DVD recorder power is Off

Disk NA Recording not possible

CALC. Calculating remaining capacity

[ ] Remaining capacity 0% to 9%

[ >] Remaining capacity 10% to 19%

[ >>] Remaining capacity 20% to 39%

[ >>>] Remaining capacity 40% to 59%

[ >>>>] Remaining capacity 60% to 79%

[>>>>>] Remaining capacity 80% to 100%

5-5-4 DVD playback

Images recorded during the current examination or those from past examinations can be viewed.

5-48 MN1-5855 rev.1

 5 Recording and Storing Images
5-5 Recording and playback with the DVD

5-5-4-1 Playing back a DVO-1000MD

Operate the DVO-1000MD (Sony) from the function menu for playback.

Assign EXT to Custom switch or Custom keyboard on preset (Preset Set-Up Menu >
Custom SW or Custom-Keyboard).

1. Select EXT on the Custom Switch or Function key.

→ The instrument switches to EXT state which is used when displaying external signals (e.g.
images from a DVD recorder) on the monitor screen.
2. Select List on the Function Menu.
→ The title list is displayed. The first thumbnail of the chapter menu is displayed as the
thumbnail of the title menu.

3. Select an image file.

Playing chapters in sequence
a Select the patient ID to observe.
→ Images in the selected image file (e.g. Title 1) is played back sequentially from the
start (e.g. Chapters 1, 2 then 3).
During sequential playback, to skip to the next chapter, on the touch panel menu, turn
the Rotary Encoder in Index Search in the function menu to the right.

Specifying the index to playback

Allows playback by specifying the Index (Chapter) image within an image file (title menu).
a) Select the patient ID to observe using the trackball.
b) Roll the trackball to the right.
The Sub Title List is displayed.
c) Roll the trackball to the right.
The Chapter List is displayed.
d) Select the list to playback.
The selected Index is played back.
Skipping to the beginning of another patient during playback
a) Select the patient ID to observe using the trackball.
b) Rotate the Rotary Encoder in Title Search in the function menu.
Move forward and backward to find the title of the patient you wish to skip to.

MN1-5855 rev.1 5-49

5 Recording and Storing Images
5-5 Recording and playback with the DVD

Function Menu DVD Control (DVO-1000MD)

Menu Function

Audio Volume Adjusts the audio volume in the playback image.

Counter Search Skips by a specified playback time in the selected image file.

Eject Ejects the disk.

Erase (Format) Erases all recorded images on a DVD+RW. Or, formats the disk.

Index Search Skips to the start of each Index in the selected image file.

FF Plays back the image in 10x speed.

Frame Back When playback is in the Pause or Stop state, this function allows
frame-by-frame movement in the backward direction.

Frame Forward When playback is in the Pause or Stop state, this function allows
frame-by-frame movement in the forward direction.

Title Search Skips to the starting image of an image file for a specified patient within the
DVD.

Pause Pauses image playback.*1

Play Plays back an image.*2

Play Speed Adjusts the playback speed.

REW Plays back the image in the backward direction at 10x speed.

Stop Stops image playback.

List Displays a list of titles recorded in the DVD.

*1. The image will also pause when you press FREEZE during playback.
*2. The image playback will also resume when you press FREEZE while paused.

5-50 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-1 Setting custom switches and menu

6 Custom Switch Menu

6-1 Setting custom switches and menu

You can register or change the items to be set in the custom switches, custom keyboard and
function menu using the preset.
The display in the function menu should be set by area.

Setting area Preset with settings to be changed

Custom switch (User switch area) Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom SW
Custom foot switch Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom-Foot
Custom keyboard Preset Set-Up Menu > Custom-Keyboard
Function menu Preset Set-Up Menu > Menu-Function

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-1

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-2 Custom Switch/Custom Keyboard

6-2 Custom Switch/Custom Keyboard

The following table shows the functions that can be assigned to custom switches, custom foot
switches and cutom keyboard, but not to the function menu.

Menu Item Function

Invert This function reverses the left and right sides of the image when a B mode
image and a D mode image are displayed.
B Switches the display to the single B mode screen.

2B Switches to the 2B mode display.

4B Switches to the 4B mode display.

M Switches the display to the single B/M mode screen.

FAM Displays the FAM cursor.

PW Switches the display to the PW mode.

CW Switches the display to the CW mode.

Flow Switches the display to the Flow mode.

Power Switches the display to the Power Flow mode.

eFlow Switches the display to the eFlow (Extended Flow) mode.

TDI Switches the display to the TDI mode.

Zoom Displays part of the B mode image in enlarged form.

Focus (Shift) Switches the trackball function menu to Focus.

Body Mark Displays the body mark menu.

Cursor/B.L.S Moves or sets the cursor and the baseline of the Doppler pattern.
Moves or sets the cursor with the trackball and the baseline of the Doppler
pattern with Rotary Encoder.
Scan Area Adjusts the scan area of flow area of the B mode image.

Store Saves a frozen or search image.

Search Displays the image stored in the cine memory.

Review Switches between Current View and Image Viewer.
Rec Records an image to DVD connected to the instrument.

Archive Group 1 Outputs a displayed image to the device specified in the Archive Group1.

Archive Group 2 Outputs a displayed image to the device specified in the Archive Group2.

Archive Group 3 Outputs a displayed image to the device specified in the Archive Group3.

Comment Activates/deactivates comment input.

EXT Switches between the image of the current examination and the external input
display.
Full M/D Displays a full-screen M mode image from the B/M mode or a full-screen D
mode image from the B/D mode.

6-2 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-2 Custom Switch/Custom Keyboard

Menu Item Function

Select Selects the active screen when two or more images (2B, B/M, etc.) are
displayed.
Measurement Displays the measurement menu on the Function menu.

+ (Caliper) Starts the measurement assigned to this switch.

Probe1 to Probe3 Switches to probe connector No.1 to No.3.

Next Probe Switches the probe connector to the next number.

(Display example) M1: Starts the measurement assigned to Measure 1 to Measure4.
(Display example) Display example
M2: Dist. M1: No function has been assigned.
(Display example) M2: Dist: Distance measurement (basic measurement) has been assigned to
M3: Clear Measure2.
(Display example) M3: Clear: Clear has been assigned to Measure3.
M4: Report
M4: Report: Report has been assigned to Measure4.
ID Displays the ID screen.

Freeze Switches between the real time display and the still image display.

End Study Notifies the server of the end of the examination.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-3

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3 Function menu area

The menu window at the bottom of the screen allows you to display the functions that cannot
be operated from the operation panel as a menu where you can set necessary conditions.

(1) (2) (3)

(1) Mode Menu Present mode

(2) Function Menu a) Blue: Adjustable (selectable)
Orange: In operation
a)
Gray: Adjustable (selectable)
b) b) Present setting
c) Function that can be switched by pressing the Rotary
c)
Encoder function
(3) Trackball Menu Current trackball functions

The function menu area displays the following items that are assigned in the mode menu.

• B • Flow • Other
• M • Power Flow • RT3D (optional)
• D • eFlow

These mode menu assign a display menu with the Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu >
Menu-Function). Displayable menu items are explained below. For the following displayable
menu items, refer to each chapter in this manual.

• Comment: 1. Basic Operation

• Viewer Menu: 6. Recording and Storage Image
• EXT Menu: 6. Recording and Storage Image

6-4 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-1 B Mode Menu

6-3-1-1 Active (B1)

Activates the upper left image with the 4B mode.

While a request form 4B mode is displayed, it switches to the screen.

6-3-1-2 Active (B2)

Activates the upper right image with the 4B mode.

While a request from 4B mode is displayed, it switches to the screen.

6-3-1-3 Active (3B)

Activates the lower left image with the 4B mode.

While a request from 4B mode is displayed, it switches to the screen.

6-3-1-4 Active (B4)

Activates the lower right image with the 4B mode.

While a request from 4B mode is displayed, it switches to the screen.

6-3-1-5 AGC (B)

Sets the tissue boundary emphasis to be displayed.

Off Turns off the tissue boundary emphasis.

1 to 15 Sets the level of tissue boundary emphasis.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-5

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-1-6 AIP (Adaptive Image Processing)

REQUISITE: The optional SOP-F31-24 is required.

Displays the tissue structure and changes in characteristic more clearly by combining a process
to judge and emphasize the existence of border areas between different characteristics and a
process to remove speckle noise.

Off Ends AIP.

On Displays an AIP image.

Adaptive Image Processing (AIP) → p.3-15

6-3-1-7 AIP Edge Sens (AIP Edge Sensitivity)

Sets the sensitivity level of detection for border areas between different characteristics when
AIP is set to On.

1 to 8 The higher the value, the higher the detection sensitivity.

6-3-1-8 AIP Level

Selects the pattern that combines the settings for AIP Edge Sens and AIP Resolution when
AIP is set to On.
The combination pattern is set with the Preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Image-B, M2 > AIP
Level (B), AIP Level (THE), AIP Level (BbH)).

1 to 6 Selects a combination pattern.

6-3-1-9 AIP Resolution

Changes the level for producing a state with good spatial resolution when AIP is set to On.

1 to 8 Raise the level to improve spatial resolution.

Lower the level to improve speckle noise removal.

6-6 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-1-10 Angle Gain

Sets the gain correction of desired positions of scanning line direction.

Linear Sets all settings to be lined up at the bottom edge of the image.

V1 Raises both ends and sets a V-shape with the center being at the bottom edge.

V2 Sets a V-shape in which both ends are higher than those of V1 and the center is at the
bottom edge.
V3 Sets a V-shape in which both ends are higher than those of V2 and the center is at the
bottom edge.

6-3-1-11 Angle Sel (Punc) (Angle Select (Puncture))

Selects the needle guide line to be displayed if there are a number of puncture guide lines.

6-3-1-12 BbH (Broadband Harmonics Imaging)

Displays clearer B mode and M mode images by removing more extra components of the
second harmonics than T.H.E.

Off Ends Broadband Harmonics (BbH).

On Starts Broadband Harmonics (BbH).

Broadband Harmonics Imaging: BbH → p.3-16

6-3-1-13 Beam Processing

This function switches over the number of beams received in order to improve the frame rate.

Multi Scanning takes place using multiple received beams.

Single Scanning takes place using the standard number of scanning lines.

6-3-1-14 Beam Steer (B)

Enables information concerning the area being examined to be obtained by electronically

transmitting and receiving the ultrasound beam at an oblique angle.

-30 to 30 Sets the deflection of the B mode image in increments of 5 degrees.

The beam steering angle differs depending on the probe.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-7

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-1-15 Beam Steer Reverse (B)

Changes the angle set in Beam Steer (B), its opposite angle and the 0 degree position.

6-3-1-16 Biopsy Select

Selects a puncture adapter to be used when carrying out puncturing by connecting a probe
compatible with multiple puncture adapters.

6-3-1-17 Brightness Level

Set the target average brightness for the entire image after correcting the image with Image
Optimizer.

Auto Automatically sets the target average brightness in Image Optimizer.

Calculates the average brightness every time freezing occurs. Stores the moving average
deviation in the preset at a certain number of times according to the combination of
probes.
40 to 80 Sets the target average brightness in Image Optimizer.

6-3-1-18 Brightness Reset

Resets the average brightness that was acquired with the Image Optimizer.

6-8 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-1-19 Color Map (B/M)

Displays B mode and M mode images in colors.

Gray It is displayed without adding a color to B mode and M mode image.

A An image is displayed with adding from blue to orange.

B An image is displayed with adding blue color.

C An image is displayed with adding weak blue color compared to B.

D An image is displayed with adding orange color.

E It is a brown brightness characteristic.

F It is a brown brightness characteristic weaker than E.

G It is a blue and yellow brightness characteristics.

6-3-1-20 Compound Angle

Sets the angle of images that are superimposed by the Spatial Compound function.

5 to 30 Sets the angle of images that are superimposed in increments of 5 degrees.

The compound angle varies depending on the probe.

6-3-1-21 Contrast (B)

The contrast of B mode image is adjusted.

The display differs according to the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Common1 >
Contrast/Dynamic Range).

C1 to C23 Sets the contrast in 23 levels.

This is displayed when Contrast/Dynamic Range is set to Contrast.
D36 to D96 Sets the contrast in the range D36 to D96.
This is displayed when Contrast/Dynamic Range is set to Dynamic Range.

6-3-1-22 Extend F-View (Extended Field-View)

Displays B or B-color mode image in compound display.

Off Ends compound display.

On Displays B or B-color image in compound display.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-9

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-1-23 Focus (B)

Sets the number of focal points and positions of a B mode image.

B mode image has up to 8 transmission points (varies depending on the probe) divided by an
electronic probe. Up to 3 points can be set as focal point.

Auto 1P Sets one focal point near the center of the screen.

Auto 2P(@) Automatically sets one fixed focal point on the top of image and one movable point at the
center.
Auto 2P Sets two focal points evenly distributed across the entire image.

Auto 3P Automatically sets three focal points across the entire image.

6-3-1-24 Frame Corre (B) (Frame Correlation (B))

Correlates with the previous frame to display a smooth image.

Off Turns off the correlation with the previous frame.

1 to 15 Sets the level.

6-3-1-25 Frame Corre Type (Frame Correlation Type)

Selects the frame correlation operation.

Auto Selects the frame correlation according to the frame rate of the B mode image.

Manual Sets the frame correlation to be used as desired.

6-3-1-26 Frame Rate (B)

It selects either an image with frame rate emphasis or an image with image quality emphasis.

Low An image (scanning line density low) with priority in frame rate.
Med An image in the middle of High and Low.
High An image (scanning line density high) with priority in image quality.

6-3-1-27 FTC (B)

Accentuates edges in the B mode and makes the contours highlighted and lined.

Off Turns off the edge enhancement of the B mode image.

On Sets the edge of the B mode image to be emphasized as lines.

6-10 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-1-28 Image Direction (LR)

Reverses the B mode image laterally.

Normal Displays the B mode image in the normal direction. Active mark is displayed on the right.

Invert Reverses the B mode image laterally. Active mark is displayed on the left.

6-3-1-29 Image Direction (UL)

Inverts the B mode image vertically.

6-3-1-30 Image Freq (B/M) (Image Frequency (B/M))

Switches the transmit frequencies of a probe.

The number of steps that can be switched is different with each probe.
NOTE: Select the optimum setting for the area to be examined, while observing the acoustic
power index.

Penet Sets the frequency of a probe low at startup.

This function improves sensitivity.
Std Sets the frequency of a probe slightly low at startup.
This function improves sensitivity slightly.
Reso Sets the frequency of a probe slightly high at startup.
This function improves resolution slightly.
High Sets the frequency of a probe high at startup.
This function improves resolution.

6-3-1-31 Image Optimizer

Optimizes the items specified by the preset for B (M) Gain, Sound Speed, and Dop
Velocity/Base Line Shift.
Specify the items to be optimized by selecting Preset Set-Up Menu > Image Optimizer.
Use Brightness Level to adjust the target value for B (M) Gain.
Related links:
Brightness Level → p.6-8
Image Optimizer → p.7-97

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-11

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-1-32 Image Rotation (B)

Rotates a B mode image, using its center as rotation center, in 90-degree units. The marks
associated with the image (active mark, cursor, etc.) also rotate with the image.

0° Displays a B mode image so that a probe is on the screen.

90° Displays a B mode image by rotating it 90 degrees to the right.

180° Displays a B mode image by rotating it 180 degrees to the right.

270° Displays a B mode image by rotating it 270 degrees to the right.

6-3-1-33 IP Regist (B) (IP Registration (B))

Selects the number of the IP Select (B) to register the current settings of Contrast (B), AGC
(B), Relief (B).

IP1 to IP8 Selects the location to register the changed settings.

6-3-1-34 IP Regist (B) Initialize (IP Registration (B) Initialize)

Resets the settings registered in IP Regist (B) Registration to the default.

6-3-1-35 IP Regist (B) Registration (IP Registration (B) Registration)

Registers the current settings of Contrast (B), AGC (B), Relief (B) to the number selected for
IP Regist (B).

6-3-1-36 IP Select (B)

Selects the combination pattern of the following menu settings.

• Frame Corre (B) • Contrast (B) • Relief (B) • View Gamma

• Frame Corre Type (B) • AGC (B) • Smoothing (B)

1 to 8 Selects the menu setting combinations among eight patterns.

6-12 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-1-37 PRF Limit

This setting prevents the display of false echo images caused by repeatedly increasing frequency
when the examination range is narrow.

Off Changes the PRF to achieve the highest frame rate according to the display range used.

On Does not change the PRF even when the examination range is narrow.

6-3-1-38 Puncture G. Line (Puncture Guide Line)

Displays a puncture guideline on the screen for carrying out puncturing while observing a B
mode image. The puncture guideline is displayed in dots. The dot interval is displayed as 0.5 cm
or 1.0 cm depending on the display depth or zoom magnification.
When the direction of the image is reversed, the puncture guideline is also reversed accordingly.

Off Deletes the puncture guideline from the screen.

On Displays the puncture guideline.

6-3-1-39 Puncture Measure

Displays an arrow on the puncture guide line. Displays the depth to the position of the arrow.
NOTE: The numerical value indicating the depth is a guide. Check the error with respect to the
distance to the tip of the puncture needle using a water tank or other means before carrying out
puncturing.

Off Deletes the depth display from the puncture guideline.

On Measures and displays the dept to the position of the arrow alongside the puncture
guideline.

6-3-1-40 Relief (B)

This function enhances the contours of a B mode image.

Off Turns off the edge enhancement of B mode image.

Low The contours are enhanced to a low degree.

Med The contours are enhanced to a medium degree.
High The contours are enhanced to a high degree.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-13

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-1-41 SIP (Silky Image Processing)

Displays smooth image by combining a process that emphasizes the borders between tissues
and a noise removal process.

Off Turns off SIP.

On Displays an SIP image.

6-3-1-42 SIP Effect (Silky Image Processing Effect)

Selects the level of image processing from type A, B, or C when SIP is set to On.

6-3-1-43 Smoothing (B)

In the same depth, a correlation is established in scanning direction so that images turn out
smooth.

Off Sets the correlation between scan directions at the same depth.

1 to 15 Correlates scan directions at the same depth and sets the level to create a smooth image.

6-3-1-44 Spatial Compound (Spatial Compound Imaging)

REQUISITE: The optional SOP-F31-22 is required.

This function synthesizes ultrasound beams from multiple different angles. It reduces the
artifacts which depend on the direction of ultrasound irradiation.
For usable probes, see Safety Instruction.

Off Ends Spatial Compound Imaging (SCI).

On Reduces blind spots by scanning from multiple directions. Also reduces the artifacts
which depend on the direction of beam to display the image more truly. SCI is displayed
on the monitor.

Spatial Compound cannot be selected during the B/M mode, B/D simultaneous operation and
Trapezoidal Scan.
Related links:
Spatial Compound Imaging (SCI) → p.3-18

6-14 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-1-45 STC Curve

Sets the STC knob.

NOTE:This function is available when Adaptive STC is set to Normal in the preset (Preset Set-Up
Menu > Image-B, M1) and settings are registered in STC Registration.

Normal Applies the current STC knob setting.

Custom Applies the registered STC knob position.

6-3-1-46 STC Curve Initialize

Resets the registered STC knob to the default.

6-3-1-47 STC Registration

Registers the current STC knob setting.

6-3-1-48 T.H.E. (Tissue Harmonic Echo)

Receives the twice the frequency of the transmission frequency of the B or M mode and
produces an ultrasonic image using the second harmonics reflected from the tissues. The use of
the second harmonics enables a clear image that is free from artifacts such as side lobes.
Particularly, this mode offers improved image diagnosis of patients who do not readily transmit
ultrasound wave signals.

Off Ends the T.H.E.

On Starts the T.H.E.

Tissue Harmonic Echo (T.H.E.) → p.3-16

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-15

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-1-49 Trapezoidal Scan

Displays an ultrasonic image in a trapezoid shape to provide the wider field of view in the
orientation direction using the linear probe.
For usable probes, see Safety Instruction.

Off Ends Trapezoidal Scan.

On Displays an ultrasonic image in a trapezoid shape using the linear probe.

Trapezoidal Scan cannot be selected during the B/M mode, B/D simultaneous operation and
Spatial Compound.
Trapezoidal Scan → p.3-19

6-3-1-50 Trapezoidal Scan Angle

Adjusts the angle of the transducer in a linear probe (a in the diagram below).

a a

5 to 20 Adjusts the angle in increments of 5 degrees.

6-16 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-2 M Mode Menu

If you assigned FAM to a custom switch or function key beforehand, select FAM to display the
FAM mode menu.

6-3-2-1 Active FAM Off (Active Free Angular M-Mode Channel Off)

When plural cursors are displayed, the current active FAM cursors are erased.

6-3-2-2 AGC (M)

Sets the tissue boundary emphasis of the M mode image.

Off Turns off the tissue boundary emphasis.

1 to 15 Sets the level of tissue boundary emphasis.

6-3-2-3 Contrast (FAM) (M Contrast (FAM))

C1 to C16 The contrast of M mode image is set.

NOTE: Adjustment is not possible in FAM mode from a full-screen display in Review.

6-3-2-4 Contrast (M)

Sets the contrast of an M mode image.

The display differs according to the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Common1 >
Contrast/Dynamic Range).

C1 to C23 Sets the contrast in 23 levels.

This is displayed when Contrast/Dynamic Range is set to Contrast.
D36 to D96 Sets the contrast in the range D36 to D96.
This is displayed when Contrast/Dynamic Range is set to Dynamic Range.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-17

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-2-5 Echo Erase

Sets the area of the M mode image to be erased from below.

The M mode image and physiological signals are displayed in the same area. For this reason, it
may be difficult to see physiological signals in some cases. In such cases, deleting the M mode
menu image flow below with Echo Erase makes it easier to see physiological signals.

Off Displays an M mode image and physiological signals without modification.

1 to 19 Sets the Echo Erase region in increments of 1 step.

6-3-2-6 FTC (M)

It accentuates edges in M mode and makes the contours highlighted and lined.

Off Turns off the edge enhancement of the M mode image.

On Sets the edge of the M mode image to be emphasized as lines.

6-3-2-7 Gamma (FAM)

Off The brightness characteristics of the free angular M mode image are not changed.

1 to 4 Sets the brightness characteristics of the free angular M mode image to 1 to 4.

NOTE: Adjustment is not possible in FAM mode from a full-screen display in Review.

6-3-2-8 P Regist (M) (IP Registration (M))

Selects the number of the IP Select (M) to register the current settings of Contrast (M), AGC
(M) and Relief (M).

IP1 to IP8 Selects the location to register the changed settings.

6-3-2-9 IP Regist (M) Initialize (IP Registration (M) Initialize)

Resets the settings registered in IP Regist (M) Registration to the default.

6-18 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-2-10 IP Regist (M) Registration (IP Registration (M) Registration)

Registers the current settings of Contrast (M) and Relief (M) to the number selected for IP
Regist (M).

6-3-2-11 IP Select (M)

The patterns that combine the settings of the Contrast, the AGC, and the Relief on M mode are
selected.

1 to 8 It is selected among eight patterns.

6-3-2-12 MAG (FAM) (Magnification (FAM))

Sets the display range of the M mode image when Trace Fit is Off.

×0.5 Sets the display range of the free angular M mode image based on the size of the B mode
image to x0.5.
×0.75 Sets the display range of the free angular M mode image to ×0.75.

×1 Sets the display range of the free angular M mode image to ×1.

×1.5 Sets the display range of the free angular M mode image to ×1.5.

×2 Sets the display range of the free angular M mode image to ×2.

6-3-2-13 Multi FAM

Sets the number of cursor displayed.

2 Sets the number of FAM cursors to 2.

3 Sets the number of FAM cursors to 3.

6-3-2-14 PSAX (Parasternal Short Axis View)

Sets the display of FAM cursor for the left ventricular minor axis (Parasternal Short Axis View).

Off Displays and sets the FAM cursor one by one.

On Simultaneously displays multiple FAM cursors for the left ventricle minor axis.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-19

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-2-15 Relief (M)

This function enhances the contours of an M mode image.

When FTC is On in the M mode, Relief (M) can be set or changed but does not change on the
screen. When FTC is canceled, an image that corresponds to the set level is displayed.

Off Displays an M mode image without edge enhancement.

Low The contours are enhanced to a low degree.

Med The contours are enhanced to a medium degree.

High The contours are enhanced to a high degree.

6-3-2-16 Sweep Speed (M)

Selects the sweep speed of M mode.

The marks are displayed on the M mode image every 0.5 seconds. In the case of a real-time
display, the marks are displayed only at the top and bottom ends of the image. The marks are
displayed at fixed intervals from the top end to the bottom end during the freeze mode.

25.0 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of M mode to 25.0 mm/s.

33.3 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of M mode to 33.3 mm/s.
50.0 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of M mode to 50.0 mm/s.
66.7 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of M mode to 66.7 mm/s.
100.0 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of M mode to 100.0 mm/s.
150.0 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of M mode to 150.0 mm/s.
200.0 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of M mode to 200.0 mm/s.

6-3-2-17 Sweep Speed (FAM)

Selects the sweep speed of M mode.

25.0 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of M mode to 25.0 mm/s.

33.3 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of M mode to 33.3 mm/s.

50.0 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of M mode to 50.0 mm/s.

66.7 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of M mode to 66.7 mm/s.

100.0 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of M mode to 100.0 mm/s.

150.0 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of M mode to 150.0 mm/s.
200.0 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of M mode to 200.0 mm/s.

6-20 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-2-18 Trace Fit

Sets the display range of the M mode image.

Off Enables MAG (FAM) to change the display range of the M mode image.

On Automatically adjusts the MAG (FAM) so that it can be displayed in the M mode image
display area.
The MAG (FAM) display range is fixed at ×1.5 when two cursors are displayed and ×2
when three cursors are displayed.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-21

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-3 D Mode Menu

6-3-3-1 Angle Correct (Angle Correction)

Selects an angle of incidence of the Doppler beam to correct the flow velocity value.

0 to 80 Sets the angle of incidence in increments of 1 degree.

When the set angle exceeds 80 degrees, the angle cannot be corrected because the error is
too large.

6-3-3-2 Angle Correct Reverse (Angle Correction Reverse)

Switches the angle set in Angle Correct and Auto Angle Correct, the opposite direction of the
cursor and the Off position.

6-3-3-3 Auto Angle Correct (Auto Angle Correction)

Automatically corrects the flow velocity value that corresponds to the angle of incidence of the
Doppler beam. This function can be selected during cursor display with either in the B (Flow)/D
or 1B (Flow) mode.

6-3-3-4 Base Line Reset (D)

Resets the baseline of the Doppler pattern to the default position.

6-3-3-5 Base Line Shift (D)

Moves the baseline of the Doppler pattern. The Doppler pattern without aliasing phenomena can
be displayed.

-16 to +16 Moves the baseline of the Doppler pattern.

6-22 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-3-6 Beam Steer (D)

Enables information concerning the area being examined to be obtained by electronically

transmitting and receiving the ultrasound beam at an oblique angle.
This is used for areas such as the carotid artery where an ultrasound beam and a bloodstream
direction cross perpendicularly.

-30 to 30 Sets the deflection of the D mode image in increments of 5 degrees.

The area that can be set varies depending on the probe.

6-3-3-7 Beam Steer Reverse (D)

Changes the angle set in Beam Steer (D), its opposite angle and the 0 degree position.

6-3-3-8 B. L. Posi (Img Opti) (Base Line Position (Image Optimizer))

Sets the position for baseline shifting when compensating automatically for the Doppler
velocity range and baseline shift.

Unchanged Does not change the baseline.

0 to 16 Sets the shift position of the baseline.

6-3-3-9 Color Map (D)

Displays the D mode image in colors.

Gray Display the D mode image without colors.

A Sets the image display with the gradation between the blue and orange colors.

B Sets the image display with blue color.

C Sets the image display with blue color lighter than B.

D Sets the image display with orange color.

E Sets the image display with brown brightness characteristics.

F Sets the image display with brown brightness characteristic weaker than E.

G Sets the image display with blue and yellow brightness characteristics.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-23

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-3-10 Comp Curve(D) (Compression Curve(D))

Sets the brightness characteristics of the Doppler pattern. Displays a clear Doppler pattern by
suppressing weak signals.

Off Sets the weak signals not to be suppressed.

1 to 7 Sets the brightness characteristics of the Doppler pattern.

6-3-3-11 Contrast (D)

1 to 16 Sets the contrast of a D mode image.

6-3-3-12 D. Trace

This function automatically traces the Doppler waveform and displays the Doppler information
for the most recent single heartbeat.

Off Closes Real Time Doppler Auto Trace.

Erases trace lines during freeze.
On Traces a Doppler waveform in real-time D mode.
Re-displays the erased trace lines during freeze.

6-3-3-13 D. Trace Direction

Sets the trace range of Real Time Doppler Auto Trace.

Toward Sets the trace range above the baseline.

Away Sets the trace range below the baseline.
Both Sets the trace range to span across the baseline.
Auto Sets the trace range to the larger display range based on the baseline.

6-3-3-14 D. Trace Level

Adjusts the trace line detection level of Real Time Doppler Auto Trace.

0 to -22 Adjusts the trace line detection level in increments of 1dB.

6-24 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-3-15 D. Trace Locate (D. Trace Location)

Changes the display position for the Real Time Doppler Auto Trace results.

6-3-3-16 D. Trace Smooth

Smoothes the trace line for Real Time Doppler Auto Trace.

Low Sets a low level of trace line smoothing.

High Sets a high level of trace line smoothing.

6-3-3-17 Filter (D)

Selects a filter value to be applied with Filter Control (D).

1 to 12 Sets the number of steps when Auto is selected with Filter Control (D).

50Hz Sets the filter value at 50 Hz when Manual is selected with Filter Control (D).

100Hz Sets the filter value at 100 Hz when Manual is selected with Filter Control (D).

200Hz Sets the filter value at 200 Hz when Manual is selected with Filter Control (D).

400Hz Sets the filter value at 400 Hz when Manual is selected with Filter Control (D).

800Hz Sets the filter value at 800 Hz when Manual is selected with Filter Control (D).

1600Hz Sets the filter value at 1600 Hz when Manual is selected with Filter Control (D).

6-3-3-18 Filter Control (D)

Removes low frequency, high level noise that is generated by the motion of the heart wall, for
example.
It is used when high frequency components of blood flow are suppressed, preventing a clear
image from being displayed.

Auto Controls with a filter value corresponding to a flow rate range.

Manual Controls with a fixed filter value.

6-3-3-19 Freeze Trigger

Displays a trace line upon freeze when Real Time Doppler Auto Trace is used.

Off Displays the trace line without modification.

On Displays the trace line and the measurement values upon freeze.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-25

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-3-20 Image Freq (D) (Image Frequency (D))

Switches the transmit frequencies of a probe.

The number of steps that can be switched is different with each probe.
NOTE: Select the optimum setting for the area to be examined, while observing the acoustic
power index.

Penet Sets the frequency of a probe low at startup.

This function improves sensitivity.
Std Sets the frequency of a probe slightly low at startup.
This function improves sensitivity slightly.
Reso Sets the frequency of a probe slightly high at startup.
This function improves resolution slightly.
High Sets the frequency of a probe high at startup.
This function improves resolution.

6-3-3-21 Image Polarity (D)

Displays the D mode image with black and white reversed.

Posi Displays a positive D mode image.

Nega Displays a negative D mode image.

6-3-3-22 Image Select (D)

This function enables you to select whether to set a D mode image with priority on sensitivity,
or with priority on resolution.

Penet Displays an image with priority on sensitivity.

Std Standard setting.
Reso Displays an image with priority on resolution.

NOTE: Select the optimum setting for the area to be examined, while observing the acoustic
power index.

6-3-3-23 IP Regist (D) (IP Registration (D))

Selects the number of the IP Select (D) to register the current settings of Contrast (D), AGC
(D) and Relief (D).

IP1 to IP8 Selects the location to register the changed settings.

6-26 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-3-24 IP Regist (D) Initialize (IP Registration (D) Initialize)

Resets the settings registered in IP Regist (D) Registration to the default.

6-3-3-25 IP Regist (D) Registration (IP Registration (D) Registration)

Registers the current settings of Contrast (D), AGC (D) and Relief (D) to the number selected
for IP Regist (D).

6-3-3-26 IP Select (D)

The pattern that is combined with the settings of Contrast, Compression Curve (D), Resolution,
and Image Select(D) on the D mode is selected.

1 to 8 It is selected among eight patterns.

6-3-3-27 Resolution Select (D)

Selects resolution to be improved with a Doppler spectrum.

Time Improves resolution in the time direction.

Frequency Improves resolution in the frequency direction.

6-3-3-28 Sample Volume

Sets the dimension of the sample gate that extracts the signals from the B mode image in the P
W Doppler mode.

0.5 to 20 Sets the dimension of the sample gate.

The unit is 0.5 mm for 0.5 to 5, 1 mm for 5 to 10, and 2 mm for 10 to 20.

6-3-3-29 Spectrum Invert

Displays a D mode image vertically inverted with reference to the baseline.

Normal Displays the blood flowing toward the probe above the baseline and that flowing away
from the probe below the baseline.
Invert Inverts the D mode image.
The information on blood flow heading toward the probe and the information on blood
flowing away from it are displayed reversibly.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-27

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-3-30 Sweep Speed (D)

Selects the sweep speed of D mode.

25.0 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of D mode to 25.0 mm/s.

33.3 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of D mode to 33.3 mm/s.
50.0 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of D mode to 50.0 mm/s.
66.7 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of D mode to 66.7 mm/s.
100.0 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of D mode to 100.0 mm/s.
150.0 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of D mode to 150.0 mm/s.
200.0 mm/s Sets the sweep speed of D mode to 200.0 mm/s.

6-3-3-31 Transfer List Display

Displays a menu for measurement memory transfer that is used for transferring results of Real
Time Doppler Auto Trace to applied measurements.

6-3-3-32 Vel Range (D)

Sets the speed range of the D mode. The speed range option varies depending on the mode and
operating conditions.

6-28 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-4 Flow Mode Menu

Menus related to the modes, Flow, Power Flow, eFlow, TDI Flow and TDI Power Flow are
shown respectively below.

6-3-4-1 Average (Flow)

This function sets the number of transmissions used to display blood flow. If the number of
transmissions is large, the sensitivity is improved, however the frame rate falls.

Low The number of transmissions is set to a low value.

Med The number of transmissions is set to a medium value.
High The number of transmissions is set to a high value.

6-3-4-2 Base Line Reset (Flow)

Reset the baseline to the center.

6-3-4-3 Base Line Shift (Flow)

Sets the baseline for forward and reverse flows. Removes the display of aliasing by shifting the
baseline.
Only the Flow mode can be changed.

-64 to +64 Moves the baseline of the forward and reverse flows.

6-3-4-4 Beam Steer (Flow)

Enables information concerning the area being examined to be obtained by electronically

transmitting and receiving the ultrasound beam at an oblique angle.
This is used for areas such as the carotid artery where an ultrasound beam and a bloodstream
direction cross perpendicularly.

-30 to 30 Sets the deflection of the Flow mode image in increments of 5 degrees.
The area that can be set varies depending on the probe.

6-3-4-5 Beam Steer Reverse (Flow)

Changes the angle set in Beam Steer (Flow), its opposite angle and the 0 degree position.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-29

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-4-6 B Gain Comp (Flow) (B Gain Compensation (Flow))

Corrects the decrease in brightness caused by the power restriction when Flow is set to On.

-30 to 30 Sets a correction value (dB).

The correction value is set based on the difference in B Gain between Flow On and Flow
Off.

6-3-4-7 Capture Mode (Flow)

Displays color pixels for a fixed period of time and updates them when it receives information
which has higher brightness than that is currently displayed.

Off Cancels Capture Mode.

On Displays color pixels for a period of time designated by Capture Time (Flow).

6-3-4-8 Capture Time (Flow)

Sets a period of time to display color pixels when Capture Mode (Flow) is On.

1 sec Displays color pixels for 1 seconds.

2 sec Displays color pixels for 2 seconds.

3 sec Displays color pixels for 3 seconds.

Continuous Displays color pixels continuously.

6-3-4-9 Color Line Correlation

Performs line correlation of the color pixel data and unifies it, resulting in a color flow display
that has less black dropout.
Options vary depending on the size of the flow area.

Off Cancels Beam Steer (B).

Low Sets the degree of color line correlation low.

High Sets the degree of color line correlation high.

6-30 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-4-10 Color Map (Flow)

Selects the coloration menu for displaying color information (flow velocity, dispersion) in Flow
mode.

Color Map
Mode Color Map Type Function
Flow Abdom A to E Selects the color distribution for the abdominal region.
TDI Flow Cardio A to E Selects the color distribution for the cardiac region.

Vascular A to E Selects the color distribution for the peripheral vessels.

User A to E Selects the other color distribution.

Power Power A to E Selects the color distribution suitable for Power Flow.
TDI Power D-Power A Selects the color distribution suitable for Directional Power
Flow.
User A to E Selects the other color distribution.
eFlow eFlow A to E Selects the color distribution suitable for eFlow.

D-eFlow A Selects the color distribution suitable for Directional eFlow.

User A to E Selects the other color distribution.

6-3-4-11 Color Map Type (Flow)

Selects a color coding from the color menu selected under Color Map (Flow).

6-3-4-12 Color Polarity

Reverses the colors set by Color Map (Flow) in the Flow mode.Reverses the color of the blood
flowing toward the probe and that flowing away from the probe.
It can be set with Flow, Directional Power Flow, Directional eFlow, TDI Flow and Directional
TDI Power Flow. It can be selected even during the freeze mode.

Normal Displays the blood flowing toward the probe in red and that flowing away from the probe
in blue.
Invert Displays the blood flowing toward the probe in blue and that flowing away from the
probe in red.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-31

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-4-13 DDD (Dual Dynamic Display)

Displays the B mode (black and white image) and Flow mode side by side. The B+Flow mode
image is displayed on the right, and the B mode image is displayed on the left. This function is
also available in the Power mode and eFlow mode.
After the image is frozen, the screen is switched to the 1B mode display. However, the left and
right images cannot be searched separately after the images are frozen.

Off Cancels DDD and displays the Flow mode.

On The B+Flow mode image is displayed on the right, and the B mode image is displayed on
the left.

6-3-4-14 Directional (Flow)

Adds a color consideration of directionality to the Power Flow, eFlow, or TDI Power Flow
mode.
This setting can only be applied to the Power Flow, eFlow or TDI Power Flow being displayed.
It is set separately in Power Flow, eFlow and TDI Power Flow.

Off Displays in the Power Flow mode, eFlow mode or TDI Power Flow mode.

On Adds a color consideration of directionality to the currently displayed Flow mode.

6-3-4-15 Display Priority (Flow)

Sets the area where a black and white tomographic image and a color flow velocity display are
overlapped.

Color Sets the color display of the area where a black-and-white image and a color flow
velocity display are overlapped.
Both Displays both black-and-white and color images.

Color TDI Sets the color display of the area where a black-and-white image and a color flow
velocity display are overlapped in the TDI Flow mode.
This function is suitable for observing high speed data such as the motion of the
myocardium.
Both TDI Cuts off color information and displays black-and-white images preferentially if the low
flow velocity components of the color information are large.

To display the Display Priority (Flow) menu in TDI Flow, select B as the TDI Display Type
of the Tissue Flow in the preset (Preset Set-Up Menu > Tissue Flow).

6-32 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-4-16 Disp Priority B/W Lev (Flow) (Display Priority B/W Level (Flow))

Sets the brightness level for displaying black-and-white information.

0 to 127 If the echo is stronger than the specified brightness, the black-and-white echo is displayed
at its original brightness. Reducing the set value can remove clutter signals, but also
reduces the blood flow signal.

6-3-4-17 Disp Priority Color Lev (Flow) (Display Priority Color Level (Flow))

Sets the brightness level for displaying color information.

1 to 127 If the flow velocity is higher than the set value, color is displayed directly. Increasing the
set value can remove clutter signals, but also reduces the blood flow signal.

6-3-4-18 Filter (Flow)

Sets a level for removing low flow velocity components when displaying a lot of clutter signals
(wall motion noise) due to the effect of the heart wall, for example.

1 to 6 Sets the level for removing low flow velocity components.

TDI mode: 1 to 2
eFlow mode: 1 to 8

6-3-4-19 Flow Edge

Displays an image by post-processing the color pixel information to prevent the color flow from
extending over the tissues.

Off Cancels Flow Edge.

On Displays an image by preventing the color flow from extending over the tissues.

6-3-4-20 Frame Corre (Flow) (Frame Correlation (Flow))

Correlates adjacent frames in order to obtain a smooth image.

Off Turns Off the correlation between adjacent frames.

1 to 15 Sets the correlation at a lower level when observing fast motion, such as that of the heart.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-33

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-4-21 Frame Rate (Flow)

Selects a combination of Line Density (scanning density) for both black-and-white and color
images.

-4 to 0 to +4 Displays an image with image quality emphasis when the numerical value is decreased.
Displays an image with frame rate emphasis when the numerical value is increased.
The number of steps that can be set varies depending on the probe.

6-3-4-22 Frame Rate Accelerator

Creates images having continuity between frames. This function is suitable for images that have
a low frame rate, such as the blood flow in the abdominal region.

Off Cancels Frame Rate Accelerator. Select this function when greater importance is
attached to time resolution, such as in the case of the heart.
On Interpolates frames and displays an image in which there is continuity between the
frames.

6-3-4-23 Image Freq (Flow) (Image Frequency (Flow))

Switches the transmit frequencies of a probe.

The number of steps that can be switched is different with each probe.
NOTE: Select the optimum setting for the area to be examined, while observing the acoustic
power index.

Penet Sets the frequency of a probe low at startup.

This function improves sensitivity.
Std Sets the frequency of a probe slightly low at startup.
This function improves sensitivity slightly.
Reso Sets the frequency of a probe slightly high at startup.
This function improves resolution slightly.
High Sets the frequency of a probe high at startup.
This function improves resolution.

6-34 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-4-24 Image Select (Flow)

This function enables you to select whether to set a color image with priority on image quality,
or with priority on sensitivity.
NOTE: Select the optimum setting for the area to be examined, while observing the acoustic
power index.

Penet Displays an image with priority on resolution.

Std Standard setting.
Reso Displays an image with priority on resolution.

6-3-4-25 IP Regist (F) (IP Registration (Flow))

Selects the number of the IP Select (Flow) to register the current settings of Contrast (Flow),
AGC (Flow) and Relief (Flow).

IP1 to IP8 Selects the location to register the changed settings.

6-3-4-26 IP Regist (F) Initialize (IP Registration (Flow) Initialize)

Resets the settings registered in IP Regist (Flow) Registration to the default.

6-3-4-27 IP Regist (F) Registration (IP Registration (Flow) Registration)

Registers the current settings of Contrast (Flow), AGC (Flow), Relief (Flow) to the number
selected for IP Regist (Flow).

6-3-4-28 IP Select (Flow)

The pattern that is combined with the settings of Frame Correlation, Smoothing, Image Select
(Flow) and Filter (Flow) on the Flow mode is selected.

1 to 8 It is selected among eight patterns.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-35

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-4-29 PFD Range (Power Flow Dynamic Range)

Adjusts power (dynamic range: dB value) per display gradation in Power Flow and eFlow.
Obtains data with the high dynamic range necessary for analysis purposes and adjusts the image
to become suitable for real-time image diagnosis.
This function cannot be set in the TDI Power Flow mode.

Low Sets the dB value per gradation sequence at low level.

Med Sets the dB value per gradation sequence at medium level.

High Sets the dB value per gradation sequence at higher level.

6-3-4-30 Priority Level

Simultaneously adjusts the brightness of both black-and-white and color images based on Disp
Priority B/M Level (Flow) and Disp Priority Color Level (Flow) set in Display Priority
(Flow).

-8 to +8 Increases the brightness level of black-and-white and color images when it is set in the
+direction.
Decreases the brightness level of black-and-white and color images when it is set in the
-direction.

6-3-4-31 Rejection (Flow)

This function removes low flow velocity components from the color information.
Use it to remove noticeable wall motion noise. (Note that in this case low velocity blood flow
will also be removed.) This function can also be used after the image is frozen.

0 to 31 Sets the level of noise reduction in 32 levels.

6-3-4-32 Smoothing (Flow)

Displays a smooth image by post-processing the color pixel information.

Off Cancels Smoothing (Flow).

1 to 15 Sets the level of correlation.

6-36 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-4-33 Vel Range (Flow)

Sets the blood flow velocity range in the Flow mode. The speed range option varies depending
on the mode and operating conditions.

6-3-4-34 Wall Motion Reduction

Reduces signals (noise) in the vicinity of wall motion when a lot of clutter signals (wall motion
noise) are displayed.

Off Cancels Wall Motion Reduction.

1 to 15 Sets the level of wall motion noise reduction. The higher the set level, the higher the noise
reduction level. Setting the level too high may mask blood flow information.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-37

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-5 Other Menu

6-3-5-1 Acquire Method

Sets the storage format when storing moving images.

Line Stores the image in Line format.

Video Clip Stores the image in MJPG format.

Images are normally stored in Line format.

6-3-5-2 Acquire Mode

Sets the acquisition method when storing moving images.

Pre Time Sets the capture range of moving images to be between the time immediately before
pressing STORE and the set time (1 to 16 seconds).
Post Time Sets the capture range of moving images to be between the time immediately after
pressing STORE and the set time (1 to 16 seconds).
Pre ECG Sets the capture range of moving images to be between the R-wave captured immediately
before pressing STORE and the R-wave captured immediately before the set number of
heartbeats (1 to 10 heartbeats).
Post ECG Sets the capture range of moving images to be between the R-wave captured immediately
after pressing STORE and the R-wave captured immediately before the set number of
heartbeats (1 to 10 heartbeats).
Manual Sets the capture range of moving images to be between the time immediately after
pressing STORE and the time the STORE switch is pressed again.

6-3-5-3 Area Lock

This setting causes the flow area to move up, down, left or right when the Doppler cursor is
moved, so that the sample volume remains roughly at the center of the flow area.
When a B/M mode flow image is displayed, the flow area moves according to the motion of the
M mode cursor.

Off Displays the flow area without causing it to move according to the movement of the
Doppler cursor or the M mode cursor.
On Displays the flow area according to the movement of the Doppler cursor or the M mode
cursor.

6-38 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-5-4 Audio Volume

Sets the audio volume of the Doppler sound as well as the beep sound of ECG R-waves.

0 to 10 Sets the audio volume in increments of 1 step. The larger the numerical value, the larger
the audio volume.
Select 0 to turn off the sound.

6-3-5-5 Beam Steer (B/F/D)

Enables information concerning the area being examined to be obtained by electronically

transmitting and receiving the ultrasound beam at an oblique angle.

-30 to 30 Sets the deflection of the B mode image, Flow Area and D cursor in 5-degree units.

6-3-5-6 Beam Steer (F/D)

Enables information concerning the area being examined to be obtained by electronically

transmitting and receiving the ultrasound beam at an oblique angle.

-30 to 30 Sets the deflection of the Flow Area and D cursor in increments of 5 degrees.

6-3-5-7 Beam Steer Reverse (Beam Steer Reverse (B/F/D))

Changes the angle set in Beam Steer (B/F/D), its opposite angle and the 0 degree position.

6-3-5-8 Beam Steer Reverse (F/D)

Changes the angle set in Beam Steer (F/D), its opposite angle and the 0 degree position.

6-3-5-9 Body Mark Location

Changes the displayed body mark position.

6-3-5-10 Body Mark Reset

Resets the displayed body mark position to the default position.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-39

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-5-11 B Refresh

Sets the time interval for rewriting the B mode image during the simultaneous operation of B
Flow/M Flow, B/PW or BFlow/PW.

1 Updates the B mode image every 1 seconds.

2 Updates the B mode image every 2 seconds.

4 Updates the B mode image every 4 seconds.

6 Updates the B mode image every 6 seconds.

8 Updates the B mode image every 8 seconds.

B Refresh may not function depending on the preset setting combination (see table below).
Preset Set-Up Menu > DISP-D, Flow

Triplex Mode Triplex Mode Type Simul Mode B Refresh

Triplex MSE On/Off No
Refresh On/Off Yes
B-Real MSE On/Off No
Refresh On Yes
Refresh Off No
D-Real MSE On/Off No
Refresh On Yes Yes = Operable
Refresh Off No No = Inoperable

6-3-5-12 B/Sync Mode (B SYNC Mode)

Displays the normal B mode and the ECG Sync B mode side by side.

Off Ends the B/Sync mode and displays the B mode image.

On Displays the B mode image on the left and the B mode image where the ECG sync mark
is passing on the right.

6-3-5-13 B/* Format

Sets the display of the B/ Sweep mode.

L/R Displays images side by side in the B/ Sweep mode.

U/L Displays images up and down in the B/ Sweep mode.

6-40 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-5-14 Character Size

Sets the comment font size.

Normal Displays comments in standard font size.

Large Displays comments in double height and width font size.

6-3-5-15 Counter

Displays the timer counter.

Off Ends the timer counting and turns off the timer counter.

On Starts counting simultaneously when the timer counter is displayed.

6-3-5-16 Drift Filter (ECG Drift Filter)

Sets whether to stabilize the baseline of an electrocardiogram (ECG) waveform.

Off Cancels B/Sync Mode.

On Sets whether to stabilize the baseline of an electrocardiogram (ECG) waveform.

6-3-5-17 DVD Remain

Displays the remaining capacity in a disk.

Off Turns off the display of DVD disk remaining capacity.

On Turns on the display of DVD disk remaining capacity.

6-3-5-18 ECG Cycle

Sets the period of time for storing moving images according to the number of heartbeats. This
function can be applied when the Acquire Mode is set to Pre ECG or Post ECG.

1 to 10 Sets the period of time for storing moving images according to the number of heartbeats
(Cycles, integer values).

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-41

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-5-19 ECG Display

Displays an ECG waveform on the monitor.

Off Turns off the ECG waveform display.

On Turns on the ECG waveform display.

6-3-5-20 ECG Invert

Inverts the ECG waveform vertically to display.

Off Displays the ECG waveform without modification.

On Inverts the ECG waveform vertically to display.

6-3-5-21 ECG Posi (ECG Position)

Sets the display position of ECG.

1 to 32 Sets the position of the ECG waveform.

6-3-5-22 ECG Sens (ECG Sensitivity)

Sets the sensitivity of ECG.

1 to 32 Sets the sensitivity level of ECG waveform detection.

6-3-5-23 ECG Sync (ECG SYNC)

Displays only the B mode image indicated by the ECG sync mark on the ECG waveform. You
can acquire B mode images of any desired time phase while observing the time phase of the
ECG waveform.

Off Displays the B mode image without modification.

On Displays the B mode image indicated by the ECG sync mark.

6-3-5-24 Element Select

Switches the probe that has multiple transducers per probe connector.

6-42 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-5-25 Graphic Color

Sets the font and graphic colors to be displayed on the screen.

A Sets the font and graphic colors displayed on the screen to Type A.

B Sets the font and graphic colors displayed on the screen to Type B.

C Sets the font and graphic colors displayed on the screen to Type C.

D Sets the font and graphic colors displayed on the screen to Type D.

E Sets the font and graphic colors displayed on the screen to Type E.

User Sets the font and graphic colors displayed on the screen to Type User (setting of Graphic
Editor).

6-3-5-26 Graphic Editor

Edits the font and graphic colors displayed on the screen.

Display colors set by Graphic Color are saved as User data in Graphic Color. Preset Control
in the preset enables importing and exporting.

Off Sets the font colors for messages and patient information.

Plane1 Sets the font colors for measurement results.

Plane2 Sets the background color of measurement results.
Plane3 Sets display colors for comments, body marks, focus marks, and scales.
Plane4 Sets the caliper mark for measurement and the FAM active cursor.

Plane5 Sets the display colors for the M cursor, D cursor, and flow area.

Plane6 Sets the display color of the FAM inactive cursor.

Plane7 Sets the display colors for ECG, PCG, Pulse, and Resp.

Physio Sets the font colors for messages and patient information.

6-3-5-27 Graphic Editor B

Changes the blue display color that is set in Graphic Editor.

0 to 255 The higher the value, the stronger the blue coloration.

6-3-5-28 Graphic Editor G

Changes the green display color that is set in Graphic Editor.

0 to 255 The higher the value, the stronger the green coloration.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-43

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-5-29 Graphic Editor R

Changes the red display color that is set in

Graphic Editor.

0 to 255 The higher the value, the stronger the red coloration.

6-3-5-30 HR Stability Display (Heart Rate Stability Display)

Automatically determines if the heart rate of the most recent heartbeat is stable.

Off Ends the determination of the heart rate stability.

On Determines the heart rate stability and displays the HR value on the screen with black and
white reversed when the rate is stable.

6-3-5-31 HR Stability Disp (Avg.) (Heart Rate Stability Display (Average))

Sets the acceptable heart rate difference between heart rates of the average of five previous
heartbeats and the most recent heartbeat and the previous heartbeat using HR Stability Display.

0 to 50 Sets the acceptable heart rate difference (in 1% units).

6-3-5-32 HR Stability Disp (Conti.) (Heart Rate Stability Display (Continuous))

Sets the acceptable heart rate difference between the most recent heartbeat and the previous
heartbeat using HR Stability Display.

0 to 50 Sets the acceptable heart rate difference (in 1% units).

6-3-5-33 Imaging Information

This button sets whether to display or delete the frequency, gains, number of frames, depth, and
Dynamic Range in the image display area.

Off Deletes the information of the image display area.

On Displays the information of the image display area.

6-44 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-5-34 Invert Link

Sets the color polarity to be reversed when the D mode image is inverted.

Off Displays Color Polarity without modification even when the D mode image is inverted.

On Inverts Color Polarity when the D mode image is inverted.

6-3-5-35 Log Off

Logs off the currently logged-on user.

This menu is used when the User authentication function of the instrument is turned on.

6-3-5-36 Loop Mode

Sets synchronization for the loop playback in the 2B mode.

Short This mode is aligned with the B mode with the least number of playback images. A B
mode with a great number of the playback images will stop the loop playback until the
playback of B mode with the smallest number of the playback images is completed.
Long It is adjusted to the B mode which has the greatest number of playback images. A B mode
with a small number of the playback images will stop the loop playback until the
playback of B mode with the greatest number of the playback images is completed.
Align The B mode with the greatest number of images becomes the reference for playback time,
and the playback time of other B modes are adjusted so they all end their playback at the
same time.
Free Run The loop playback for each B mode is run without any mutual synchronization.

6-3-5-37 Monitor Back Light

Sets the backlight intensity of the monitor.

0 to 20 Sets the backlight intensity.

6-3-5-38 Monitor Brightness

Sets the brightness characteristics of the monitor.

0 to 20 Sets the light intensity.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-45

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-5-39 Monitor Contrast

Sets the contrast characteristics of the monitor.

0 to 20 Sets the contrast.

6-3-5-40 Panel LED Brightness

Adjusting the brightness of the operation panel switch.

Low Adjusting the brightness of the operation panel switch.

Med Keyboard (except function keys assigned a function) is auto-photo chromatic.

High
Auto (Low) Sets the brightness of operation panel switches to auto-photo chromatic.
Auto (Med)
Auto (High)
Auto (Saving)

6-46 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-5-41 Post Processing

Sets the characteristics of brightness displayed on the observation monitor according to the echo
intensity of the B mode image displayed on that monitor.
You can set the black-and-white image displayed in 64 gradations to one using desired
gradations while reducing echo noise. You can also change the display brightness
characteristics by selecting four types of correction curves and setting each level.

Linear Uses all 64 gradations. All echoes are displayed with the brightness corresponding to
their intensity.
Slope 1 Displays echoes lower than the brightness extension range at minimum brightness and
echoes higher than the brightness extension range at maximum brightness.
Slope 2 Displays echoes lower and higher than the brightness extension range at minimum
brightness.
Slope 3 Displays changes in the brightness of the echoes lower and higher than the brightness
extension range with 1/4 compression.
Reject Display echoes that are lower than the set level at minimum brightness.

Table 6-1: Illustrations

A: Minimum brightness, B: Set position at Post Processing Low, C: Set position at Post Processing High, D:
Maximum brightness. The range between B and C indicates the brightness extension range.
Linear Slope1 Slope2 Slope3 Reject

A D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B D
D D D D D
C C C

B B B B
A A A A A

6-3-5-42 Post Process High (Post Processing High)

0 to 63 Sets the maximum brightness of the brightness extension range inSlope1, Slope 2, and
Slope 3 as set in Post Processing, in increments of 1 step.

6-3-5-43 Post Process Low (Post Processing Low)

0 to 63 Sets the minimum brightness of the brightness extension range inSlope1, Slope 2, and
Slope 3, Reject as set in Post Processing, in increments of 1 step.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-47

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-5-44 Power Limit Override

This instrument limits transmission power in accordance with IEC 60601-2-37 Ed. 2 (2007)
when it is used for fetal observation or at the initial startup after being shipped from a factory.
Power Limit Override temporarily overrides the acoustic output restrictions set for fetal
observation.
Temporarily overrides the restrictions when the type of examination (Application) is one of the
followings:

• General
• OBST
• OBST-TV
• Fetal Heart
• Fetal Brain
• Placenta

Off Limits the transmission power for fetal observation.

On Overrides restrictions on transmission power for fetal observation.

The DVA value on the monitor is the previous upper limit value and is displayed with
white on black. Transmission power can be increased by adjusting it with Acoustic Power
in the touch panel menu.
However, this function is automatically canceled when the NEW PATIENT switch is
pressed.

Scan only for the minimum length of time necessary for the diagnosis at the lowest suitable
output.
There may be influences on the fetal growth.

6-3-5-45 Print Area

When the image is printed with a digital printer, sets the size of the image.

Auto Automatically sets the size of an image according to the display format and the
measurement result.
Full Always prints a full screen.
Small Enlarges and prints only the image, not the measurement results position.

6-48 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-5-46 Print Queue

Displays a dialog box for selecting whether to print, not to print or to cancel when there is a
queued print job.
When printing multiple images on one sheet of paper (N-Up setting is 2 or above), printing is
queued without starting if the images do not fit on one sheet of paper. Select this function if you
want to forcibly print in this condition.

6-3-5-47 R Wave Beep

Sets the beep sound by synchronizing the ECG R-wave.

Off Turns off the beep sound when the R-wave is detected.

On Plays the beep sound when the R-wave is detected.

6-3-5-48 R-Delay Time

Sets the delay time from the R-wave of the ECG Sync image.

0.00 to 2.55 The time is set in increments of 0.01 seconds.

6-3-5-49 Steering Link

Displays the inverted D mode in this setting when the polarity of the steering angle is changed
by Beam Steer (D).

Off Does not invert a D mode image even when the polarity changes due to the change of the
beam steering angle of a linear probe.
On Inverts a D mode image when the polarity changes due to the change of beam the steering
angle of a linear probe.

6-3-5-50 Store Media

Sets the image storage destination when STORE is pressed.

HDD Stores the image in the hard disk of the instrument.

USB Stores the image in the USB Flash memory.

CD-R Buffer Stores the image in the CD-R buffer of the instrument.

DVD Stores the image in the DVD media.

NET(DICOM) Transmits a single image in DICOM format to the network server.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-49

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-5-51 Thermal Index

Selects the type of acoustic power index (TI) to be displayed on the screen.

TIS Displays the thermal index for soft tissue.

TIB Displays the thermal index for bones.

TIC Displays the thermal index for the cranial bones.

6-3-5-52 Thumbnail Display

Sets the thumbnail area display.

Off The thumbnail is not displayed.

On The thumbnail is displayed.

6-3-5-53 Thumbnail Page

Switches pages displayed in the thumbnail area.

6-3-5-54 Time Cycle

1 to 16 Sets the time for storing moving images in increments of 1 second.

This function can be applied when the Acquire Mode is set to Pre Time or Post Time.

6-3-5-55 Video Clip Auto Stop

Off Saves moving images as video clips, and keeps displaying them in real time.
On Saves moving images as video clips, and stores the same image segment as Line data.
The image freezes after being saved.

Related links:
Storing in Video Clip format and storing the same range as Line data → p.5-16

6-50 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-5-56 View Gamma

Corrects the brightness characteristics of the image to match the brightness characteristics of the
observation monitor or enables the information for diagnostic regions to be expressed
effectively.

Linear Does not change brightness characteristics.

A to D Selects from curve

A to D which have different brightness characteristics.

6-3-5-57 Zoom Lock

Displays the B mode image in enlarged form, centering around a Doppler sample while the
image is zoomed.

Off Zooms an image regardless of the display position of the sample volume.

On Zooms an image with the display position of the sample volume as the center.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-51

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-6 D.S.D (Dynamic Slow Motion Display) Mode Menu

6-3-6-1 DSD (ECG) (Dynamic Slow Motion Display (ECG))

This mode provides slow-motion display, synchronized to the ECG R-wave.

Off Finishes the D.S.D. (ECG) mode.

On Starts the D.S.D. (ECG) mode.

6-3-6-2 DSD (Memory) (Dynamic Slow Motion Display (Memory))

This mode provides slow-motion display of image data stored in memory (frame rate).

Off Finishes the D.S.D. (Memory) mode.

On Starts the D.S.D. (Memory) mode.

6-3-6-3 DSD Memory Size (Dynamic Slow Motion Display Memory Size)

Set the memory size for D.S.D (Memory) mode to change the refresh interval.

1 to 10 Sets the memory size in increments of 1 step.

6-3-6-4 DSD Refresh (Dynamic Slow Motion Display Refresh)

Refreshes the slow-motion image without changing setting values.

6-52 MN1-5855 rev.1

 6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-6-5 DSD Speed (Dynamic Slow Motion Display Speed)

Changes the playback speed for slow-motion images.

1/1 Plays in slow motion at the same speed as real time.

The image is refreshed at each R wave interval.
1/2 Plays in slow motion at half the speed of real time.
The image is refreshed at every second R wave interval.
1/3 Plays in slow motion at one third the speed of real time.
The image is refreshed at every third R wave interval.
1/4 Plays in slow motion at one quarter the speed of real time.
The image is refreshed at every fourth R wave interval.
1/10 Plays in slow motion at one tenth the speed of real time.
The image is refreshed at every tenth R wave interval.

MN1-5855 rev.1 6-53

6 Custom Switch Menu
6-3 Function menu area

6-3-7 Short Cut Menu

Displays the specified menu page.

Menu Name Function

Image Func B1 to Image Func B5 Switches the mode menu from B1 to B5.

Image Func M1 to Image Func M5 Switches the mode menu from M1 to M5.
Image Func D1 to Image Func D5 Switches the mode menu from D1 to D5.

Image Func F1 to Image Func F5 Switches the mode menu from Flow1 to Flow5.

Image Func Other1 to Switches the mode menu from Other1 to Other5.
Image Func Other5
Image Func RT3D1 to Image Func Switches the mode menu from RT3D1 to RT3D5.
RT3D5

The selectable menu varies depending on the screen display mode and preset (Preset Set-Up
Menu > Menu-Function).

Fig. 6-1: Menu display example in B mode

Image Func B2 Displays the mode menu for Image Func B2.

Image Func Other1 Displays the mode menu for Image Func Other1.
Image Func M1 In this example, the mode menu cannot be switched to the M mode.

Image Func B5 The mode menu cannot be switched to the B5 mode as it is not set to Image
Func B5.

Menu-Function → p.7-69

6-54 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset

7 Preset

The preset function can store set conditions and recall them as necessary. By using preset
settings, you can make adjustment and configuration of the instrument by simple procedures,
thus reducing the examination time.
The set values can be switched over according to the purpose of use, diagnostic region and
differences between individual operators, or conversely can be unified. Storing settings on the
instrument saves time that would be required for setting complex conditions, and can avoid
errors when making such settings.
This instrument has a total of 45 user-definable settings for image quality adjustment and
display modes. With Common Preset, users can set common items to each preset by one batch
operation.
This instrument has standard settings that are suitable for various diagnostic fields. These
settings consist of the abdominal region, the obstetrical applications, the gynecological
applications, the cardiac region, the peripheral vessels, the superficial organs, the urethral
organs, and other regions. The instrument is set at the factory so that when it is switched on for
the first time, the General preset is activated.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-1

7 Preset
7-1 Changing the settings

7-1 Changing the settings

Select the preset by the following procedures to change the settings.

1. Select Preset key.

→ The Preset menu is displayed.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.

Name List

3. Select Preset from the Name list.

When the preset you want to select is not displayed
Select Next or Prev to switch Name list page.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu for the selected preset will be displayed.

7-2 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-1 Changing the settings

4. Select the menu which you want to change the setting from the Tree View shown on the
left.
5. Change the item settings.
Changing the settings
There are three methods for changing the item settings: pull-down list, text box and button.
• Pull-down list
Using the track ball, select in the pull-down list and select the item you want to change.
• Text box
Enter directly from the keyboard.
It may be possible to directly enter in the pull-down list.
• Button
Select the button you want to change.
There are two types of buttons: the On/Off toggle button and the button that immediately
initializes the system when pressed.
Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-3

7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2 Common Preset

This preset sets the items that all presets share.

It consists of the following presets:

Common1 Sets item (1) that all presets share

Common2 Sets item (2) that all presets share

Common3 LCD/Panel Setup; sets a combination of the brightness of LCD monitor and
operation panel LED

Print (Freeze) Sets the output destination of the still image after freezing

Print (Real time) Sets the output destination of the still image displayed in real-time

Print Select Sets the output size and format in Archive Group and connected printer

DICOM-Store, Send Storage and transfer of DICOM images and network setup.

DICOM-Server Setting the Network Server.

DICOM-Address Sets the name and address of the department that uses this instrument

DICOM-Printer Network setting for the DICOM printer (network printer)

DICOM-SR Network setting for the DICOM SR server

IHE/Auto Delete Network setting of the MPPS server and Storage Commitment server

7-4 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-1 Common1

This preset sets the items that all presets share.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.

3. Select Common Preset.

→ The Common1 screen is displayed.

4. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
5. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-5

7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-1-1 Common1 setting items

Item Setting Function

Hospital Name 20 characters Sets the hospital name.
× 2 lines
Date Sets the date.

Time Sets the time.

Unit (Height) cm Sets the unit of height on the ID input screen.

m
feet/inch
Unit (Weight) kg Sets the unit of weight on the ID input screen.
pound
Date Format 'YY/MM/DD Sets the display format for Date of birth in the ID input screen.
MMM.DD,YY
MM.DD,'YY
DD-MMM-YY
DD-MM-'YY
Resume Off Starts up with a specified preset default at startup.
On Resumes the state when the power was shut down last time at
startup.
Timer Freeze Off Turns Off automatic freeze of a safety function.

On Automatically freezes a safety function.

Freeze automatically unless it is operated before the set time.
Timer Freeze, 1 to 20 Sets the time before automatic freeze in increments of 1 minute,
Time if Timer Freeze is set to on.

Direct to B Immediate Returns to the black-and-white 1B mode when the B button is

pressed.
0.3sec Sets the hold-down time of the B button to return to the
0.5sec black-and-white 1B mode.
Off Turns off the hold-down function of B button.
Direct Send 0.5 to 2.0 Sets the hold-down time of ENTER key. The time is set in
increments of 0.5 seconds.
Direct 0.5 Sets the hold-down time of (D, F and Print) keys that can be set
D/Flow/Print 0.75 in Custom SW2.
1.0
1.5
Screen Saver Off Sets the screen saver display.
On

7-6 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

Item Setting Function

Screen Saver All Season Sets the Screen Saver.
Display Type HANABI
(When Screen Fallen Leaves
Saver is set toOn) Snow
Ribbon
Hospital Name
Power Saving
T.B. Speed -5 to 5 Sets the reaction rate of the trackball.

JPEG Q Factor 50 to 99 Sets the compressibility of an image when Syntax is set to

JPEG. The smaller the value, the higher the compressibility.
Hum Filter 50Hz In conformity with the commercial alternating current
60Hz frequency of the power supply in use, a filter value is set.
Frequency Transmit Displays the transmission frequency in harmonic
Information transmission/reception mode.
Receive Displays the reception frequency in harmonic
transmission/reception mode.
Contrast / Contrast The contrast setting level is displayed in the range C1 to C23.
Dynamic Range Dynamic Range The contrast setting level is displayed in the range D36 to D96.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-7

7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-2 Common2

The preset sets the items that all presets share.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. Select Common Preset.
4. Select Common2 from the Tree View.
→ The Common2 screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-2-2-1 Common2 setting items

Item Setting Function

Recorder Select BD-X201 Sets the DVD Recorder.
DVO-1000MD
DVD Remain Off Sets the display of remaining capacity of the DVD Recorder
On media.

Sound Select Off Sets the sound of operation panel switches.

(Panel) A
B
C

7-8 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

Item Setting Function

Sound Select Off Sets the sound of PRINT switch.
(Archive) A
B
C
Video Output NTSC Sets the I/O signal of the analog video.
Type PAL
Menu Color A Sets the operation sound of the Function menu.
Select B
C
CV
Alarm Off Sets the message display sound (beep sound).
On
Auto Select Off Turns Off selecting all images when displaying the Image
(Review) Viewer or Search Results View.
On Selects all images when displaying the Image Viewer or Search
Results View.
Auto Input Off Hides the ID information when displaying the search screen in
(Review) Review.
On Shows the ID information when displaying the search screen in
Review.
DICOM File Line Saves a Line moving image in the same Line format when it is
Type saved as a DICOM file in Review.
Image Converts and saves a Line moving image to Multi Image format
when it is saved as a DICOM file in Review.
Compression 30 to 100 The image compression rate is set when a Line moving image is
Quality (10% Step) converted to Multi Image or AVI. The smaller the value, the
higher the compressibility.
AVI CODEC MPEG4 Sets the codec for saving AVI.
MJPEG

Annotation Dictionary

Makes settings for the system dictionaries, Dictionary 1(Dic1) to Dictionary 6 (Dic6).

Item Setting Function

Learning Off Displays in the order of user registration and the system
Function dictionary.
On Displays words in the order from the most recently selected
word.
System Not Use Sets the system dictionary to not be used.
Dictionary Use Sets the system dictionary to be used.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-9

7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-3 Common3

This preset sets three types of combinations (Type A, Type B, Type C) of the brightness of LCD
monitor, operation panel LED on LCD/Panel Setup screen.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. Select Common Preset.
4. Select Common3 from the Tree View.
→ The Common3 screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-10 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-3-1 Common3 setting items

Item Setting Function

Monitor Brightness 0 to 20 Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor.

Monitor Contrast 0 to 20 Sets the contrast of the LCD monitor.

Monitor BackLight 0 to 20 Sets the backlight intensity of the LCD monitor.

Panel LED Low Adjusting the brightness of the operation panel switch.
Brightness Medium Keyboard (except function keys assigned a function) is
High auto-photo chromatic.
Auto (Low) Sets the brightness of operation panel switches to
Auto (Med) auto-photo chromatic.
Auto (High)
Auto (Saving)

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-11

7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-4 Print (Freeze)

This preset sets the output method after freezing.

You can set up to three output methods for one Archive Group. If you press the PRINT key on
the operation panel after freezing, it outputs conforming to the setting of the Archive Group
assigned to the key.
Method for assigning to the operation panel switches: Custom SW → p.7-70

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. Select Common Preset.
4. Select Print (Freeze) from the Tree View.
→ The Print (Freeze) screen is displayed.

5. Select the output method.

Not assigning the method
Unless a selection is made, the output method is not assigned.
Invalid output method combination
When Print (Auto) is selected, it cannot be combined with Print (B&W) and Print (Color).
Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

Related links:
Custom SW → p.7-70

7-12 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-5 Print (RealTime)

This preset sets the output method during the real-time display mode.

You can set up to three output methods for one Archive Group. If you press the PRINT key on
the operation panel, it outputs conforming to the setting of the Archive Group assigned to the
key.
Method for assigning to the operation panel switches: Custom SW → p.7-70

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. Select Common Preset.
4. Select Print (RealTime) from the Tree View.
→ The Print (RealTime) screen is displayed.

5. Select the output method.

Not assigning the method
Unless a selection is made, the output method is not assigned.
Invalid output method combination
When Print (Auto) is selected, it cannot be combined with Print (B&W) or Print (Color).
Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-13

7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-6 Print Select

Sets the output size and format in Archive Group and connected printer.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. Select Common Preset.
4. Select Print Select from the Tree View.
→ The Print Select screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed setting and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-14 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-6-1 Print Select setting items

Item Setting Function

USB DICOM Sets the storage format of Store USB in the Archive Group.
JPEG Baseline
BMP
TIFF
CD-R DICOM Sets the storage format of Store on CD-R Buffer in the Archive
JPEG Baseline Group.
BMP
TIFF
DVD DICOM Sets the storage format of Store on DVD in the Archive Group.
JPEG Baseline
BMP
TIFF
Print Area Small Sets the size of the image to Small when the image is printed
with a digital printer.
This applies to ultrasonic image display area.
Full Sets the size of the image to Full when the image is printed with
a digital printer.
This applies to thumbnail display area and display area other
than function menu display area.
Auto Sets the size of the image to Auto when the image is printed
with a digital printer.
Printer Select SSZ-D310 Sets the black-and-white printer.
(B/W) UP-D897
P95D
Printer Select SSZ-D710 Sets the color printer.
(Color) UP-D25MD
CP30D
Number of Print 1 to 3 Sets the number of continuous prints with a digital
black-and-white printer.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-15

7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-7 DICOM-Store, Send

This preset sets the network settings and the storage and transfer settings of DICOM images. It
can also check network communications.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. Select Common Preset.
4. Select DICOM-Store, Send from the Tree View.
→ The DICOM-Store, Send screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

NOTE: If the IT network has been changed, it may be open to new and unacceptable risk, so
additional risk management is required. Refer to the separate “Safety Instruction”.

7-16 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-7-1 DICOM-Store, Send setting items

Item Setting Function

Private Tag None Sets the DICOM data only.

Put into File. Sets the addition of private tag to DICOM data when saving to
USB Flash memory.
Put into Sets the addition of private tag to DICOM data when saving to
Network. server.

Put into Both. Sets the addition of private tag to DICOM data when saving to
USB Flash memory or server.
Put into File + Sets the addition of private tag to DICOM data and DICOMDIR
DICOMDIR. when saving to USB Flash memory.
Put into All. Sets the addition of private tag to DICOM data and DICOMDIR
when saving to USB Flash memory or server.
Store on Disk Palette Color Sets the storage format of a color image when it is saved in a disk.
Color RGB

Store on Disk Implicit Little Sets a transfer syntax when an image is saved in a disk.
Syntax Explicit Little
RLE Lossless
JPEG Baseline
Send to Storage Not Send Excludes a Line moving image when sending an image to a server
Line Data in Review.
Send Includes a Line moving image when sending an image to a server
in Review.
Use this setting when sending to a server capable of receiving a
Line moving image.
Send to Storage Palette Color Sets the storage format when sending a color image via a network.
Color RGB
Monochrome 2
Send to Storage 50 to 99 Sets the compressibility of an image when Syntax is set to JEPEG.
JPEG Q Factor The smaller the value, the higher the compressibility.

Send to Storage 0 to 255 To transmit DICOM images when the storage method is
Window Center (Key input) Monochrome2, sets Window Center (0028, 1050) as the
DICOM Tag.
Send to Storage 1 to 256 To transmit DICOM images when the storage method is
Window Center (Key input) Monochrome2, sets Window Center (0028, 1051) as the
DICOM Tag.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-17

7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-7-2 Set the IP address for this instrument

1.

2.

1. On the preset (Common Preset > DICOM Store, Send), enter Appl. Entity, Station
Name, Port#.
2. Select IP Address type of the this instrument.
When auto-loading IP address from the DHCP server.
Select Obtain IP address a DHCP server.
When using fixed IP address.

a Select Use the following IP address.

b Enter the IP Address, Router1, Router2, Subnet Mask of this instrument.

Setting items

Item Setting Function

Appl. Entity Key input Sets the program name of this instrument.

Station Name Key input Sets the computer name of this instrument.

Port# Key input Sets the TCP/IP port number used by this instrument.
The DICOM standard setting is 104.
Local Ping Inspects whether TCP/IP of this instrument is operated properly.

IP Address Key input Sets the network address of this instrument.

Router1 Key input Sets the TCP/IP router address.

Router2 Key input When a router is not used, it is left blank.

Subnet Mask Key input Enter the TCP/IP network mask.

7-18 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-7-3 Checking the TCP/IP of this instrument

Inspects whether TCP/IP of this instrument unit is possessed and operated normally.

● Select Local Ping on the DICOM-Store, Send preset.

→ The message is displayed and TCP/IP inspects of this instrument is started.
A message is displayed when the inspect is completed.

Message Examination results

Ping check to Shows the TCP/IP is operated.
********.*******
successful
Ping check to Shows that TC/IP failed to operate.
********.******* Contact your system administrator (IT personnel) for the
failed hospital network.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-19

7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-8 DICOM-Server

Makes settings for the DICOM-Server and Worklist.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. Select Common Preset.
4. Select DICOM-Server from the Tree View.
→ The DICOM-Server screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset settings selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed setting and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-20 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-8-1 Enter the network setup

1.

2.

3.
4.

1. Enter the network setup on the DICOM-Server preset.

a Enter the key in the Appl. Entity.
b Enter the key in the Station Name.
c Enter the key in the IP Address.
d Enter the key in the Port#.
e Enter the setup in the required number of network servers.

2. If necessary, sets the Worklist.

When Worklist and image save service have a independent Appl. Entity.
Enter the key of the network setup in the Worklist.
When one Appl. Entity. covers both the Worklist and the image save service.
Blank the Worklist.
3. Set the destination network server.
When Worklist and image save service have a independent Appl. Entity.
Select one of the network server 1 to network server 5, and select Worklist.
When one Appl. Entity. covers both the Worklist and the image save service.
Select one of the network server 1 to network server 5.
4. Select the time-out of communication from Time Out.

Setting items

Item Setting Function

Appl. Entity Key input Sets the program name of the network server.

Station Name Key input Sets the computer name of the network server.

IP Address Key input Sets the network address of the network server.

Port# Key input Sets the TCP/IP port number used by network server.
The DICOM standard setting is 104.
Time Out 1 to 1000 Sets the time-out of communication in increments of second.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-21

7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-8-2 Checking the TCP/IP of the network server

Inspects whether TCP/IP of the network server is operated properly.

To perform this inspection, Appl. Entity, Station Name and IP Address need to be set for the
selected network server.

2.

1.

1. For the network server except Worklist, select the network server from Test on the
DICOM-Server preset.
2. For servers other than the Worklist, select the Remote Ping. When the Worklist server,
select Worklist Ping.
→ The message is displayed and TCP/IP inspects of the DICOM Printer is started.
A message is displayed when the inspect is complete.

Message Examination results

Ping check to Shows the TCP/IP is operated.
******** . *******
successful
Ping check to Shows that TCP/IP failed to operate.
******** . ******* Contact your system administrator (IT personnel) for the
failed hospital network.

7-22 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-8-3 Checking the C-Echo of the network server

Inspects whether the functions corresponding to the DICOM of the network server are
possessed and started properly.
To perform this inspection, Appl. Entity, Station Name, and IP Address need to be set for the
selected network server.all input.

2.

1.

1. For the network server except Worklist, select the network server from Test on the
DICOM-Server preset.
2. For servers other than the Worklist, select the Remote C-Echo. When the Worklist
server, select Worklist C-Echo.
→ The message is displayed and TCP/IP inspects of this instrument is started.
A message is displayed when the inspect is complete.

Message Examination results

Echo check to Shows the functions corresponding to the DICOM is
******** . ******* operated.
successful
Echo check to Shows the functions corresponding to the DICOM failed to
******** . ******* operate.
failed Contact your system administrator (IT personnel) for the
hospital network.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-23

7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-9 DICOM-Address

This preset sets the name and address of the department that uses this instrument.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. Select Common Preset.
4. Select DICOM-Address from the Tree View.
→ The DICOM-Address screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-2-9-1 DICOM-Address setting items

Item Setting Function

Department Key input Sets the department name of the hospital.

Address Key input Sets the address of the hospital.

7-24 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-10 DICOM-Printer

This preset makes settings for the DICOM printer (network printer).

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. Select Common Preset.
4. Select DICOM-Printer from the Tree View.
→ The DICOM-Printer screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-25

7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-10-1 Enter the network setup

1.

2.

1. Enter the network server setup on the DICOM-Printer preset.

a Enter the key in the Appl. Entity.
b Enter the key in the Station Name.
c Enter the key in the IP Address.
d Enter the key in the Port#.
e Enter the setup in the required number of network servers.

2. Sets the destination network server from 1 to 5.

Setting items

Item Setting Function

Model Name NP-1600/1660 Sets the printer name.
FUJIFILM
KONICA
GENERAL
Appl. Entity Key input Sets the program name of the network server.

Station Name Key input Sets the computer name of the network server.

IP Address Key input Sets the network address of the network server.

Port# Key input Sets the TCP/IP port number used by the network server.
The DICOM standard setting is 104.

7-26 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-10-2 Checking the TCP/IP of the network server

Inspects whether TCP/IP of the network server is operated properly.

To perform this inspection, Appl. Entity, Station Name and IP Address need to be set for the
selected network server.

1. Select the network server from 1 to 5 on the DICOM-Printer preset.

2. Select Ping.
→ The message is displayed and TCP/IP inspects of the DICOM Printer is started.
A message is displayed when the inspect is complete.

Message Examination results

Ping check to Shows the TCP/IP is operated.
******** . *******
successful
Ping check to Shows that TC/IP failed to operate.
******** . ******* Contact your system administrator (IT personnel) for the
failed hospital network.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-27

7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-10-3 Checking the C-Echo of the network server

Inspects whether the functions corresponding to the DICOM of the network server are
possessed and started properly.
To perform this inspection, Appl. Entity, Station Name, and IP Address need to be set for the
selected network server.all input.

1. Select the network server from Remote1 to Remote5 on the DICOM-Printer preset.
2. Select C-Echo.
→ The message is displayed and TCP/IP inspects of the DICOM Printer is started.
A message is displayed when the inspect is complete.

Message Examination results

Echo check to Shows the functions corresponding to the DICOM is
******** . ******* operated.
successful
Echo check to Shows the functions corresponding to the DICOM failed to
******** . ******* operate.
failed Contact your system administrator (IT personnel) for the
hospital network.

7-28 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-11 DICOM-SR

This preset sets the items related to the DICOM SR server.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. Select Common Preset.
4. Select DICOM-SR from the Tree View.
→ The DICOM-SR screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-29

7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-11-1 DICOM-SR setting items

Item Setting Function

SR Auto Off Sets not to generate a DICOM SR file after completing an
Creation examination even if the NEW PATIENT is pressed.
On Generates a DICOM SR file and sends it to the server when the
NEW PATIENT is pressed after completing an examination.
Ping Inspects whether TCP/IP of the selected DICOM SR server with
the specified No. is properly connected to the network.
To perform this inspection, all items for the selected DICOM
SR server with the specified No. (Model name, Appl. Entity,
Station Name, IP Address) need to be set. After starting the
inspection, follow the instruction of the dialog box.
C-ECHO Inspects whether the functions corresponding to the DICOM SR
of the selected DICOM SR server with the specified No.
possessed and started properly.
To perform this inspection, all items for the selected DICOM
SR server with the specified No. (Model name, Appl. Entity,
Station Name, IP Address) need to be set. After starting the
inspection, follow the instruction of the dialog box.
Connect Remote 1 Sets the DICOM SR server.
Remote 2
Appl. Entity Key input Sets the program name of the DICOM SR server.

Station Name Key input Sets the DICOM SR server computer name.

IP Address Key input Sets the network address number assigned to the DICOM SR
server by keyboard input.
Port# Key input Sets the TCP/IP port number used by the DICOM SR server by
keyboard input.

7-30 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-12 IHE/Auto Delete

This preset makes network settings for the MPPS server and the Storage Commitment server.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. Select Common Preset.
4. Select IHE/Auto Delete from the Tree View.
→ The IHE/Auto Delete screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-31

7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

7-2-12-1 IHE/Auto Delete setting items

The IHE/Auto Delete setting items consist of settings for the MPPS server and the Storage
Commitment server and settings for Auto Delete.

Item Setting Function

Retries 0 Sets the system to display an error without resending a request
to the Storage Commitment server when the server does not
respond.
1 to 99 Sets the number of requests the system resend to the Storage
Commitment server when there is no response from it. Sets the
system to display an error after the set number of resend
requests.
Unlimited Sets the system to resend a request to the Storage Commitment
server until there is response from it.
Retry Interval 1 to 60 Sets the interval for resending a request to the Storage
Commitment server.
Power On Sets the system to resend a request to the Storage Commitment
server only when the instrument is switched on.
min Sets the unit of Retry Interval to minutes.

H Sets the unit of Retry Interval to hours.

Transaction 1 to 60 Sets the wait time for receiving a reply from the Storage
Limit Commitment server (time before resending a request) after
sending an image to the server.
Unlimited Sets the system to not resend a request to the Storage
Commitment server after sending an image to the server until
there is a response from it.
H Sets the unit of Transaction Limit to hours.

D Sets the unit of Transaction Limit to days.

W Sets the unit of Transaction Limit to weeks.

Holding Time 0 to 60 Sets the storage time in the instrument of images saved on the
Local HDD and Local HDD images saved on external media or
sent to a server.
It manages the storage time with the time and date of saving an
image in Local HDD as 0.
D Sets the unit of the storage time in the device to days.

W Sets the unit of the storage time in the device to weeks.

M Sets the unit of the storage time in the device to months.

7-32 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

Table 7-1: MPPS Server

Item Setting Function
Ping Inspects whether TCP/IP of the selected MPPS server with the
specified No. is properly connected to the network.
To perform this inspection, Appl. Entity, Station Name, IP
Address need to be set for the selected MPPS server.
C-ECHO Inspects whether the functions corresponding to the MPPS of
the MPPS server with the selected No. is possessed and started
properly.
To perform this inspection, Appl. Entity, Station Name, IP
Address need to be set for the selected MPPS server.
Connect Remote 1 Sets the MPPS server of the storage destination.
Remote 2
Appl. Entity Key input Sets the program name of the MPPS server.

Station Name Key input Sets the MPPS server computer name.

IP Address Key input Sets the network address of the MPPS server.

Port# Key input Sets the TCP/IP port number used by the MPPS server by
keyboard input.

Table 7-2: Storage Commitment

Item Setting Function
Ping Inspects whether TCP/IP of the selected Storage Commitment
server with the specified No. is properly connected to the
network.
To perform this inspection, Appl. Entity, Station Name, IP
Address need to be set for the selected Storage Commitment
server.
C-ECHO Inspects whether the functions corresponding to the MPPS of
the Storage Commitment server with the selected No. is
possessed and started properly.
To perform this inspection, Appl. Entity, Station Name, IP
Address need to be set for the selected Storage Commitment
server.
Connect Remote 1 Sets the Storage Commitment server.
Remote 2
Appl. Entity Key input Sets the program name of the Storage Commitment server.

Station Name Key input Sets the computer name of the Storage Commitment server.

IP Address Key input Sets the network address of the Storage Commitment server.

Port# Key input Sets the TCP/IP port number used by the Storage Commitment
server by keyboard input.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-33

7 Preset
7-2 Common Preset

Table 7-3: Automatic image deletion settings

Auto Image Delete is a setting that automatically deletes images saved on local HDD and local HDD images saved on
external media or sent to a server after the set period of time has elapsed.
Item Setting Function
Auto Image Storage Automatically deletes the images saved on the local HDD (blue
Delete Commitment icon) which have passed the set period of the Holding Time
after receiving Commitment.
These images are deleted the first time the instrument is
switched on after the set period of the Holding Time has
elapsed.
Time Automatically deletes the images specified by Delete Object
among the images saved on local HDD that have passed the set
period of the Holding Time.
These images are deleted the first time the instrument is
switched on after the set period of the Holding Time has
elapsed.
Off Turns Off automatic deletion of saved images.

Delete Object All Images Sets all the images saved on Local HDD to be automatically
deleted.
Copied or Sent Sets the Local HDD images saved on external media or sent to a
Images server (light blue, orange and blue icons) to be automatically
deleted.

7-34 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-3 Preset Control

7-3 Preset Control

This function copies the data set for each Preset No. (settings related to images and
measurement) and copies them to external media. In addition to the Preset No. data, data for
Annotation Dictionary, Body Mark Library, Common Preset, Color Map, Color Map (B/M/D)
and Measurement can be also copied.
When copying data between the USB Flash memory and the instrument, you need to connect
the USB Flash memory to the instrument.

7-3-1 Changing the sequence of preset items

You can change the sequence of items in Preset No. only.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. Select Preset Control.
→ The Preset Control screen is displayed.

4.

5. 6.

7.

8.

4. Select the relevant setting data from the pull-down list.

5. Select Move.
6. Select the data to move from the list on the left side of the arrow.
7. Select the number of the movement destination from the list on the right side of the
arrow.
8. Select the arrow.
→ The order of the Preset No. list is changed.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-35

7 Preset
7-3 Preset Control

7-3-2 Copying a selected preset

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. Select Preset Control.
→ The following screen is displayed.
4.

5.
8.

6. 9.

10.
7.

4. Select the relevant setting data from the pull-down list.

5. Select Copy.
6. Select the copying method.
• US to US: Copies data inside the instrument. (Preset No. only)
The preset data is displayed in the copy source list (list on the left of the arrow).
• Copy to Media: Copies data from the instrument to the media specified with Media Type.
(Excluding Body Mark)
• Copy from Media: Copies data from the media specified with Media Type to the
instrument.

7. (When Copy to Media or Copy from Media is selected) Select Media Type.
• USB: Sets Media to USB flash memory.
• CD-R: Sets Media to CD-R Buffer.
• DVD: Sets Media to DVD.

8. Select the preset name to copy from the copy source list (the list on the left side of the
arrow).
9. Select the preset name to paste to from the paste to list (the list on the right side of the
arrow).
10. Select Arrow.
→ The message ”In progress. Please wait.” is displayed and copying starts.

7-36 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-3 Preset Control

NOTE: Do not remove the USB flash memory while the message is displayed.

When copying is completed, the copied preset is displayed in the copy list (list on the right
of the arrow).

7-3-3 Copying all preset data

You can copy all preset data, other the Body Mark Library, to USB flash memory in a batch.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. Select Preset Control.
→ The following screen is displayed.
5.

4. Connect the USB flash memory to the instrument.

5. Select Export All Data.
→ The message ”In progress. Please wait.” is displayed and copying starts.
NOTE: Do not remove the USB flash memory while the message is displayed.

When copying is completed, the copied preset is displayed in the copy list (list on the right
of the arrow).

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-37

7 Preset
7-4 User Admin

7-4 User Admin

This function registers new users and deletes registered users. It also sets access level per user.
Only Level 1 users have the access to user management.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. Select User Admin.
→ A login dialog box is displayed.

4. Log in.
a Enter User name and Password.
b Select OK.

→ The User Authentication screen is displayed.

5. Register or delete the user or set the access level.

6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Reference:
User authentication → p.1-24

7-38 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-4 User Admin

7-4-1 Setting users authentication

Set whether to perform user authentication at the start-up or after the user has logged off.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. In the Preset selection screen, select User Admin.
4. Enter User name and Password on the User authentication (login screen).
5. Select OK.
→ The User Admin (User Management) screen is displayed when the access is granted.

6. Set whether to set the user authentication from the User Authentication list.
• On
Enables users authentication. The login screen is displayed at the start-up or after the user
has logged off.
• Off
Disables users authentication. The login screen is not displayed. All operations are enabled.
User Admin in the preset is only available to the Level 1 user.

→ Once the setting has been completed, the new setting becomes effective from next start-up.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-39

7 Preset
7-4 User Admin

7-4-2 Registering new user

1. Go to User Admin in the Preset.

a Select Preset key.
b Select Set-Up.
c In the Preset selection screen, select User Admin.
d Enter User name and Password on the User authentication (login screen).
e Select OK.
→ The User Admin (User Management) screen is displayed when the access is granted.

2. Select Add user.

→ The Add new user dialog box is displayed.

3. Enter new user name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters) into User name.
4. Select Access right to be set.
5. Select OK.
→ The user is newly registered and the display returns to the User Admin screen.
If you selected Cancel, the display returns to the User Admin screen without registering
any change.

7-40 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-4 User Admin

7-4-3 Deleting registered user

NOTE: No user can be deleted while he/she is logged in.

1. Go to User Admin in the Preset.

a Select Preset key.
b Select Set-Up.
c In the Preset selection screen, select User Admin.
d Enter User name and Password on the User authentication (login screen).
e Select OK.

→ The User Admin (User Management) screen is displayed when the access is granted.

2. Select the target user.

3. Select Delete user.
→ A message such as ”Are you sure you want to delete the
selected user name?” is displayed.
4. Select Yes.
→ The user is deleted and the display returns to the user management screen.
If you selected Cancel, the display returns to the User Admin screen without registering
any change.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-41

7 Preset
7-4 User Admin

7-4-4 Changing user’s access level

1. Go to User Admin in the Preset.

a Select Preset key.
b Select Set-Up.
c In the Preset selection screen, select User Admin.
d Enter User name and Password on the User authentication (login screen).
e Select OK.

→ The User Admin (User Management) screen is displayed when the access is granted.

2. Select the target user.

3. Select Access control.
→ The Edit the access right dialog box is displayed.

4. Select the user level to be changed.

5. Select OK.
→ The user’s access level is now changed and the display returns to the User Admin screen.
If you selected Cancel, the display returns to the User Admin screen without registering
any change.

7-42 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-4 User Admin

7-4-5 Outputting user list

Outputs a list of the currently-registered user names and each access level to a CSV file to save
it on a designated media.

Connect a USB Flash memory to the USB port.

1. Go to User Admin in the Preset.

a Select Preset key.
b Select Set-Up.
c In the Preset selection screen, move the cursor to User Admin.
d Enter User name and Password on the User authentication (login screen).
e Select OK.
→ The User Admin (User Management) screen is displayed when the access is granted.

2. Select User List.

→ A list of the currently-registered user names and each access level is generated in a CSV
file and saved into the USB Flash memory.
If the USB Flash memory contains a file that has the same name as the one that was just
generated, the previously saved file will be overwritten with new information.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-43

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

The Preset Set-Up Menu consists of presets that can be set for each application.

Preset Set-Up Registers the preset name, application, measurement study and other items
Menu related to the selected Preset No.
Display1 Makes settings for the screen display.
Display2 Makes settings for the screen display.
DISP-B, M Makes settings for the display of the B mode and M mode images.
DISP-D, Flow Makes settings for the display of the D, Flow mode images.
ID, Comment Makes settings for entering patient information and comments.
Graphics Sets the graphics on the screen.
Store, Cine Makes settings for saving images.
Body Mark Sets the body mark display on the screen and the body mark menu.
Menu-Function Sets the menu area in the Function menu.
Custom SW Sets the functions to be assigned to the operation panel switches.
Custom SW2 Sets the functions to be assigned to the operation panel switches.
Custom-Foot Sets the functions to be assigned to the optional foot switch.
Custom-Keyboard Sets the functions to be assigned to the function keys and other keys for the
keyboard.
Physio Makes settings for displaying physiological signals.
Image-B, M1 Sets the image adjustment items for B, M images.
Image-B, M2 Sets the image adjustment items for B, M images.
Focus Sets the image adjustment items for Focus.
Post Processing Sets the image adjustment items for Post Processing.
Doppler1 Makes settings for the display of the Doppler mode images.
Doppler2 Makes settings for the display of the Doppler mode images.
Image Optimizer Makes settings for the display of the Doppler mode images.
Flow Makes settings for the display of the Flow mode images.
Power Flow Makes settings for the display of the Power Flow mode images.
eFlow Makes settings for the display of the eFlow mode images.
Tissue Doppler Makes settings for the display of the Tissue Doppler mode images.
Tissue Flow Makes settings for the display of the Tissue Flow mode images.
Tissue Power Flow Makes settings for the display of the Tissue Power Flow mode images.
FAM Makes settings for the Free Angular M Mode.
RT3D1 Makes settings for the 3D.
RT3D2 Makes settings for the 3D.
RT3D3 Makes settings for the 3D.
3D Scan Makes settings for the Freehand 3D.
Flow 3D Makes settings for the Flow 3D.

7-44 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-1 Preset Set-Up Menu

The Preset Set-Up Menu registers the preset name, application, measurement study and other
items related to the selected Preset No.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu for the selected preset will be displayed.

Select Initialize all presets to initialize all the items of the preset you have set in a batch.
Select Set the present conditions to register the status of current instrument in a batch.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-45

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-1-1 Change the item settings

1. Display Preset Set-up Menu.

2. Select the preset No. from the Preset No. pull-down list.
→ The present number changes to the selected No.
3. Change the item settings.

a Key in the preset name in Preset Name.

b Select the area to be examined from the Application pull-down list.
c Select the study from the Study for Measurement pull-down list.

4. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-46 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-1-2 Associating the preset and the probe

1. Display Preset Set-up Menu.

2. (If necessary), select the preset No. from the Preset No. pull-down list.
3. Register the probe to Probe List.
Probe List sets the probe which will change to the preset No. once connected.
a Select Probe List.
→ The Probe List screen is displayed.

b Select the kind of probe from the pull-down list.

c Select the probe name.
If you want to deselect the selected probe
Re-select the selected probe name.
d Repeat step b and step c to set the necessary probe.
You can set up to 6 probes to one preset.
e Select Exit.
→ The selected probe is displayed in Preset Set-Up Menu.

4. Select Probe Select.

Probe Select sets the change of the probe when you change the preset.
• On: If a Probe List-registered probe is connected, the probe will be changed to that probe.
When 2 or more Probe List-registered probes are connected, the probe will be changed to
the one listed at the top of the Probe List.
• Off: Use this setting this only to change the preset. The probe will not be changed.

5. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-47

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-2 Display1

Sets the screen display of Display1.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Display1 from the Tree View.
→ The following screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-48 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-2-1 Display1 setting items

Item Setting Function

Display Mode B Sets the startup display mode.
2B
4B
B/M
B/PW
B/CW
T.H.E. Off Sets the T.H.E. (Tissue Harmonic Echo) at startup.
On
BbH Off Sets the BbH (Broadband Harmonics Imaging) at startup.
On
Display Mode, Off Turns off Flow、 Power Flow、 eFlow at startup.
Flow Flow Turns on Flow, Power Flow and eFlow at startup.
Power Flow
eFlow
Display Mode, Normal The D, Flow, and Power Flow mode are operated on normal
TDI condition.
TDI The D, Flow, and Power Flow mode are operated on the TDI
state.
1B Format Size Normal Sets the width of B mode image in 1B mode.
(W) Wide

2B Format Size Normal Sets the width of B mode image in 2B mode.

(W) Wide

4B Format Size Normal Sets the width of B mode image in 4Bmode.

Wide
B Format Size Normal Sets the height of the B mode image or M mode image
(H) displayed in the B, 2B, 4B, B/D, B/M, M mode to the normal
height.
Wide Increases the height of the display are for B mode image in the
mode, and displays the enlarged image.
B/* Format L/R Displays images side by side in the B/Sweep mode.
U/L Displays images up and down in the B/Sweep mode.
B/* Format Size Normal Displays B/ Sweep mode with normal width.
Wide The longitudinal width of B mode with U/L is displayed about
the half size of sweep mode.
Scan Area (B) 25 to 100 Sets the scan area for B mode at startup.
(5% Step)
Scan Area 25 to 100 Sets the scan range of B mode on B(Flow) mode.
(B(Flow)) (5% Step)

Scan Area 25 to 100 Sets the scan range of B mode on a B(Flow)/D mode.
(B(Flow)/D) (5% Step)

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-49

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

Item Setting Function

Scan Area 25 to 100 Sets the scan area for B mode images during B (FAM) mode
(FAM) operation (in 5% steps).
Auto Sets the B mode scan area for B mode images during B (FAM)
mode operation to follow the FAM cursor.
Flow Area 15 to 100 Sets the lateral width of flow area on B(Flow) mode.
(W), B (F) (5% Step) (B mode is assumed 100％)
Flow Area 15 to 100 Sets the lateral width of flow area on B(Flow)/D mode.
(W), B (F)/* (5% Step) (B mode is assumed 100％)
Flow Area 25 to 100 Sets the height of flow area on B(Flow) and B(Flow)/D modes.
(Height) (5% Step) (B mode is assumed 100％)

7-50 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-3 Display2

Sets the screen display of Display2.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Display2 from the Tree View.
→ The following screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-51

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-3-1 Display2 setting items

Item Setting Function

Beam Steer(B) -30 to 30 Sets the deflection of the B mode.
(5 ° Step)
Beam Steer(D) -30 to 30 Sets the deflection of the Doppler cursor.
(5 ° Step)
Beam Steer -30 to 30 Sets the deflection of the Flow area.
(Flow) (5 ° Step)

Steering Link Off Sets SPECTRUM INVERT when the polarity changes by
On change of deflection angle of a beam of an electronic linear
probe.
Invert Link Off Sets Color Polarity following a spectrum invert.
On
T.B.Priority Auto Restores the trackball function when freeze is canceled.
(Frz Off) Unchanged Continues the trackball function upon freeze cancellation that
was carried out before canceling the freeze.
T.B.Priority Search Sets the trackball function to Search after freeze is canceled.
(Frz On) Bodymark Sets the trackball function to Bodymark after freeze is
canceled.
Comment Sets the trackball to move the pointer after freezing. You can
enter comments.
Measurement Sets the trackball function after freezing to the display
Measurement menu.
Unchanged Continues the trackball function after freezing that was carried
out immediately before freezing.
T. B. Color Light Blue Sets the color of the trackball.
Yellow
Orange
Pink
Emerald
Blue
Gray
Cursor Position Left Sets the display of cursor position.
Center
Right
Cursor Display Off Always displays the cursor when the preset is restarted.
On Hides the cursor when the preset is restarted.
Freeze G.Knob Search Sets the B GAIN knob to image search after the freezing.
Gain Adjusts each gain after the freeze regardless of active or
non-active status.

7-52 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

Item Setting Function

LCD/Panel TypeA Navigate the preset (Common Preset > Common3), and
Setup TypeB select from TypeA, TypeB or TypeC combined in LCD/Panel
TypeC Setup to set the brightness of the LCD monitor and operation
panel.
DSD Speed 1/1 Set the play back speed on the slow motion display.
1/2
1/3
1/4
1/10
DSD Memory 1 to 10 Set the refresh interval according to the memory size on the
Size slow motion display. (1 Step)

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-53

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-4 DISP-B, M

Sets the screen display of DISP-B, M.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select DISP-B, M from the Tree View.
→ The following screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-54 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-4-1 DISP-B, M setting items

Item Setting Function

Image Direction Normal Sets the scanning direction at startup.
(L/R) Invert

Image Rotation 0 Sets rotated display of the image.

90 The image will be shown without any rotation at 0deg.
180
270
Cine Division 1 Divides the cine memory into four after freezing.
2
4
Position Shift -10.0 to 20.0 Sets the depth offset of the B mode image.
(CV/LN/PA) (0.1cm Step)

Color Map (B,M) Gray Sets the displays the B, M mode image without colors.
A Sets the image display with the gradation between the blue and
orange colors.
B Sets the image display with blue color.
C Sets the image display with blue color lighter than B.
D Sets the image display with orange color.
E Sets the image display with brown brightness characteristics.
F Sets the image display with lighter brown brightness
characteristics than E.
G Sets the image display with blue and yellow brightness
characteristics.
Zoom Method Center Sets the zooms an image with the center of image as base.
Box Sets the zooms an image by displaying a zoom box.
B Shift Off Sets the B mode image to not follow the cursor movement in the
B/D mode.
On Sets the B mode image to follow the cursor movement in the
B/D mode.
Sweep Speed 25.0 Sets the sweep speed of the M mode.
(M) 33.3
50.0
66.7
100.0
150.0
200.0
Echo Erase Off Disables Echo Erase function at startup.
1 to 19 Sets erase range when Echo Erase is On. (1 Step)
Zoom Box Off Sets so that rolling the trackball while zoomed returns to the
Redisplay On pre-zoom image and the ROI can be moved.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-55

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-4-2 Range Select setting

Specify the display depth at the preset startup.

1. In the Tree view, select the + mark displayed in front of DISP-B, M.

→ The Range Select screen is displayed.

2. Select Range Select.

→ The following screen is displayed.

3. Set the default display depth at the preset startup and the steps of the display depth.
4. Change the item settings.
Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
5. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-56 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-5 DISP-D, Flow

Sets the screen display of DISP-D, Flow.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select DISP-D, Flow from the Tree View.
→ The following screen is displayed.

5. Change the item setting.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-57

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-5-1 DISP-D, Flow setting items

Item Setting Function

Triplex Mode Triplex Sets to B real and D real display when switched to B/D mode.
B-Real Sets to B real D blank display when switched to B/D mode.
D-Real Sets to B freeze and D real display when switched to B/D mode
during D cursor display in B mode.
Simul Mode Off Sets Triplex Mode when the PW button is pressed when the
On Triplex Mode is on B-Real or D-Real.
Triplex Mode MSE Displays B mode image normally during simultaneous
Type operation.
Refresh Refreshes the B mode image in simultaneous operation.
Triplex VEL Low Sets the speed range of the D mode the same as that of the
Range B(Flow) mode in the B(Flow)/D simultaneous mode.
When a speed range is raised, it is advanced with 1:1.
High Sets the speed range of the D mode twice as that of the B(Flow)
mode in the B(Flow)/D simultaneous mode.
When a speed range is raised, it is advanced with 1:2.
B Fix Sets the speed range of B(Flow) constant in B(Flow)/D
simultaneous mode, and increases it only in D mode.
Triplex, Frame Low Sets the frame rate of the B mode image in the B (Flow)/D
Rate (B) Medium simultaneous mode.
High
Spectrum Size Normal Sets the longitudinal width of the spectrum in the B/D and D
Wide modes.
Image Polarity Posi Sets the polarity of the D mode image.
Nega
Sweep Speed 25.0 Sets the sweep speed of the D mode.
(D) 33.3
50.0
66.7
100.0
150.0
200.0
PW Sound On Off Sets the PW sound when the D cursor is displayed on the B
On mode image and B/D simultaneous operation is on in the unit.
Area Lock Off Sets the following of the flow area when a sample volume is
On moved.
Capture Time 1 Sets the pixel holding time (sec) during the capture.
2
3
Continuous Maintains the display until it freezes.

7-58 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-6 ID, Comment

Makes settings for entering patient information and comments.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select ID, Comment.
→ The ID, Comment screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-59

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-6-1 ID, Comment setting items

Item Setting Function

ID Input ID Name Sets the additional ID input items relevant to the application.
ID Obstetrics
ID Gynecology
ID BSA
ID Urology
ID BMI
Sex Male Sets the default sex.
Female
Other
(Blank)
BSA Equation Du Bois Sets the formula for the BSA index.
Boyd
Shintani
GA/EDC LMP Sets the method for calculating the gestational week and the
Calculation BBT expected confinement data.
EGA
EDC
GA
Menstrual Date LMP Sets the method for entering the menstruation period.
BBT
Auto Comment Erase Erases comments when freezing is canceled.
Off Remain Displays comments even when freezing is canceled.

Character Size Normal Displays comments in standard font size.

Large Displays comments in double height and width font size.

Comment 1 to 79 Sets the X coordinate of the home position in the comment area.
Position (X)
Comment 4 to 39 Sets the Y coordinate of the home position in the comment area.
Position (Y)
Annotation 1 to 6 Sets the dictionary for ANNOTATION function execution.
Dictionary
Annotation Dic Full Spelling Displays ANNOTATION with full spelling.
Type Abbreviation Displays ANNOTATION with an abbreviation.

7-60 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-7 Graphics

Set the graphics on the screen.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Graphics from the Tree View.
→ The Graphics, Information screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-61

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-7-1 Graphics setting items

Item Setting Function

Graphic Color A Sets the font and graphic colors on the screen.
B
C
D
E
User
Imaging Off Sets the automatic display of the image display area.
Information On
Info Display Lower Sets the automatic display of the image display area at the
Position Upper bottom of the screen.

Thermal Index TIS Sets the thermal index for soft tissues as an acoustic power
index for display.
TIB Sets the thermal index for bones as an acoustic power index for
display.
TIC Sets the thermal index for cranial bones as an acoustic power
index for display.
Puncture Guide Off Sets the puncturing guideline display at startup.
Line On
Angle Select 1 to 8 Sets the default display of the incidence angle of puncture
(Punc) attachments.

MI/TI Display Erase Hides MI/TI upon freezing.

(Frz On) Remain Displays MI/TI regardless of freezing.

Rotary Plane Off Sets the display of the rotary plane mark of the rotary plane
Mark On transesophageal probe.

Rotary Plane Display Displays the angle when the rotary plane mark of the rotary
Angle plane transesophageal probe is displayed.
Erase Hides the angle when the rotary plane mark of the rotary plane
transesophageal probe is displayed.
Grid Display A Sets the type of Grid display.
Type B
C
D
Biplane Label Off Sets the displays of a biplane label of a biplane transesophageal
On probe.
Biplane Line Off Sets the displays of a biplane line of a biplane transesophageal
On probe.
Thumbnail Off Sets the thumbnail display on the screen.
Display On

7-62 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

Item Setting Function

PF Info Display Off Hides PRF value and velocity in Power Flow, eFlow and
Directional TDI Power modes.
PRF Displays PRF value in Power Flow, eFlow and Directional TDI
Power modes.
Velocity Displays the aliasing velocity when Directional (Flow) is On in
Power Flow, eFlow and TDI Power mode.
Font Size (Meas. ×1 Sets the font size of measurement results to standard.
Results) ×1.2 Sets the font size of measurement results to approximately 1.2
times larger than × 1.
×1.4 Sets the font size of measurement results to approximately 1.4
times larger than × 1.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-63

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-8 Store, Cine

Makes settings for saving images.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Store, Cine from the Tree View.
→ The Store, Cine screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-64 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-8-1 Store, Cine setting items

Item Setting Function

Acquire Mode Pre Time Sets the capture range of moving images to be between the time
immediately before pressing the STORE switch and the set
time (1 to 16 seconds).
Pre ECG Sets the capture range of moving images to be between the
R-wave captured immediately before pressing STORE and the
R-wave captured immediately before the set number of
heartbeats (1 to 10 heartbeats).
Post Time Sets the capture range of moving images to be between the time
immediately after pressing the STORE switch and the set time
(1 to 16 seconds).
Post ECG Sets the capture range of moving images to be between the
R-wave captured immediately after pressing STORE and the
R-wave captured immediately before the set number of
heartbeats (1 to 10 heartbeats).
Manual Sets the capture range of moving images to be between the time
immediately after pressing the STORE switch and the time the
STORE switch is pressed again.
ECG Cycle 1 to 10 Sets the capture time of moving images according to the number
of heartbeats (cycles).
Time Cycle 1 to 16 Sets the capture time of moving images in time (seconds).

Acquire Method Line Sets the storage format of loop playback images.
Video Clip
Format Type DICOM Sets the storage format of still images.
(Single) JPEG Baseline
BMP
TIFF
Store Media HDD Sets the storage destination when STORE is pressed.
USB
CD-R Buffer
DVD
NET (DICOM) Transmits a single image to the network server in DICOM
format.
Auto Loop Off Sets the automatic loop playback of the moving image after it is
On stored.

Video Clip Auto Off The same images are not stored in the cine memory while being
Stop stored as Video Clips.
On Stores the same segment of data in the cine memory when
saving a Video Clip image, if Acquire Mode is set to Manual.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-65

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

Item Setting Function

Loop Mode Short Sets the target of synchronized loop playback of multiple
images to the image with the shortest loop point.
Long Sets the target of synchronized loop playback of multiple
images to the image with the longest loop point.
Align Sets the target of synchronized loop playback of multiple
images to the image with the longest loop point. The playback
speed of images with short loop points are aligned with the
image with the longest loop point.
Free Run Turns off the synchronized loop playback of multiple images.

Message Off Hides a warning dialog box when Line format is converted to
Display (Review) image.
16 Displays a warning dialog box if a moving image file of
16 seconds or more exists when Line format is converted to
image.

7-66 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-9 Body Mark

Sets the body mark display on the screen.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Body Mark from the Tree View.
→ The Body Mark screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Setting the body mark display on the screen

Item Setting Function

Display Off Sets the display of the body mark when the instrument is
On started or application is changed.

Body Mark Trackball Switches the body mark when probe mark is moved from
Method side to side with the trackball.
Locate Only Switches the body mark only with the Rotary Encoder.

Setting the default body mark

Select the radio button for the default body mark.
Switching the pages
Select Next for Page6 to Page10 is displayed.
Select Prev. to return to Page1 to Page5.
Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-67

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-5-9-1 Change the Body Mark that displays on the Body Mark Menu

1. Select the Body Mark on the Body Mark preset.

2. Change the Body Mark.
When the delete or blank
Select Delete.
When the replace
a Select Edit.
→ The following screen is displayed.

d
b
e

b Select the body mark you want to set.

c In the Probe list, Select the probe mark you want to display.
d Select Position.
e Adjust the orientation and position of the probe mark with the Rotary Encoder and
trackball and press ENTER.
f Set right/left indication Under Direction Display.
Setting the L/R display for all body marks
After adding a check mark to ALL MARK, set ON/OFF in Direction Display.
L/R is not displayed in body marks that do not require it.
→ When you turn Direction Display ON, L/R indicating left and right is displayed in the
body mark, and L/R is eliminated when you turn it OFF.
g Select Exit.

7-68 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-10 Menu-Function

Set the menu area in the function menu.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Menu-Function from the Tree View.
→ The Menu-Function Assign screen is displayed.

5. Select the mode to change to form the Mode pull-down list.

6. Select the mode menu to change to form the Name pull-down list.
7. Set the menu area.
Registering the menu
The current settings of the menu area are displayed in Sub Menu.
a Select the menu whose setting you want to change in Sub Menu.
b Select the menu item to register in Select Items.

Deleting the registered menu

a Select the menu to delete in Sub Menu.
b Select Delete.

Resetting item settings to the default

Select Initialize.
8. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-69

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-11 Custom SW

Sets the functions to be assigned to the operation panel switches.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Custom SW from the Tree View.
→ The Custom SW screen is displayed.

7-70 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

5. Select the button whose setting you want to change.

→ A list of assignable functions is displayed.

6. Change the function of the button.

Registering other functions
Select the function name to register.
If the function name is not in the displayed list, change the list type from the pull-down list.
Deleting the registered function
Select the registered function from the list.
The function name becomes deselected.
Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize of all Custom Switch.
7. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-71

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-12 Custom SW2

Sets the functions to be assigned to the operation panel switches.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Custom SW2 from the Tree View.
→ The Custom SW2 screen is displayed.

5. Change the function of the switch.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize of all Custom Switch.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-72 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-12-1 Custom SW2 setting items

Table 7-4: ENTER/F16 key setting items

Item Setting Function
Enter SW / F16 Enter / Send Sets the ENTER function to ENTER, and the SEND function
to the F16 key.
Enter / F16 Sets the ENTER function to ENTER, and the function assigned
using Custom-Keyboard to the F16 key.
Send / Enter Sets the SEND function to ENTER, and the ENTER function
to the F16 key.

Table 7-5: D, F and PRINT setting items

Item Setting Function
Default Func. of PW Sets to display PW mode when D is pressed and CW mode
D SW when it is pressed and held.
CW Sets to display CW mode when D is pressed and PW mode
when it is pressed and held.
Default Func. of Flow Sets to display Flow mode when F is pressed and eFlow mode
F SW when it is pressed and held.
eFlow Sets to display eFlow mode when F is pressed and Flow mode
when it is pressed and held.
Print SW (Short Archive Group1 Sets the device to output to when PRINT is pressed.
Push) Archive Group2
Archive Group3
Print SW (Long Archive Group1 Sets the device to output to when PRINT is pressed and held.
Push) Archive Group2
Archive Group3

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-73

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-13 Custom-Foot

Sets the functions to be assigned to the optional foot switch.

Each switch is set for the 3-point foot switch (MP-2614B). The CENTER settings are applied
for the 1-point foot switch (MP-2345B).

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Custom-Foot from the Tree View.
→ The Custom-Foot screen is displayed.

5. Select the key to assign to.

→ A list of assignable functions is displayed.
6. Change the function of the switch.
Registering other functions
Select the function name to register.
If the function name is not in the displayed list, change the list type from the pull-down list.
Deleting the registered function
Select the registered function.
The function name becomes deselected.
Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize of all Custom Switch.
7. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-74 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-14 Custom-Keyboard

Sets the functions to be assigned to the function keys and other keys for the keyboard.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Custom-Keyboard from the Tree View.
→ The Custom-Keyboard screen is displayed.

5. Select the key name to assign to.

→ A list of assignable functions is displayed.
6. Change the function of the switch.
Registering other functions
Select the function name to register.
If the function name is not in the displayed list, change the list type from the pull-down list.
Deleting the registered function
Select the registered function.
The function name becomes deselected.
Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize of all Custom Switch.
7. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed setting and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-75

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-15 Physio

Makes settings for displaying physiological signals.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Physio from the Tree View.
→ The Physio screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-76 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-15-1 Physio setting items

Item Setting Function

ECG Display (B) Off Sets ECG display in the B mode.
On
ECG Display Off Sets ECG display in the Sweep mode.
(Sweep) On

Drift Filter Off Sets to display the ECG waveform without modification.
On Stabilizes the baseline of an ECG waveform.

ECG Invert Off Sets the displays an ECG waveform with input signal polarity.
On Sets the displays an ECG waveform with reversed polarity.
R-Delay Time 0.00 to 2.55 Sets a time phase from the R-wave when capturing a B mode
image in increments of 0.01 second. if ECG SYNC is set to On.
R-Wave Beep Off Sets the R-wave detection sound.
On
Sweep Speed(B) 25.0 Sets the sweep speed of physiological signal display in the B
33.3 mode.
50.0
66.7
100.0
150.0
200.0
HR Stability Off Determines the heart rate stability.
Display On Displays the HR value on the screen with black and white
reversed when the rate is stable.
HR Stability Disp 0 to 50 Sets the acceptable heart rate difference between heart rates of
(Avg.) the average of five previous heartbeats and the most recent
heartbeat and the previous heartbeat in increments of 1%.
HR Stability 0 to 50 Sets the acceptable heart rate difference between heart rates of
Display (Conti) the most recent heartbeat and the previous heartbeat in
increments of 1%.
ECG SENS 1 to32 Sets the sensitivity of the ECG waveform.

ECG POSI (B) 1 to 32 Sets the position of the ECG waveform in the B mode.

ECG POSI 1 to 32 Sets the position of the ECG waveform in the Sweep mode.
(Sweep)

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-77

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-16 Image-B, M1

Set the image adjustment items for Image-B, M1.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Image-B, M1 from the Tree View.
→ The Image-B, M1 screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-5-16-1 Image-B, M1 setting items

Item Setting Function

DVA (B, B/M, M) 0 to 100 Sets the transmission output on B, B/M and M mode.

DVA (THE) 0 to 100 Sets the transmission output on Tissue Harmonic Echo.

DVA (BbH) 0 to 100 Sets the transmission output on BbH.

Gain (B) 10 to 90 Sets the gain value of B mode at starting time.

7-78 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

Item Setting Function

Gain (THE) -30 to30 Sets a Gain value when Tissue Harmonic Echo is On.
Sets a correction value of Gain(B).
Gain (BbH) -30 to 30 Sets a Gain value when BbH is On.
Sets a correction value of Gain(B).
Gain (M) -30 to 30 Sets the gain value of M mode at starting time.
Sets a correction value of Gain(B).
Adaptive STC Normal Adjusts always to at a constant ratio to a display depth.
Adaptive Changes the adjustable range of STC equally for an image
display range.
Angle Gain Type Linear Sets the pattern of Angle Gain.
V1
V2
V3
Image/Freq Penetration Sets the frequency of a probe at startup.
(B/M) Standard
Resolution
High
Image/Freq Penetration Sets the frequency of a probe when Tissue Harmonic Echo is
(THE) Standard On.
Resolution
High
Image/Freq Penetration Sets the frequency of a probe when BbH is On.
(BbH) Standard
Resolution
High
Frame Rate Low Sets with the large number of scanning lines when an electronic
type probe is connected.
Medium Sets with the middle number of scanning lines when an
electronic type probe is connected.
High Sets with the small number of scanning lines when an electronic
type probe is connected.
Frame Rate Low Sets with the large number of scanning line when BbH is On.
(BbH) Medium Sets with the middle number of scanning line when BbH is On.
High Sets with the small number of scanning line when BbH is On.
PRF Limit Off Limits a frame rate in short distance.
On
Beam Multi Scans with simultaneous multiple receiving beams in B mode.
Processing Single Scans with standard multiple receiving lines in B mode.
Frame Corre Auto Sets the frame correlation depending on the frame rate of B
Type mode image.
Manual Sets the frame correlation freely.
Frame Off Sets the frame smoothing.
Smoothing On

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-79

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-17 Image-B, M2

Set the image adjustment items for Image-B, M2.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Image-B, M2 from the Tree View.
→ The Image-B, M2 screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-80 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-17-1 Image-B, M2 setting items

Item Setting Function

FTC (B) Off Accentuates and emphasizes the edges of B mode image at
On start-up.
FTC (BbH) Off Accentuates and emphasizes the edges of B mode image when
On BbH is ON.
FTC (M) Off Accentuates and emphasizes the edges of M mode image at
On start-up.
Spatial Off Sets the process to synthesize ultrasound beams from multiple
Compound On different angles to reduce artifacts.
Compound 5 to 30 Sets the angle of transmitting the ultrasound beam when Spatial
Angle Compound is operating. (5deg Step)

AIP Off Sets image processing by emphasizing the existence of border

On areas between different characteristics and by removing speckle
in the homogeneous area for smoothing.
Brightness Level Auto Automatically sets the target average brightness in Image
Optimizer.
40 to 80 Manually sets the target average brightness in Image Optimizer.
Trapezoidal Off The field of view of a linear probe is the same as the probe
Scan width. Consult following diagram (1).
On Displays an image from a linear probe in trapezoidal shape and
enlarges the field of view. Consult following diagram (2).
Frame Rate Low Sets the scanning lines when the Trapezoidal Scan.
(Trapezoid) Medium The number of scanning lines decreases in the order of Low,
High Medium, and High.
Trapezoidal 5 to 20 Sets the Trapezoidal Scan Angle (5deg steps) of the Linea
Scan Angle probe.
Refer to angle a of the chart below (3).

(1) (2) (3)

a a

SIP Off Sets a smooth image by combining a process that emphasizes

On the borders between tissues and a noise removal process.
SIP Effect A Sets the level of image processing.
B
C

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-81

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-17-2 IP Select, AIP Level setting

1. In the Tree view, select the + mark displayed in front of Image-B, M2.
→ The following Tree view is displayed.

• IP Select (B)
• IP Select (THE)
• IP Select (BbH)
• IP Select (Spatial Compound)
• IP Select (Spatial Compound, THE/BbH)
• AIP Level (B)
• AIP Level (THE)
• AIP Level (BbH)
• IP Select (M)

2. Select the applicable items and change the settings.

• IP Select (B), IP Select (THE), IP Select (BbH), IP Select (Spatial Compound), IP Select
(Spatial Compound, THE/BbH) setting items
• AIP Level (B), AIP Level (THE), AIP Level (BbH) setting items
• IP Select (M) setting items

Resetting item settings to the default

Select Initialize.
3. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

Related links:
IP Select (B), IP Select (THE), IP Select (BbH), IP Select (Spatial Compound), IP Select
(Spatial Compound, THE/BbH) setting items → p.7-83
AIP Level (B), AIP Level (THE), AIP Level (BbH) setting items → p.7-85
IP Select (M) setting items → p.7-85

7-82 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

IP Select (B), IP Select (THE), IP Select (BbH), IP Select (Spatial

Compound), IP Select (Spatial Compound, THE/BbH) setting items

IP Select (B) IP Select (THE)

IP Select (BbH) IP Select (Spatial Compound)

IP Select (Spatial Compound, THE/BbH)

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-83

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

Item Setting Function

No. 1 to 8 Select the default No. in IP Select.

Frame Corre Off Turns Off the correlation between adjacent frames.
1 to 15 Sets the correlation of the frame.

Contrast 1 (96) to 23 (36) Sets the Contrast.

AGC Off Turns Off the tissue boundary emphasis.

1 to15 Sets the level of tissue boundary emphasis.
Relief Off Enhances the edges of B mode images.
Low
Med
High
Smoothing Off Displays an image without correlating scan directions at the
same depth.
1 to 15 Correlates scan directions at the same depth and sets the level to
create a smooth image.
View Gamma Linear Sets the correction curve that matches the brightness
A characteristics of the observation monitor.
B
C
D

7-84 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

AIP Level (B), AIP Level (THE), AIP Level (BbH) setting items

Item Setting Function

No. 1 to 6 Sets a default No. for AIP Level.

Edge Sens 1 to 8 Sets the sensitivity level of detection for border areas between
different characteristics.
Resolution 1 to 8 Sets whether to emphasize spatial resolution or speckle noise
removal. Raise the level to improve spatial resolution.

IP Select (M) setting items

Item Setting Function

No. 1 to 6 Sets a default No. for AIP Level (BbH).

Contrast 1 (96) to 23 (36) Sets the Contrast.

AGC Off Turns off the tissue boundary emphasis.

1 to 15 Sets the level of tissue boundary emphasis.
Relief Off Enhances the edges of B mode images.
Low
Med
High

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-85

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-18 Focus

Sets the image adjustment items for Focus.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Focus from the Tree View.
→ The Focus screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-86 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-18-1 Focus setting items

Item Setting Function

Auto Focus Type Unchanged Succeeds the position of a focal point in auto-focus, even if the
range is changed.
Reset Returns the position of a focal point to auto in auto-focus when
the range is changed.
Focus (B) 1P Sets a focus near the center of image only with one step.
2P Sets two focal points evenly distributed across the entire image.
2P(@) Sets one fixed focal point on the top of image and one movable
point at the center.
3P Sets three focal points on the image.
1P Position Near Sets the focus position of Auto 1P to the near position.
Std Sets the focus position of Auto 1P to the intermediate position.
Far Sets the focus position of Auto 1P to the far position.
Focus (BbH) 1P Sets a focus near the center of image only with one step.
2P Sets two focal points evenly distributed across the entire image.
2P(@) Sets one fixed focal point on the top of image and one movable
point at the center.
3P Sets three focal points on the image.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-87

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-19 Post Processing

Sets image adjustment items for Post Processing.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Post Processing.
→ The Post Processing is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-88 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-19-1 Post Processing setting items

Item Setting Function

Post Processing Linear Displays without applying any brightness characteristics.
Slope1 (0 to 63) Displays with a minimum brightness for echoes lower than the
range that is wanted to expand brightness and with a maximum
brightness for echoes higher than that.
Slope2 (0 to 63) Displays with a minimum brightness for both lower echoes and
higher echoes than the range that is wanted to expand
brightness.
Slope3 (0 to 63) Displays the change of brightness for lower echoes and higher
echoes than the range that is wanted to expand brightness with
the 1/4 compression.
Reject (0 to 63) Displays echoes lower than a setting level at minimum
brightness.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-89

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-20 Doppler1

Sets the screen display of Doppler1.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Doppler1 from the Tree View.
→ The Doppler1 screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the change settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-90 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-20-1 Doppler1 setting items

Item Setting Function

DVA (PW) 0 to 100 Sets the transmission output in PW mode in 1% steps.

DVA (CW) 0 to 100 Sets the transmission output in CW mode in 1% steps.

Sample Volume 0.5 to 20.0 Sets the size of the sample volume in the PW mode in mm. The
number of steps varies depending on the size.
Dop Gain (PW) 0 to 127 Sets the gain of the PW mode in 1dB steps.

Dop Gain (CW) -63 to 63 Sets the gain of the CW mode in 1dB steps.

Image/Freq Penetration Sets the frequency of a probe low in PW mode.

(PW) Standard Sets the frequency of a probe slightly low in PW mode.
Resolution Sets the frequency of a probe slightly high in PW mode.
High Sets the frequency of a probe high in PW mode.
Dop Filter (PW) Auto Sets a filter value corresponding to a flow velocity range.
Manual Sets control with a fixed filter value.
Dop Filter (PW), 1 to 12 Sets the level for automatically setting a filter value when Dop
AUTO Filter (PW) is set to Auto.
Dop Filter (PW), 50 Sets the filter value when Dop Filter (PW) is set to Manual.
MANU 100
200
400
800
1600
Dop Filter (CW) Auto Sets a filter value corresponding to a flow velocity range.
Manual Sets control with a fixed filter value.
Dop Filter (CW), 1 to 12 Sets the level for automatically setting a filter value when Dop
AUTO Filter (CW) is set to Auto.

Dop Filter (CW), 50 Sets the filter value when Dop Filter (CW) is set to Manual.
MANU 100
200
400
800
1600
Velocity Range 6.23 to 398.44 Sets the speed range (cm/s) of the PW mode.
(PW)
Velocity Range 24.90 to 796.88 Sets the speed range (cm/s) of the CW mode.
(CW)
Base Line -16 to 16 Sets the position of the baseline for D mode images in
Position increments of 1 step.

Image Optimizer 6.23 to 398.44 Sets the speed range (cm/s) of the PW mode.
Velocity Range
(PW)

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-91

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

Item Setting Function

Image Optimizer 24.90 to 796.88 Sets the speed range (cm/s) of the CW mode.
Velocity Range
(CW)
Color Map (D) Gray Sets the display to add no coloration to D mode images.
A Sets the image display with the gradation between the blue and
orange colors.
B Sets the image display with blue color.
C Sets the image display with blue lighter than B.
D Sets the image display with orange color.
E Sets the image display with brown brightness characteristics.
F Sets the image display with lighter brown brightness
G Sets the image display with blue and yellow brightness
characteristics.
High PRF Off Switches the High PRF setting.
The flow velocity range can be expanded when this is set to On.
On Operates the High PRF function when the flow rate range is
raised.
Zoom Lock Off Zooms an image regardless of the display position of the sample
volume.
On Zooms an image with the display position of the sample volume
as the center.
B Refresh 1 In simultaneous display of B + Flow /M+ Flow, a renewal
2 interval of B-mode image is set.
4
6
8
Scale Display Off Sets the flow velocity value display on a Doppler scale.
On
Spectrum Invert Normal Displays the blood flow toward the probe upward in D mode.
Invert Displays the blood flow toward the probe downward in D mode.
Invert Axis Base Line Sets the baseline as the base for spectrum inversion.
Center Sets the center of the image as the base for spectrum inversion.

7-92 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-20-2 IP Select(D) setting

1. In the Tree view, select the + mark displayed in front of Doppler1.

→ The IP Select (D) is displayed.

2. Select IP Select (D).

3. Change the item settings. IP Select (D) setting items → p.7-94
Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
4. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-93

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

IP Select (D) setting items

Item Setting Function

No. 1 to 8 Sets a default No. for IP Select.

Contrast 1 to 16 Sets the Contrast.

Image Select (D) Penetration Changes the sensitivity of D mode.

Standard
Resolution
Comp Curve (D) Off Sets the weak signals to not be suppressed.
1 to 7 Sets the weak signals to be suppressed in order to display a clear
Doppler pattern.
Resolution Time Sets time direction as the direction of resolution to be improved
for a Doppler spectrum.
Frequency Sets frequency direction as the direction of resolution to be
improved for a Doppler spectrum.

7-94 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-21 Doppler2

Sets the screen display of Doppler2.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Doppler2 from the Tree View.
→ The Doppler2 screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item setting to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-95

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-21-1 Doppler2 setting items

Item Setting Function

Angle Correct Display Off Turns off the angle mark display.
On Turns on the angle mark display.
Angle Correction -80 to 80 Sets the default value of angle correction (in 1 degree
steps) in D mode.
D. Trace Direction Toward Sets the trace range of Real Time Doppler Auto Trace
above the baseline.
Away Sets the trace range of Real Time Doppler Auto Trace
below the baseline.
Both Sets the trace range of Real Time Doppler Auto Trace
above and below the baseline.
Auto Sets the trace range of Real Time Doppler Auto Trace to
the larger display range by judging it based on the baseline
position.
Freeze Trigger Off Sets the trace line display to continue unchanged, even
when the Real Time Doppler Auto Trace is frozen.
On Sets Real Time Doppler Auto Trace to display a trace line
simultaneously when the image is frozen.
D. Trace Level 0 to -22 Adjusts the detection level of a trace line for Real Time
Doppler Auto Trace in increments of 1 step.
D. Trace Display Off Turns off the display of the trace line and measurement
values in Real Time Doppler Auto Trace.
On Turns on the display of the trace line and measurement
values.
D. Trace Smooth Low Smooths the trace line for Real Time Doppler Auto Trace.
High Sets the trace line for Real Time Doppler Auto Trace
smoother than Low.
Measurement Auto Sets tot display the menu for transferring measurement
Transfer during the freeze mode.
Manual Sets to display the menu for transferring measurement
during the freeze mode.
D. Trace Display Off Sets the display of PI, RI, S/D, D/S, PSV, EDV, MnV,
Items On FlowT.

7-96 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-22 Image Optimizer

Make settings for the Image Optimizer.

1. Select the Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select a preset from the Name list.
→ The Preset Set-Up Menu for the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Image Optimizer from the tree view.
→ The following screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

a Set the item to be optimized when the Image Optimizer runs to On.
b Set target values for the item to optimize.

Item name Menus and presets to set item names

B (M) Gain Brightness Level → p.6-8
Image-B, M2 → p.7-80
Base Line Shift Image Optimizer → p.7-97

To reset item settings to the defaults

Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This confirms the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-97

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-22-1 Image Optimizer setting items

Table 7-6: Destination

Item Setting Function
B (M) Gain Off Sets so that gain is not adjusted automatically when the Image
Optimizer is turned on.
On Sets to adjust the B (M) gain, including STC and lateral gain,
automatically when the Image Optimizer is turned on.
Dop Vel/BLS Off Sets so that speed of sound is not adjusted automatically when
the Image Optimizer is turned on.
On Sets so that Doppler flow speed range and Doppler baseline are
adjusted automatically when the Image Optimizer is turned on.

Item Setting Function

Base Line Unchanged Sets so that the Doppler baseline gain is not adjusted
Position automatically when the Image Optimizer is turned on, if Dop
Vel/BLS is set to On.
0 to 16 Sets the position to shift the Doppler baseline to (in 1 step)
when the Image Optimizer is turned on, if Dop Vel/BLS is set
to On.

7-98 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-23 Flow

Makes settings for the display of the Flow mode images.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Flow from the Tree View.
→ The Flow screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-99

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-23-1 Flow setting items

Item Setting Function

DVA (FLOW) 0 to 100 Sets the transmission output in the Flow mode in 1% steps.

Flow Gain 0 to 127 Sets the Flow gain value in 1 dB steps when starting up the
Flow mode.
B Gain Comp -30 to 30 Sets the correction level for the decrease in brightness caused
(Flow) by the power restriction based on the difference in B Gain
between Flow On and Flow Off (in 1dB steps).
Image/Freq Penetration Sets the frequency of a probe low in the Flow mode.
(Flow) Standard Sets the frequency of a probe slightly low in the Flow mode.
Resolution Sets the frequency of a probe slightly high in the Flow mode.
High Sets the frequency of a probe high in the Flow mode.
Frame Rate -4 to 4 Sets the number of frames in the Flow mode by combining the
(Flow) number of scanning lines of B mode images and the number of
scanning lines of Flow mode image.
Frame Rate Off Sets the combination of the number of scanning lines of Flow
(B+F/D) Medium1 in the B (Flow)/D simultaneous mode and the number of
Medium2 scanning lines in the B mode.
Fast The number of scanning lines decreases in the order of Off,
Medium1, Medium2 and Fast.
Frame Rate -4 to 4 Sets the number of frames in the Flow mode by combining the
(Compound) number of scanning lines in the B mode and that in the Flow
mode when Spatial Compound is On.
Frame Rate -4 to 4 Sets the number of frames in the Flow mode by combining the
(Trapezoid) number of scanning lines in the B mode and that in the Flow
mode during Trapezoidal Scan.
Average (Flow) Low Sets the number of transmissions low in Flow mode.
Medium Sets the number of transmissions at medium level in Flow
mode.
High Sets the number of transmissions high in Flow mode.
Velocity Range 0.62 to 227.68 Sets the speed range (cm/s) of the Flow mode.
(Flow)
Wall Motion Off Turns Off wall motion noise cutting.
Reduction 1 to 15 Sets the level for cutting wall motion noise. The higher the
value, the higher the noise removal level.
Color Map, Abdom Sets the combination group of the color flow velocity and
Group Cardio dispersion (Color Map) in the Flow mode.
Vascular
Power
eFlow
Directional Power
Directional eFlow
User

7-100 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

Item Setting Function

Color Map, A Sets the Color Map.
Setting B
C
D
E
Display Priority Color Sets the color display of the area where a black-and-white
image and a color flow velocity display are overlapped.
Both Displays both black-and-white and color images.
Color (TDI) Sets the color display of the area where a black-and-white
image and a color flow velocity display are overlapped in the
TDI Flow mode.
Both (TDI) Cuts off color information and displays black-and-white
images preferentially if the low flow velocity components of
the color information are large in the TDI Flow mode.
Disp Prio Lev, 0 to127 Sets the threshold for the black-and-white information display.
B/W
Disp Prio Lev, 1 to 127 Sets the threshold for the color information display.
Color
Color Polarity Normal Displays the blood flowing toward the probe in red and that
flowing away from the probe in blue.
Invert Displays the blood flowing toward the probe in blue and that
flowing away from the probe in red.
Rejection (Flow) 0 to 31 Sets the level of low flow velocity components to be cut from
the color information.
Frame Rate Off Displays Flow mode images in every inter frame.
Accel On Displays an image having continuity between frames.
Color Line Off Displays data from color reception lines.
Correlation Low Displays an image by adding a line between color reception
lines. This function enables smoother image display.
High Displays an image by adding multiple lines between color
reception lines. This function enables smoother image display
than Low.
Flow Edge Off Turns Off the processing of color pixel information.
On Displays an image by processing color pixel information to
prevent colors from extending over the tissues.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-101

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-23-2 IP Select (Flow) setting

1. In the Tree view, select the + mark displayed in front of Flow.

→ The IP Select (Flow) is displayed.

2. Select IP Select (Flow).

3. Change the function of the switch.
Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
4. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

IP Select (Flow) setting items

Item Setting Function

No. 1 to 8 Sets a default No. for IP Select (Flow).
Frame Corre Off Turns Off the correlation between adjacent frames.
1 to15 Sets the correlation of the frame.
Smoothing Off Displays an image without correlating scan directions at the
same depth.
1 to 15 Correlates scan directions at the same depth and sets the level
to create a smooth image.
Image Select Penetration Sets the default sensitivity in D mode.
(Flow) Standard
Resolution
Filter (Flow) 1 to 6 Sets the filter to reduce the wall motion.

Related links:
IP Select (Flow) setting items → p.7-102

7-102 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-24 Power Flow

Makes settings for the display of the Power Flow mode images.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Power Flow from the Tree View.
→ The Power Flow screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-103

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-24-1 Power Flow setting items

Item Setting Function

DVA (FLOW) 0 to 100 Sets the transmission output in the Power Flow mode in 1%
steps.
Flow Gain -63 to 63 Sets the Flow gain value in 1 dB steps when starting up the
Power Flow mode.
B Gain Comp -30 to 30 Sets the correction level for the decrease in brightness caused
(Flow) by the power restriction based on the difference in B Gain
between Power Flow On and Power Flow Off (in 1 dB steps).
Image/Freq Penetration Sets the frequency of a probe low in the Power Flow mode.
(Flow) Standard Sets the frequency of a probe slightly low in the Power Flow
mode.
Resolution Sets the frequency of a probe slightly high in the Power Flow
mode.
High Sets the frequency of a probe high in the Power Flow mode.
Frame Rate -4 to 4 Sets the number of frames in the Power Flow mode by
(Flow) combining the number of scanning lines of B mode images and
the number of scanning lines of Power Flow mode image.
Frame Rate Off Sets the combination of the number of scanning line of Power
(B+F/D) Medium1 Flow in the B (Flow)/D simultaneous mode and the number of
Medium2 scanning line in the B mode.
Fast The number of scanning line decreases in the order of Off,
Medium1, Medium2, and Fast.
Frame Rate -4 to 4 Sets the number of frames in the Power Flow by combining the
(Compound) number of scanning lines in the B mode and that in the Flow
mode when Spatial Compound is On.
Frame Rate -4 to 4 Sets the number of frames in the Power Flow mode by
(Trapezoid) combining the number of scanning lines of B mode images and
that of Power Flow mode images during Trapezoidal Scan.
Average (Flow) Low Sets the number of transmission low in Power Flow mode.
Medium Sets the number of transmissions at medium level in Power
Flow mode.
High Sets the number of transmissions high in Power Flow mode.
Velocity Range 0.62 to 227.68 Sets the speed range (cm/s) of Power Flow mode.
(Flow)
Color Map, Abdom Sets the combination group of the color flow velocity and
Group Cardio dispersion (Color Map) in the Power Flow mode.
Vascular
Power
eFlow
Directional Power
Directional eFlow
User

7-104 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

Item Setting Function

Color Map, A Sets the Color Map default.
Setting B
C
D
E
Wall Motion Off Turns Off wall motion noise cutting.
Reduction 1 to 15 Sets the level for cutting wall motion noise. The higher the
value, the higher the noise removal level.
Display Priority Color Sets the color display of the area where a black-and-white
image and a color flow velocity display are overlapped.
Both Displays both black-and-white and color images.
Color (TDI) Sets the color display of the area where a black-and-white
image and a color flow velocity display are overlapped in the
TDI Power Flow mode.
Both (TDI) Cuts off color information and displays black-and-white
images preferentially if the low flow velocity components of
the color information are large in the TDI Power Flow mode.
Disp Prio Lev, 0 to 127 Sets the threshold for the black-and-white information display.
B/W
Disp prio Lev, 1 to 127 Sets the threshold for the color information display.
Color
Directional Off Sets Power Flow as the startup image for the Power Flow
(Flow) mode.
On Sets Directional Power Flow as the startup image for the Power
Flow mode.
Frame Rate Off Displays Power Flow mode images in every interframe.
Accel On Displays an image having continuity between frames.
PFD Range Low Sets the dynamic range for Power Flow mode low.
Medium Sets the dynamic range for Power Flow mode medium.
High Sets the dynamic range for Power Flow mode high.
Color Line Off Displays data from color reception lines.
Correlation Low Displays an image by adding a line between color reception
lines. This function enables smoother image display.
High Displays an image by adding multiple lines between color
reception lines. This function enables smoother image display
than Low.
Flow Edge Off Turns Off the processing of color pixel information.
On Displays an image by processing color pixel information to
prevent colors from extending over the tissues.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-105

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-24-2 IP Select (Power) setting

1. In the Tree view, select the + mark displayed in front of Power Flow.
→ The IP Select (Power) is displayed.

2. Select IP Select (Power).

3. Change the item settings.
Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
4. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

IP Select (Power) setting items

Item Setting Function

No. 1 to 8 Sets a default No. for IP Select (Power).
Frame Corre Off Turns Off the correlation between adjacent frames.
1 to 15 Sets the correlation of the frame.
Smoothing Off Turns the correlation between scan directions at the same depth
to Off.
1 to 15 Correlates scan directions at the same depth and sets the level
to create a smooth image.
Image Select Penetration Sets the default sensitivity in D mode.
(Power) Standard
Resolution
Filter (Flow) 1 to 6 Sets the filter to reduce the wall motion.

7-106 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-25 eFlow

Makes settings for the display of the eFlow mode images.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select eFlow from the Tree View.
→ The eFlow screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-107

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-25-1 eFlow setting items

Item Setting Function

DVA (FLOW) 0 to 100 Sets the transmission output in the eFlow mode in 1% steps.

Flow Gain -63 to 63 Sets the Flow gain value in 1dB step when starting up the
eFlow mode.
B Gain Comp -30 ～ 30 Sets the correction level for the decrease in brightness caused
(Flow) by the restriction based on the difference in B Gain between
eFlow On and eFlow Off (in 1 dB steps).
Image/Freq Penetration Sets the frequency of a probe low in the eFlow mode.
(Flow) Standard Sets the frequency of a probe slightly low in eFlow mode.
Resolution Sets the frequency of a probe slightly high in eFlow mode.
High Sets the frequency of a probe high in eFlow mode.
Frame Rate -4 to 4 Sets the number of frames in the eFlow mode by combining the
(Flow) number of scanning lines of B mode images and the number of
scanning lines of eFlow mode images.
Frame Rate Off Sets the combination of the number of scanning lines of Power
(B+F/D) Medium1 Flow in the B (Flow)/D simultaneous mode and the number of
Medium2 scanning lines in the B mode.
Fast The number of scanning lines decreases in the order of Off,
Medium1, Medium2, and Fast.
Frame Rate -4 to 4 Sets the number of frames in the eFlow by combining the
(Compound) number of scanning lines in the B mode and that in the Flow
mode when Spatial Compound is On.
Frame Rate -4 to 4 Sets the number of frames in the eFlow by combining the
(Trapezoid) number of scanning lines in the B mode and that in the Flow
mode when Trapezoidal Scan is On.
Average (Flow) Low Sets the number of transmission low in Flow mode.
Medium Sets the number of transmissions at medium level in eFlow
mode.
High Sets the number of transmissions high in eFlow mode.
Velocity Range 0.62 to 227.68 Sets the speed range (cm/s) of eFlow mode.
(Flow)
Color Map, Abdom Sets the combination group of the color flow velocity and
Group Cardio dispersion (Color Map) in the eFlow mode.
Vascular
Power
eFlow
Directional Power
Directional eFlow
User

7-108 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

Item Setting Function

Color Map, A Sets the Color Map.
Setting B
C
D
E
Directional Off Sets the eFlow as the startup image for the eFlow mode.
(Flow) On Sets the Directional eFlow as the startup image for the eFlow
mode.
Frame Rate Off Displays eFlow mode images in every interframe.
Accel On Displays an image having continuity between frames.
PFD Range Low Sets the dynamic range for eFlow mode to Low.
Medium Sets the dynamic range for eFlow mode to Medium.
High Sets the dynamic range for eFlow mode to High.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-109

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-25-2 IP Select (eFlow) setting

1. In the Tree view, select the + mark displayed in front of eFlow.

→ The IP Select (eFlow) is displayed.

2. Select IP Select (eFlow).

3. Change the item settings.
Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
4. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

IP Select (eFlow) setting items

Item Setting Function

No. 1 to 8 Sets a default No. for IP Select (Power).
Frame Corre Off Turns Off the correlation between adjacent frames.
1 to 15 Sets the correlation of the frame.
Smoothing Off Turns the correlation between scan directions at the same depth
to Off.
1 to 15 Correlates scan directions at the same depth and sets the level
to create a smooth image.
Image Select Penetration Sets the default sensitivity in D mode.
(eFlow) Standard
Resolution
Filter (Flow) 1 to 6 Sets the filter to reduce the wall motion.

7-110 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-26 Tissue Doppler

Makes settings for the display of the Tissue Doppler mode.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Tissue Doppler from the Tree View.
→ The Tissue Doppler screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-111

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-26-1 Tissue Doppler setting items

Item Setting Function

DVA (PW) 0 to 100 Sets the transmission output in the TDI PW mode in 1%
steps.
Dop Gain (PW) 0 to 127 Sets the gain of the TDI PW mode in 1 dB step.

Dop Filter (PW) Auto Sets a filter value corresponding to a flow velocity range.
Manual Sets control with a fixed filter value.
Dop Filter (PW), 1 to 12 Sets the level for automatically setting a filter value when
AUTO Drop Filter (PW) is set to Auto.

Dop Filter (PW), 50 Sets the filter value to be fixed when Dop Filter (PW) is set
MANU 100 to Manual.
200
400
800
1600
Image/Freq (PW) Penetration Sets the frequency of a probe low in TDI PW mode.
Standard Sets the frequency of a probe slightly low in TDI PW
mode.
Resolution Sets the frequency of a probe slightly high in TDI PW
mode.
High Sets the frequency of a probe high in TDI PW mode.
Velocity Range (PW) 6.23 to 398.44 Sets the speed range (cm/s) of the TDI PW mode.

Velocity Range (PW), 6.23 to 398.44 Sets the speed range (cm/s) of the TDI PW mode.
Image Optimizer
Sample Volume 0.5 to 20.0 Sets the size of the sample volume in the TDI PW mode in
mm. The number of steps varies depending on the size.
Zoom Lock Off Zooms an image regardless of the display position of the
sample volume.
On Zooms an image with the display position of the sample
volume as the center.
Scale Display Off Turns off the flow velocity value display on a Doppler
scale.
On Turns on the flow velocity value display on a Doppler
scale.
Base Line Position -16 to 16 Sets the position of the baseline for TDI mode images in
increments of 1 step.
Spectrum Invert Normal Displays the blood flow toward the probe upward in D
mode.
Invert Displays the blood flow toward the probe downward in D
mode.

7-112 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

Item Setting Function

Invert Axis Base Line Sets the baseline as the base for spectrum inversion.

Center Sets the center of the image as the base for spectrum
inversion.
Color Map (D) Gray Displays TDI mode image without coloring.
A Sets the image display with the gradation between the blue
and orange colors.
B Sets the image display with blue color.
C Sets the image display with blue color lighter than B.
D Sets the image display with orange color.
E Sets the image display with brown brightness
characteristics.
F Sets the image display with lighter brown brightness
characteristics than E.
G Sets the image display with blue and yellow brightness
characteristics.
B Refresh 1 Sets a renewal interval of B mode image in simultaneous
2 display of B + Flow /M+ Flow, etc.
4
6
8
Angle Correct Display Off Hides the angle mark.

On Turns on the angle mark display.

Angle Correction -80 to 80 Sets the default value of angle correction (in 1 degree
steps) in D mode.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-113

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-26-2 IP Select (D) setting

1. In the Tree view, select the + mark displayed in front of Tissue Doppler.
→ IP Select (D) is displayed.

2. Select IP Select (D).

3. Change the item settings.
Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
4. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

Related links:
IP Select (D) setting items → p.7-114

IP Select (D) setting items

7-114 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

Item Setting Function

No. 1 to 8 Sets a default No. for IP Select.
Contrast 1 to 16 Sets the Contrast.
Image Select (D) Penetration Sets the default sensitivity in D mode.
Standard
Resolution
Comp Curve (D) Off Sets Comp Curve (D) to Off.
1 to 7 Sets the weak signals to be suppressed in order to display a
clear Doppler pattern.
Resolution Time Sets the direction of resolution to be improved for a Doppler
Frequency spectrum.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-115

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-27 Tissue Flow

Makes setting for the display of Tissue Flow mode.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Tissue Flow from the Tree View.
→ The Tissue Flow screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-116 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-27-1 Tissue Flow setting items

Item Setting Function

DVA (FLOW) 0 to 100 Sets the transmission output in the TDI Flow mode in 1%
steps.
Flow Gain 0 to 127 Sets the Tissue Flow gain value in 1 dB steps when
starting up the TDI Flow mode.
B Gain Comp (Flow) -30 to 30 Sets the correction level for the decrease in brightness
caused by the power restriction based on the difference in
B Gain between Tissue Flow On and Tissue Flow Off (in 1
dB steps).
Image/Freq (Flow) Penetration Sets the frequency of a probe low in TDI Flow mode.
Standard Sets the frequency of a probe slightly low in TDI Flow
mode.
Resolution Sets the frequency of a probe slightly high in TDI Flow
mode.
High Sets the frequency of a probe high in TDI Flow mode.
Frame Rate (Flow) -4 to 4 Sets the number of frames in the TDI Flow mode by
combining the number of scanning lines of B mode
images and the number of scanning lines of specified
mode images.
Frame Rate (B+F/D) Off Sets the combination of number of scanning lines of TDI
Flow in the B (Flow)/D simultaneous mode and the
Medium1
number of scanning lines in the B mode.
Medium2
The number of scanning lines decreases in the order of
Fast Off, Medium1, Medium2, and Fast.
Average (Flow) Low Sets the number of transmissions low in TDI Flow mode.
Medium Sets the number of transmissions at medium level in TDI
Flow mode.
High Sets the number of transmissions high in TDI Flow mode.
Velocity Range 0.62 to 227.68 Sets the speed range (cm/s) of TDI Flow mode.
(Flow)
Color Map, Group Abdom Sets the combination group of the color flow velocity and
Cardio dispersion (Color Map) in the TDI Flow mode.
Vascular
Power
eFlow
Directional Power
Directional eFlow
User
Color Map, Setting A Sets the Color Map.
B
C
D
E

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-117

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

Item Setting Function

TDI Display Type A Sets the TDI as the Coding method in the TDI Flow mode.

B Sets Normal as the Coding method in the TDI Flow mode.

Display Priority Color Sets the color display of the area where a black-and-white
image and a color flow velocity display are overlapped.
Both Displays both black-and-white and color images.
Color (TDI) Sets the color display of the area where a black-and-white
image and a color flow velocity display are overlapped in
the TDI Flow mode.
Both (TDI) Cuts off color information and displays black-and-white
images preferentially if the low flow velocity components
of the color information are large in the TDI Flow mode.
Disp Prio Lev, B/W 0 to 127 Sets the threshold for the black-and-white information
display.
Disp Prio Lev, Color 1 to 127 Sets the threshold for the color information display.

Color Polarity Normal Displays the blood flowing toward the probe in red and
that flowing away from the probe in blue.
Invert Displays the blood flowing toward the probe in blue and
that flowing away from the probe in red.
Rejection (Flow) 0 to 31 Sets the level of low flow velocity components to be cut
from the color information.
Frame Rate Accel Off Displays TDI Flow mode images in every interframe.
On Displays an image having continuity between frames.
Color Line Off Displays data from color reception lines.
Correlation Low Displays an image by adding a line between color
reception lines. This function enables smoother image
display.
High Displays an image by adding multiple lines between color
reception lines. This function enables smoother image
display than Low.

7-118 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-27-2 IP Select (Flow) setting

1. In the Tree view, select the + mark displayed in front of Tissue Flow.
→ IP Select (Flow) is displayed.

2. Select IP Select (Flow).

3. Change the item settings.
Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
4. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-119

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

IP Select (Flow) setting items

Item Setting Function

No. 1 to 8 Sets a default No. for IP Select (eFlow).
Frame Corre Off Turns Off the correlation between adjacent frames.
1 to 15 Sets the correlation of the frame.
Smoothing Off Displays an image without correlating scan directions at the
same depth.
1 to 15 Sets the level for correlating scan directions at the same depth
to create a smooth image.
Image Select Penetration Changes the sensitivity in D mode.
(Flow) Standard
Resolution
Filter (Flow) 1, 2 Sets the level for cutting high velocity components to remove
the blood flow information.

Related links:
IP Select (Flow) setting items → p.7-120

7-120 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-28 Tissue Power Flow

Makes settings for the display of the Tissue Power Flow mode.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select Tissue Power Flow from the Tree View.
→ The Tissue Power Flow screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-121

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-28-1 Tissue Power Flow setting items

Item Setting Function

DVA (FLOW) 0 to 100 Sets the transmission output in TDI Power Flow mode in 1%
steps.
Flow Gain -63 to 63 Sets the Flow gain value in 1 dB steps when starting up the TDI
Power Flow mode.
B Gain Comp -30 to 30 Sets the correction level for the decrease in brightness caused
(Flow) by the power restriction based on the difference in B Gain
between Tissue Power Flow On and Tissue Power Flow Off (in
1 dB steps).
Image/Freq Penetration Sets the frequency of a probe low in TDI Power Flow mode.
(Flow) Standard Sets the frequency of a probe slightly low in TDI Power Flow
mode.
Resolution Sets the frequency of a probe slightly high in TDI Power Flow
mode.
High Sets the frequency of a probe high in TDI Power Flow mode.
Frame Rate -4 to 4 Sets the number of frames in the specified mode by combining
(Flow) the number of scanning lines of B mode images and the number
of scanning lines of TDI Power Flow mode images.
Frame Rate Off Sets the combination of the number of scanning lines of TDI
(B+F/D) Medium1 Power Flow in the B (Flow)/D simultaneous mode and the
Medium2 number of scanning lines in the B mode.
Fast The number of scanning lines decreases in the order of Off,
Medium1, Medium2, and Fast.
Average (Flow) Low Sets the number of transmissions low in TDI Power Flow
mode.
Medium Sets the number of transmissions at medium level in TDI
Power Flow mode.
High Sets the number of transmissions high in TDI Power Flow
mode.
Velocity Range 0.62 to 227.68 Sets the speed range (cm/s) of TDI Power Flow mode.
(Flow)
Color Map, Abdom Sets the combination group of the color flow velocity and
Group Cardio dispersion (Color Map) in the Power Flow mode.
Vascular
Power
eFlow
Directional Power
Directional eFlow
User

7-122 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

Item Setting Function

Color Map, A Sets the Color Map.
Setting B
C
D
E
Display Priority Color Sets the color display of the area where a black-and-white
image and a color flow velocity display are overlapped.
Both Displays both black-and-white and color images.
Color (TDI) Sets the color display of the area where a black-and-white
image and a color flow velocity display are overlapped in the
TDI Power Flow mode.
Both (TDI) Cuts off color information and displays black-and-white
images preferentially if the low flow velocity components of
the color information are large in the TDI Power Flow mode.
Disp Prio Lev, 0 to 127 Sets the threshold for the black-and-white information display.
B/W
Disp Prio Lev, 1 to 127 Sets the threshold for the color information display.
Color
Directional Off Sets the Power Flow as the startup image for the Power Flow
(Flow) mode.
On Sets Directional Power Flow as the startup image for the Power
Flow mode.
Frame Rate Off Displays Flow mode images in every interframe.
Accel On Displays an image having continuity between frames.
Color Line Off Displays data from color reception lines.
Correlation Low Displays an image by adding a line between color reception
lines. This function enables smoother image display.
High Displays an image by adding multiple lines between color
reception lines. This function enables smoother image display
than Low.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-123

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-28-2 IP Select (Power) setting

1. In the Tree view, select the + mark displayed in front of Tissue Power Flow.
→ IP Select (Power) is displayed.

2. Select IP Select (Power).

3. Change the item settings.
Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
4. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

IP Select (Power) setting items

7-124 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

Item Setting Function

No. 1 to 8 Sets a default No. for IP Select (eFlow).
Frame Corre Off Turns Off the correlation between adjacent frames.
1 to15 Sets the correlation of the frame.
Smoothing Off Turns the correlation between scan directions at the same depth
to Off.
1 to 15 Sets the level for correlating scan directions at the same depth
to create a smooth image.
Image Select Penetration Sets the sensitivity in D mode.
(Power) Standard
Resolution
Filter (Flow) 1, 2 Sets the level for cutting high velocity components to remove
the blood flow information.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-125

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-29 FAM

Makes settings for the display of the Free Angular M mode.

1. Select Preset key.

2. Select Set-Up.
→ The preset setting selection list is displayed.
3. Select Preset from the Name list.
→ Preset Set-Up Menu of the selected preset is displayed.
4. Select FAM from the Tree View.
→ The FAM screen is displayed.

5. Change the item settings.

Resetting item settings to the default
Select Initialize.
6. Select Exit.
→ This finalizes the changed settings and returns to the preset setting selection list.
Select Cancel to discard the changed settings and return to the preset setting selection list.

7-126 MN1-5855 rev.1

 7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-5-29-1 FAM setting items

Item Setting Function

Multi FAM 2 It sets the number of FAM cursors to be displayed.
3
MAG (FAM) 0.5 Sets the display magnification of M mode images in
0.75 proportion to B mode images.
1.00
1.50
2.00
Contrast (FAM) 1 to 16 Sets the contrast of the M mode image.

Gamma (FAM) Off Turns Off the change in brightness characteristics of the M
mode image.
1 to 4 Sets the change in brightness characteristics of the M mode
image.
PSAX Off Sets one FAM cursor at a time.

On Sets to the cursor for short axis cross-section.

Trace Fit Off Changes the display magnification of the M mode image
during the simultaneous display of multiple FAM cursors
when MAG (FAM) is selected.
On Displays the M mode image according to the display depth
of the B mode image. The MAG (FAM) display range is
fixed at ×1.50 when two cursors are displayed and ×2.00
when three FAM cursors are displayed.

MN1-5855 rev.1 7-127

7 Preset
7-5 Preset Set-Up Menu

7-128 MN1-5855 rev.1

 INDEX

INDEX
Symbols A Archive Group 7-13
Archive Group 1 6-2
Archive Group 2 6-2
+ (Caliper) 6-3 AB 2-7, 2-8
Archive Group 3 6-2
1B Format Size (W) 7-49 Accession 2-6
Area Lock 6-38, 7-58
1P Position 7-87 Acquire Method 6-38, 7-65
Audio Volume 6-39
2B 6-2 Acquire Mode 6-38, 7-65
Auto Angle Correct 6-22
2B Format Size (W) 7-49 Active (B1) 6-5
Auto Angle Correction 6-22
3D 8-22 Active (B2) 6-5
Auto Comment Off 7-60
3D Brightness 8-22 Active (B3) 6-5
Auto Focus Type 7-87
3D Brightness (Inv.) 8-44 Active (B4) 6-5
Auto Image Delete 7-34
3D Brightness (Normal) 8-40 Active FAM Off 3-25, 6-17
Auto Input (Review) 7-9
3D Display Data 8-32, 8-51 Active Free Angular M-Mode Channel
Auto Loop 7-65
3D Edge Cont. 8-22, 8-45 Off 6-17
Auto Select (Review) 7-9
3D Edge Contrast 8-22 Adaptive Image Processing 3-15, 6-6,
Average (Flow) 6-29, 7-100, 7-104,
3D Edge Sens. 8-22, 8-45 6-24
7-108, 7-117
3D Edge Sensitivity 8-22 Adaptive STC 3-13, 7-79
AVI CODEC 7-9
3D Gamma 8-22 Address 7-24
3D Gamma (Inv.) 8-44 AGC
3D Gamma (Normal) 8-40 IP Select 7-84
3D Image Display 8-23, 8-44 IP Select (M) 7-85 B
3D Layout 8-40 AGC (B) 6-5
3D Loop Menu 8-23 AGC (M) 6-17 B 6-2
3D Loop Menu Off 8-35 Age 2-5 B (M) Gain 7-98
3D Loop State 8-35 Agent 2-11 B Format Size (H) 7-49
3D Orientation 8-23, 8-40 AIP 3-15, 6-6, 7-81 B Gain Comp (Flow) 6-30, 7-100, 7-104,
3D Reset 8-23, 8-37 AIP Edge Sens 6-5, 6-6 7-108, 7-117, 7-122
3D ROI 8-23, 8-32 AIP Edge Sensitivity 6-6 B Gain Compensation (Flow) 6-30
3D ROI Height 8-49, 8-51 AIP Level 6-6 B Refresh 6-40, 7-92, 7-113
3D ROI Position 8-49, 8-51 AIP Resolution 3-15, 6-6 B Shift 7-55
3D Scan 7-44, 8-32, 8-48 Alarm 7-9 B SYNC Mode 6-40
3D Scan Menu 8-23 Angle Correct 6-22 B. L. Posi (Img Opti) 6-23
3D Scan mode 8-32 Angle Correct Display 7-96, 7-113 B/* Format 6-40
3D Smooth 8-24, 8-40 Angle Correct Reverse 6-22 B/*Format 7-49
3D Surface 8-24, 8-45 Angle Correction 6-22, 7-96, 7-113 B/*Format Size 7-49
3D View Direction 8-24, 8-44 Angle Correction Reverse 6-22 B/B 3-3
3D View Guide 8-24, 8-45 Angle Gain 6-7 B/Sync Mode 6-40
3D View Select 8-40 Angle Gain Type 7-79 B1 (Short Cut) 6-54
3D Zoom 8-41 Angle Sel (Punc) 6-7 B1 Mode 6-54
3D Zoom Link 8-44 Angle Select (Punc) 7-62 B2 (Short Cut) 6-54
4B Format Size (W) 7-49 Angle Select (Puncture) 6-7 B2 Mode 6-54
Annotation Dic. Type 7-60 B3 (Short Cut) 6-54
Annotation Dictionary 7-9, 7-60 B3 Mode 6-54
Appl. Entity 7-18, 7-21, 7-26, 7-30, 7-33 B4 (Short Cut) 6-54
B4 Mode 6-54

MN1-5855 rev.1
INDEX

B5 Mode 6-54 Character Size 6-41, 7-60 Custom-Foot 7-44, 7-74

Base Line Position 7-91, 7-112 Cine Division 3-3, 3-32, 7-55 Custom-Keyboard 7-44, 7-75
Base Line Position (Image Opti) 6-23 Clip Only BW 8-32, 8-51 CW 6-2
Base Line Reset (D) 6-22 Clipper Type 8-25, 8-44 Cycle Day 2-8
Base Line Reset (Flow) 6-29 Color 7-17
Base Line Shift (D) 6-22 Color Line Correlation 6-30, 7-101,
Base Line Shift (Flow) 6-29 7-105, 7-118, 7-123 D
Baseline Shift 3-34 Color Map (3D) 8-33, 8-51
BbH 3-16, 6-7, 7-49 Color Map (B, M) 7-55 D. Trace 6-24
BBT 2-7, 2-8 Color Map (B/M) 6-9 D. Trace Direction 6-24, 7-96
Beam Processing 6-7, 7-79 Color Map (D) 6-23, 7-92, 7-113 D. Trace Display 7-96
Beam Steer (B) 6-7, 7-52 Color Map (Flow) 6-31 D. Trace Display Items 7-96
Beam Steer (B/F/D) 6-39 Color Map Type (Flow) 6-31 D. Trace Level 6-24, 7-96
Beam Steer (D) 6-23, 7-52 Color Map, Group 7-100, 7-104, 7-108, D. Trace Locate 6-25
Beam Steer (F/D) 6-39 7-117, 7-122 D. Trace Smooth 6-25, 7-96
Beam Steer (Flow) 6-29, 7-52 Color Map, Setting 7-101, 7-105, 7-109, D1 Mode 6-54
Beam Steer Reverse 6-39 7-117, 7-123 D2 Mode 6-54
Beam Steer Reverse (B) 6-8 Color Polarity 6-31, 7-101, 7-118 D3 Mode 6-54
Beam Steer Reverse (B/F/D) 6-39 Combined Calibration 2-10 D4 Mode 6-54
Beam Steer Reverse (D) 6-23 Comment 6-2 D5 Mode 6-54
Beam Steer Reverse (FD) 6-39 Comment Position (X) 7-60 Data Management 2-4
Biopsy Select 6-8 Comment Position (Y) 7-60 Date 7-6
Biplane Label 7-62 Common Preset 7-5 Date Format 7-6
Biplane Line 7-62 Common2 7-8 Date of birth 2-5
BMI 2-7, 2-8, 2-9 Common3 7-10 DDD 6-32
Body Mark 6-2, 7-44, 7-67 Comp Curve (D) 6-24 Default Func. of D SW 7-73
Body Mark Location 6-39 IP Select (D) 7-115 Default Func. of F SW 7-73
Body Mark Method 7-67 Comply to VistA 2-14 Delete Object 7-34
Body Mark Reset 6-39 Compound Angle 6-9, 7-81 Department 7-24
Body Part Examined 2-10 Compression Curve (D) 6-24 Depth 3-8
Border Frame 8-25, 8-40 Compression Quality 7-9 Depth Attenu. (Inv.) 8-44
Boyd 7-60 Connect 7-30, 7-33 Depth Attenu. (Normal) 8-44
Brightness Level 6-8, 7-81 Contrast Depth Attenuation 8-25
Brightness Reset 6-8 IP Select 7-84 DEPTH/ZOOM 3-9, 3-10
Broadband Harmonics Imaging 3-16, 6-7 IP Select (D) 7-115 Description 2-10
BSA 2-9 IP Select (M) 7-85 Destination B (M) Gain 7-98
BSA Equation 7-60 Contrast (B) 6-9 DICOM File Type 7-9
Built in System 2-11 Contrast (D) 6-24 DICOM-Address 7-24
Contrast (FAM) 6-17, 7-127 DICOM-Printer 7-25
Contrast (M) 6-17 DICOM-Server 7-20
C Contrast/Dynamic Range 7-7 DICOM-SR 7-29
Counter 6-41 DICOM-Store, Send 7-16
Cursor Display 7-52
Capture Mode (Flow) 6-30 Direct D/Flow/Print 7-6
Cursor Position 7-52
Capture Time 7-58 Direct Send 7-6
Cursor/B.L.S 6-2
Capture Time (Flow) 6-30 Direct to B 3-2, 7-6
Curve Shape 8-25, 8-47
CD-R 7-15 Directional (Flow) 6-32, 7-105, 7-109,
Custom SW 7-44, 7-70
C-ECHO 7-30, 7-33 7-123
Custom SW2 7-44, 7-72
Change Active View 8-25, 8-37 Disp Prio Lev, B/W 7-101, 7-105, 7-118,

MN1-5855 rev.1
 INDEX

7-123 Dynamic Slow Motion Display 6-52 F

Disp Prio Lev, Color 7-101, 7-105, 7-118, Dynamic Slow Motion Display (ECG)
7-123 6-52
FAM 3-24, 6-2, 7-44, 7-90, 7-126
Disp Priority B/M Level (Flow) 6-33 Dynamic Slow Motion Display (Memory)
Filter (D) 6-25
Disp Priority Color Level (Flow) 6-33 6-52
Filter (Flow) 6-33
Disp-B, M 7-44, 7-54 Dynamic Slow Motion Display Memory
IP Select (eFlow) 7-110
Disp-D, Flow 7-44, 7-57 Size 6-52
IP Select (Flow) 7-102, 7-120
Display Dynamic Slow Motion Display Refresh
IP Select (Power) 7-106, 7-125
Body Mark 7-67 6-52
Filter Control (D) 6-25
Display Mode 7-49 Dynamic Slow Motion Display Speed
Find 2-4, 2-16
Display Mode, Flow 7-49 6-53
Flow 6-2, 7-44, 7-99
Display Mode, TDI 7-49
Flow 3D 7-44, 8-50
Display Priority 7-101, 7-105, 7-118,
Flow Area (Height) 7-50
7-123 E Flow Area (W), B (F) 7-50
Display Priority (Flow) 6-32
Flow Edge 6-33, 7-101, 7-105
Display Priority B/M Level (Flow) 6-33 ECG Cycle 6-41, 7-65 Flow Gain 7-98, 7-100, 7-104, 7-108,
Display Priority Color Level (Flow) 6-33 ECG Display 6-42 7-117, 7-122
Display1 7-44, 7-48 ECG Display (B) 7-77 Flow Opacity Control 8-33, 8-52
Display2 7-44, 7-51 ECG Display (Sweep) 7-77 Flow1 (Short Cut) 6-54
Displayed Color (3D) 8-26, 8-40 ECG Drift Filter 6-41 Flow1 Mode 6-54
Dop Filter (CW) 7-91 ECG Invert 6-42, 7-77 Flow2 (Short Cut) 6-54
Dop Filter (CW), AUTO 7-91 ECG Posi 4-2, 6-42 Flow2 Mode 6-54
Dop Filter (CW), MANU 7-91 ECG POSI (B) 7-77 Flow3 (Short Cut) 6-54
Dop Filter (PW) 7-91, 7-112 ECG Posi (ECG Position) 6-42 Flow3 Mode 6-54
Dop Filter (PW), AUTO 7-112 ECG POSI (Sweep) 7-77 Flow4 (Short Cut) 6-54
Dop Filter (PW), MANU 7-91, 7-112 ECG SENS 7-77 Flow4 Mode 6-54
Dop Gain (CW) 7-91 ECG Sens 4-2, 6-42 Flow5 (Short Cut) 6-54
Dop Gain (PW) 7-91, 7-112 ECG Sensitivity 6-42 Flow5 Mode 6-54
Doppler1 7-44, 7-90 ECG SYNC 6-42 FMPR 8-26, 8-37
Doppler2 7-44, 7-95 ECG Sync 6-42 FMPR Navigator 8-26, 8-45
Drift Filter 7-77 Echo Erase 6-18, 7-55 Focus 7-44, 7-86
DSD (ECG) 6-52 ECTO 2-7, 2-8 Focus (B) 6-10, 7-87
DSD (Memory) 6-52 EDC 2-7 Focus (BbH) 7-87
DSD Memory Size 6-52, 7-53 Edge Sens Font Size (Meas. Results) 7-63
DSD Refresh 6-52 AIP Level 7-85 Format Type (Single) 7-65
DSD Speed 6-53, 7-53 eFlow 6-2, 7-44, 7-107 Frame Corre
Du Bois 7-60 EGA 2-7 IP Select 7-84
Dual Dynamic Display 6-32 Element Select 6-42 IP Select (Flow) 7-102, 7-120
DVA (B, B/M, M) 7-78 End Study 6-3 IP Select (Power) 7-106, 7-110, 7-125
DVA (BbH) 7-78 Enter SW / F16 7-73 Frame Corre (B) 6-10
DVA (CW) 7-91 Erase Area Reset 8-26 Frame Corre (Flow) 6-33
DVA (FLOW) 7-100, 7-104, 7-122 Erase Tool 8-26 Frame Corre Type 6-10, 7-79
DVA (Flow) 7-108, 7-117 Export Image File 8-26, 8-35 Frame Correlation (B) 6-10
DVA (PW) 7-91, 7-112 EXT 6-2 Frame Correlation (Flow) 6-33
DVA (THE) 7-78 Extend F-View 6-9 Frame Correlation Type 6-10
DVD 7-15 Extended Field-View 6-9 Frame Rate 7-79
DVD Remain 6-41, 7-8
Frame Rate (B) 6-10
Dynamic Range (FAM) 3-28

MN1-5855 rev.1
INDEX

Frame Rate (B+F/D) 7-100, 7-104, 7-108, GRAV 2-7, 2-8 Image Func RT3D 2 6-54
7-117, 7-122 Grid Display Type 7-62 Image Func RT3D 3 6-54
Frame Rate (BbH) 7-79 Image Func RT3D 4 6-54
Frame Rate (Compound) 7-100, 7-104, Image Func RT3D 5 6-54
7-108 H Image Function RT3D 1 6-54
Frame Rate (Flow) 6-34, 7-100, 7-104, Image Function RT3D 2 6-54
7-108, 7-117, 7-122 Image Function RT3D 3 6-54
Heart Rate Stability 6-44
Frame Rate (Trapezoid) 7-81, 7-100, Image Function RT3D 4 6-54
Heart Rate Stability Display (Average)
7-104, 7-108 Image Function RT3D 5 6-54
6-44
Frame Rate Accel 7-101, 7-105, 7-109, Image Optimizer 6-11, 7-44, 7-97
Heart Rate Stability Display (Continuous)
7-118, 7-123 Image Optimizer Velocity Range (CW)
6-44
Frame Rate Accelerator 6-34 7-92
Height 2-5
Frame Smoothing 7-79 Image Optimizer Velocity Range (PW)
High Level 8-42, 8-52
Free Angular M mode 3-24 7-91
High PRF 7-92
Free Axis of MPR 8-26, 8-37 HIS (Hospital Information System) 2-16 Image Polarity 7-58
Free Axis of MPR Navigator 8-26 Holding Time 7-32 Image Polarity (D) 6-26
Freeze 6-3 Hospital Name 7-6 Image Rotation 7-55
Freeze G.Knob 7-52 HR Stability Disp (Avg.) 7-77 Image Rotation (B) 6-12
Freeze Trigger 6-25, 7-96 HR Stability Display 6-44, 7-77 Image Select (D) 6-26
Frequency Information 7-7 HR Stability Display (Avg.) 6-44 IP Select (D) 7-115
Front Cut Plane 8-26 HR Stability Display (Conti.) 6-44 Image Select (eFlow)
FTC (B) 6-10, 7-81 HR Stability Display (Conti) 7-77 IP Select (eFlow) 7-110
FTC (BbH) 7-81 Hum Filter 7-7 Image Select (Flow) 6-35
FTC (M) 6-18, 7-81 IP Select (Flow) 7-102, 7-120
Full Attributes 2-11 Image Select (Power)
Full M/D 3-20 IP Select (Power) 7-106, 7-125
I
Function indicator 8-27, 8-40 Image Type 2-10
Image/Freq (B/M) 7-79
ID 6-3 Image/Freq (BbH) 7-79
ID BMI 2-9
G Image/Freq (Flow) 7-98, 7-100, 7-104,
ID BSA 2-9
7-108, 7-117, 7-122
ID Gynecology 2-7, 2-8
GA 2-7 Image/Freq (PW) 7-91, 7-112
ID Input 2-4, 7-60
GA/EDC Calculation 7-60 Image/Freq (THE) 7-79
ID Obstetrics 2-7, 2-8
Gain (B) 7-78 Image-B, M1 7-44, 7-78
ID Screen Option 2-4, 2-13
Gain (BbH) 7-79 Image-B, M2 7-44, 7-80
ID Urology 2-8
Gain (M) 7-79 Imaging Information 6-44, 7-62
ID, Comment 7-44, 7-59
Gain (THE) 7-79 Info Display Position 7-62
IHE/Auto Delete 7-31
Gamma (FAM) 6-18, 7-127 Initial Mode 8-41
Image Direction (L/R) 7-55
Glossy Level 8-27 Inversion Mode 8-27, 8-44
Image Direction (LR) 6-11
Glossy Level (Inv.) 8-44 Invert 6-2
Image Direction (UL) 6-11
Glossy Level (Normal) 8-44 Invert Axis 7-92, 7-113
Image Freq (B/M) 3-1, 6-11
Graphic Color 6-43, 7-62 Invert Link 6-45, 7-52
Image Freq (D) 6-26
Graphic Editor 6-43 IP Address 7-18, 7-21, 7-26, 7-30, 7-33
Image Freq (Flow) 6-34
Graphic Editor B 6-43 IP Regist (B) 6-12
Image Frequency (B/M) 6-11
Graphic Editor G 6-43 IP Regist (B) Initialize 6-12
Image Frequency (D) 6-26
Graphic Editor R 6-44 IP Regist (B) Registration 6-12
Image Frequency (Flow) 6-34
Graphic Information 7-61 IP Regist (D) 6-26
Image Func RT3D 1 6-54
Graphics 7-44, 7-61 IP Regist (D) Initialize 6-27

MN1-5855 rev.1
 INDEX

IP Regist (D) Registration 6-27 Loop Direction 8-35, 8-40 MULTI GAIN 3-23, 3-33, 3-40
IP Regist (F) Initialize 6-35 Loop Mode 6-45, 7-66 Multi Gain 3-23
IP Regist (F) Registration 6-35 Loop Speed 8-35, 8-41 Multi Slice Imaging 8-37
IP Regist (Flow) 6-35 Low Level 8-42, 8-52 Multi Slice Imaging Distance 8-38
IP Regist (M) 6-18 Multi Slice Imaging Layout 8-27, 8-37
IP Regist (M) Initialize 6-18 Multi Slice Imaging Menu 8-27
IP Regist (M) Registration 6-19 M Multi Slice Imaging Number 8-38
IP Registration (B) 6-12 Multi Slice Imaging Prev/Next 8-28, 8-37
IP Registration (B) Initialize 6-12 Multi Slice Imaging Slice Direction 8-28,
M 6-2
IP Registration (B) Registration 6-12 8-38
M WINDOW 3-22
IP Registration (D) 6-26 Multi Slice Imaging Slice Distance 8-28
M1 6-3
IP Registration (D) Initialize 6-27 Multi Slice Imaging Slice Number 8-28
M1 (Short Cut) 6-54
IP Registration (D) Registration 6-27 Multi VOL Store 8-28
M1 Mode 6-54
IP Registration (Flow) 6-35 M2 6-3
IP Registration (Flow) Initialize 6-35 M2 (Short Cut) 6-54
IP Registration (M) 6-18 M2 Mode 6-54 N
IP Registration (M) Initialize 6-18 M3 (Short Cut) 6-54
IP Registrational (Flow) Registration M3 Mode 6-54 Next 8-28
6-35 M4 (Short Cut) 6-54 Next Probe 6-3
IP Registrational (M) Registration 6-19 M4 Mode 6-54 No.
IP Select 7-82 M5 Mode 6-54 AIP Level 7-85
IP Select (D) 6-27, 7-93, 7-114 MAG (FAM) 6-19, 7-127 Flow Opacity Control 8-52
IP Select (eFlow) 7-110 MAG(FAM) 3-28 IP Select 7-84
Image Select (eFlow) 7-110 Magnification (FAM) 6-19 IP Select (D) 7-115
IP Select (Flow) 6-35, 7-102, 7-119 Measure1 6-3 IP Select (Flow) 7-102, 7-120
IP Select (M) 6-19 Measure2 6-3 IP Select (M) 7-85
IP Select (Power) 7-106, 7-124 Measurement 6-3 IP Select (Power) 7-106, 7-110, 7-125
Measurement Transfer 7-96 Opacity Control 8-42
Menstrual Date 7-60 Number of Print 7-15
J Menu Color Select 7-9
Menu-Function 7-44, 7-69
JPEG Q Factor 7-7, 7-17 Message Display (Review) 7-66 O
MI/TI Display (Frz On) 7-62
Model Name 7-26 Occupation 2-5
L Monitor Back Light 7-11 Opacity 8-29
Monitor BackLight 6-45 Opacity (Flow) 8-33
Monitor Brightness 6-45, 7-11
Laterality 2-10 Opacity Control 8-29, 8-42
Monitor Contrast 6-46, 7-11
Layout 8-47 Option... 2-13
MPPS Server 7-33
LCD/Panel Setup 7-53 Other1 (Short Cut) 6-54
MSI 8-27, 8-37
Learning Function 7-9 Other1 Mode 6-54
MSI Layout 8-27, 8-37
Line Data 7-17 Other2 (Short Cut) 6-54
MSI Menu 8-27
Line Density 8-49, 8-51 Other2 Mode 6-54
MSI Prev/Next 8-28, 8-37
Line Density (3D Scan) 8-33 Other3 (Short Cut) 6-54
MSI Slice Direction 8-28, 8-38
Line Density (Flow 3D) 8-33 Other3 Mode 6-54
MSI Slice Distance 8-28, 8-38
LMP 2-7, 2-8 Other4 (Short Cut) 6-54
MSI Slice Imaging 8-27
Local Ping 7-18 Other4 Mode 6-54
MSI Slice Number 8-28, 8-38
Log Off 6-45 Other5 Mode 6-54
Multi FAM 3-25, 3-27, 6-19, 7-127

MN1-5855 rev.1
INDEX

Overlay Graphic 8-29, 8-40 Procedure ID 2-6 Rotary Plane Mark 7-62
Progressive Clipper 8-29, 8-44 Rotation Angle 8-35, 8-41
PSAX 3-27, 6-19, 7-127 Rotation Axis 8-36, 8-41
P PSAX Off 3-25 Rotation X 8-30
Puncture G Line 6-13 Rotation Y 8-30
Puncture Guide Line 6-13, 7-62 Rotation Z 8-30
Panel LED Brightness 6-46, 7-11
Puncture Measure 6-13 Route 2-11
PARA 2-7, 2-8
PW 6-2 Router1 7-18
Parasternal Short Axis View 6-19
PW Sound On 7-58 Router2 7-18
Patient ID 2-5
Patient Information 2-5 RT3D1 7-44, 8-39
Patient Orientation 2-10 RT3D2 7-44, 8-43
Performed Procedure Step Q RT3D3 7-44, 8-46
Discontinuation Reason Code Sequence R-Wave Beep 7-77

2-27 Query Keys 2-13

Performed Procedure Step Status 2-25,
2-26 S
Performed Protocol Code Sequence 2-10, R
2-11 Sample Volume 6-27, 7-91, 7-112
PF Info Display 7-63 Scale Display 7-92, 7-112
R Wave Beep 6-49
PFD Range 6-36, 7-105, 7-109 Scan Area 6-2, 8-49, 8-51
R-Delay Time 6-49, 7-77
Physio 7-44, 7-76 Scan Area (B(Flow)/D) 7-49
Rec 6-2
Ping 7-30, 7-33 Scan Area (FAM) 7-50
Recorder Select 7-8
Port# 7-18, 7-21, 7-26, 7-30, 7-33 Scan Length 8-34
Ref A 8-29
Position Shift (CV/LN/PA) 7-55 Scan Length (Freehand) 8-49
Ref A, B, C Zoom 8-41
Post Process High 6-47 Scheduled Procedure Step Start Date
Ref B 8-29
Post Process Low 6-47 2-13
Ref C 8-29
Post Processing 6-47, 7-44, 7-88, 7-89 Scheduled Protocol Code Sequence 2-11
Reference A 8-29
Post Processing High 6-47 SCI 3-18
Reference B 8-29
Post Processing Low 6-47 Screen Saver 7-6
Reference C 8-29
Power 6-2, 8-42, 8-52 Screen Saver Display Type 7-7
Reference Point 8-30, 8-47
Power Flow 7-44, 7-103 Search 2-4, 2-15, 6-2
Referring Phys 2-6
Power Limit Override 1-10, 6-48 Select 6-3
Region Calibration 2-10
Preset Control 7-35, 7-36, 7-37 Send to Storage
Rejection (Flow) 6-36, 7-101, 7-118
Preset Set-Up Menu 7-44, 7-45 Color 7-17
Relief
PRF Limit 6-13, 7-79 JPEG Q Factor 7-17
IP Select 7-84
Print (Auto) 7-12, 7-13 Line Data 7-17
IP Select (M) 7-85
Print (Freeze) 7-12 Series/Image Information 2-4, 2-10, 2-11
Relief (B) 6-13
Print (Real Time) 7-13 Serum PSA 2-8
Relief (M) 6-20
Print Area 6-48, 7-15 Set Defaults 2-14
Rendering Mode 8-30, 8-40
Print Queue 6-49 Sex 2-5, 7-60
Reporting Phys 2-6
Print Select 7-14 Shintani 7-60
Resolution 7-115
Print SW (Long Push) 7-73 B1 6-54
AIP Level 7-85
Print SW (Short Push) 7-73 B2 6-54
Resolution Select (D) 6-27
Printer Select (B/W) 7-15 D1 6-54
Resume 7-6
Printer Select (Color) 7-15 D2 6-54
Retries 7-32
Priority Level 6-36 D3 6-54
Retry Interval 7-32
Private Tag 7-17 D4 6-54
Rotary Plane Angle 7-62
Probe 1 6-3 Silky Image Processing 6-14

MN1-5855 rev.1
 INDEX

Silky Image Processing Effect 6-14 T 7-43

Simul Mode 7-58 User authentication 1-24
SIP 6-14, 7-81
T. B. Color 7-52
SIP Effect 6-14, 7-81
T.B. Speed 7-7
Slice Direction 8-47
T.B.Priority (Frz Off) 7-52 V
Slice Distance 8-47
T.B.Priority (Frz On) 7-52
Slice Number 8-47
T.H.E. 3-16, 6-15, 7-49 Vel Range (D) 6-28
Smooth for Lighted 8-40
TDI 3-35, 6-2 Vel Range (Flow) 6-37
Smoothing
TDI Display Type 7-118 Velocity Range (CW) 7-91, 7-92
IP Select 7-84
Thermal Index 6-50, 7-62 Velocity Range (Flow) 7-100, 7-104,
IP Select (Flow) 7-102, 7-120
Threshold Low 8-31, 8-45 7-108, 7-117, 7-122
IP Select (Power) 7-106, 7-110, 7-125
Thumbnail Display 6-50, 7-62 Velocity Range (PW) 7-91, 7-112
Smoothing (3D) 8-31, 8-41
Thumbnail Page 6-50 Velocity Range (PW), Image Optimizer
Smoothing (B) 6-14
Time 7-6 7-112
Sonographer 2-6
Time Cycle 6-50, 6-51, 7-65 Video Clip Auto Stop 6-50, 7-65
Sound Select (Archive) 7-9
Time Out 7-21 Video Output Type 7-9
Sound Select (Panel) 7-8
Timer Freeze 7-6 View Gamma 6-51
Spatial Compound 6-14, 7-81
Timer Freeze, Time 7-6 IP Select 7-84
Spatial Compound Imaging 3-18, 6-14
Tissue Doppler 7-44, 7-111 VOL Cutter 8-31, 8-45
Spectrum Invert 6-27, 7-92, 7-112
Tissue Doppler Imaging 3-35 VOL Cutter Frame 8-31, 8-45
Spectrum Size 7-58
Tissue Flow 7-44, 7-116 Volume 2-11
SR Auto Creation 7-30
Tissue Harmonic Echo 3-16, 6-15
Station Name 7-18, 7-21, 7-26, 7-30, 7-33
Tissue Power Flow 7-44, 7-121
STC 3-13
Total dose 2-11 W
STC Curve 6-15
Trace Fit 3-28, 6-21, 7-127
STC Curve Initialize 6-15
Track Ball Speed 7-7 Wall Motion Reduction 6-37, 7-100,
STC Registration 6-15
Transaction Limit 7-32 7-105
Steering Link 6-49, 7-52
Transfer List Display 6-28 Weight 2-5
Step Angle 8-36, 8-41
Translation 8-31, 8-38 When 8-31
Store 6-2
Trapezoidal Scan 3-19, 6-16, 7-81 Window Center 7-17
Store Media 6-49, 7-65
Trapezoidal Scan Angle 6-16, 7-81 Worklist 2-4
Store on Disk
Triplex Mode 7-58
Syntax 7-17
Triplex VEL Range 7-58
Store on Disk Color 7-17
Triplex, Frame Rate (B) 7-58
Store, Cine 7-44, 7-64 Z
Study Description 2-6
Study ID 2-6 ZOOM 3-9
Study Information 2-6
U Zoom 6-2
Subnet Mask 7-18 Zoom Box Redisplay 7-55
Sweep Speed (D) 6-28, 7-58 Unit (Height) 7-6 Zoom Lock 6-51, 7-92, 7-112
Sweep Speed (FAM) 6-20 Unit (Weight) 7-6 Zoom Method 7-55
Sweep Speed (M) 6-20, 7-55 USB 7-15
Sweep Speed(B) 7-77 Use Requested Procedure/Scheduled
SYNC 4-3 Procedure Step Description for 　
Syntax 7-17 Study/Series Description. 2-14
System Dictionary 7-9 Use split boxes for "Patient name" and
"Referring Physician name" 2-14
User Admin 7-38, 7-39, 7-40, 7-41, 7-42,

MN1-5855 rev.1
INDEX

MN1-5855 rev.1
 Recycling or Disposal

Recycle or dispose of this equipment properly according to your organizational rules and your
local laws.

This symbol on the equipment or on its packaging indicates that this equipment shall not be
treated as household waste. Instead it shall be handed over to the applicable collection point
for the recycling of electrical and electronic products. By ensuring this equipment is disposed
of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and
human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this
equipment. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources.

The equipment contains a primary battery (lithium battery). You should recycle or dispose of
this equipment properly according to your organizational rules and your local laws. For more
detailed information about recycling of this equipment, please contact one of our offices listed
on back cover, or your household waste disposal service.

MN1-5855 rev.1
6-22-1 Mure, Mitaka-Shi, Tokyo, 181-8622 Japan
Tel: +81-422-45-6049
URL: http://www.hitachi-aloka.com

Overseas Offices:

Hitachi Medical Ultrasound Logistics,

Zweigniederlassung der Hitachi Medical Systems Europe Holding AG
Carl-Zeiss-Strasse 5, D-72555 Metzingen, Germany

Distributor

MN1-5855 rev.1 010200 20140326